Buffalo Wild Wings
Buffalo Wild Wings
Buffalo Wild Wings
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
P R O J E C T M A N U A L<br />
FOR<br />
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
at<br />
The Pavilions At Talking Stick<br />
New Development District<br />
8870 East Indian Bend Road<br />
Scottsdale, AZ 85250-8525<br />
Prototype V3.11.3<br />
Issue Date: December 20, 2011<br />
Issued: For Bid<br />
Project No.: [110385.001]
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong> – The Pavilions At Talking Stick<br />
SECTION 00001 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE<br />
PROJECT TITLE:<br />
BUFFALO WILD WING GRILL & BAR<br />
The Pavilions At Talking Stick<br />
New Development District<br />
8870 East Indian Bend Road<br />
Scottsdale, AZ 85250-8525<br />
OWNER:<br />
BUFFALO WILD WINGS GRILL & BAR<br />
Blazin <strong>Wings</strong>, Inc.<br />
5500 Wayzata Blvd. Suite 1600<br />
Minneapolis, MN 55416-1237<br />
(952) 593-9943<br />
ARCHITECT:<br />
GHA Architecture/Development<br />
14110 Dallas Parkway; Suite 300<br />
Dallas, TX 75254<br />
(972) 239-8884<br />
Alan Timmons<br />
DEVELOPMENT ARCHITECTS:<br />
Nadel Architects<br />
3333 E. Camelback Road; Suite 200<br />
Phoenix, AZ 85018<br />
(602) 956-9900 x204<br />
Patricia Flower – R.A. LEED AP – Associate Vice President<br />
DEVELOPMENT CIVIL:<br />
Erickson and Meeks Engineering, LLC.<br />
13444 N. 32 nd Street; Suite 6<br />
Phoenix, AZ 85032<br />
(602) 569-6593<br />
Tom Meeks<br />
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER:<br />
MECHANICAL, PLUMBING<br />
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER:<br />
Ronald A. Roberts Associates, Inc.<br />
2948 N. Stemmons Freeway<br />
Dallas, TX 75247-6103<br />
(214) 637-6299<br />
Matthew Betsill<br />
Michael Bryan Chadwick<br />
11938 Nicole Lane<br />
Forney, TX 75126-7027<br />
(972) 850-3228<br />
Bryan Chadwick<br />
ISSUE DATE: December 20, 2011<br />
END OF PROJECT TITLE PAGE<br />
04-27-11 PROJECT TITLE PAGE<br />
00001 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
DOCUMENTS 0 -- INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION, BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, AND<br />
CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS<br />
00001 - PROJECT TITLE PAGE<br />
00010 - TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
00011 - MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION LIST<br />
00100 - BID SOLICITATION<br />
00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS<br />
00220 - SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION<br />
00221 - SITE SPECIFIC SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT<br />
00400 - BID FORM<br />
00500 - AGREEMENT<br />
DIVISION 1 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
01100 - SUMMARY OF WORK<br />
01200 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES<br />
01300 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS<br />
01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS<br />
01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS<br />
01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS<br />
01620 - REFERENCES<br />
01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS<br />
DIVISION 2 -- SITE CONSTRUCTION<br />
02223 - MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING<br />
02360 - SOIL TREATMENT<br />
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE<br />
03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
03351 - CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER<br />
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY<br />
04065 - MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT<br />
04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES<br />
09-07-11 TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
00010 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
DIVISION 5 – METALS<br />
05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL<br />
05210 - STEEL JOISTS<br />
05310 - STEEL DECK<br />
05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING<br />
05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
DIVISION 6 -- WOOD AND PLASTICS<br />
06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY<br />
06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY<br />
06410 - CUSTOM CABINETS<br />
06415 - COUNTERTOPS<br />
06605 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS<br />
DIVISION 7 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION<br />
07100 - SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING (OPTIONAL)<br />
07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING<br />
07212 - BOARD AND BATT INSULATION<br />
07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM<br />
07260 - AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS<br />
07411 - PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS<br />
07424 - ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM<br />
07535 - MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING<br />
07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES<br />
07900 - JOINT SEALERS<br />
DIVISION 8 -- DOORS AND WINDOWS<br />
08110 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS<br />
08310 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS<br />
08380 - TRAFFIC DOORS<br />
08410 - METAL FRAMED STOREFRONTS<br />
08710 - DOOR HARDWARE<br />
08800 - GLAZING<br />
09-07-11 TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
00010 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES<br />
09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES<br />
09300 - TILE<br />
09511 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS<br />
09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING<br />
09666 - SPECIALTY FLOORING<br />
09680 - CARPET<br />
09720 - WALL COVERING<br />
09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS<br />
DIVISION 10 -- SPECIALTIES<br />
10010 - MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES<br />
10210 - WALL LOUVERS<br />
10263 - CORNER GUARDS<br />
10445 - DOOR AND ROOM SIGNS<br />
10500 - LOCKERS<br />
10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
10536 - AWNINGS<br />
10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES<br />
DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT - Not used, Refer to Drawings<br />
DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS<br />
12493 - WINDOW SHADES<br />
DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - Not used<br />
DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING SYSTEMS - Not used<br />
09-07-11 TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
00010 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
DIVISION 15 -- MECHANICAL<br />
15010 - MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15150 - PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15200 - INSULATION<br />
15300 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (PERFORMANCE BASED)<br />
15400 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES<br />
15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES<br />
15700 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING<br />
15800 - DUCTWORK MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15976 - AUTOMATIC CONTROL SEQUENCE<br />
15990 - TESTING AND BALANCING<br />
DIVISION 16 -- ELECTRICAL<br />
16010 - GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
16030 - CUTTING AND PATCHING<br />
16050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
16111 - CONDUITS AND FITTINGS<br />
16112 - OUTLET BOXES<br />
16113 - PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES<br />
16117 - SAFETY SWITCHES<br />
16118 - FUSES<br />
16120 - WIRE AND CABLE<br />
16140 - WIRING DEVICES<br />
16150 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS<br />
16450 - GROUNDING SYSTEM<br />
16470 - PANELBOARDS<br />
16500 - LIGHTING<br />
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
09-07-11 TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
00010 -4
Material Identification Codes<br />
for use on Drawings and within Specifications<br />
Overview<br />
The Material Identification Codes List is intended to be a tool to improve the coordination and<br />
naming conventions between Drawings and Specifications. The Material Identification Codes<br />
List is organized by CSI MasterFormat Specification Section numbers.<br />
These Material Identification Codes are indicated with the material and product choices<br />
currently available in the <strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong> Master Specification.<br />
Material Identification Codes List 11-01-11<br />
00011-1
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE<br />
SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(CONC1): Unexposed Form Finish, (Rough "as cast"), typical unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
(CONC2): Interior Concrete Slabs, Steel trowel (smooth).<br />
(CONC3): Exterior Horizontal Concrete Surfaces, Float finish, Heavy broom.<br />
(Vapor Retarder): Underslab, 10mil thick multi-layer plastic sheet.<br />
SECTION 03351 - CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER<br />
Indicated on Drawings as: (SC) Sealed Concrete<br />
(SC): Water based, concrete hardener / sealer. Exterior horizontal concrete surfaces.<br />
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY<br />
SECTION 04065 – MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(Mortar): Portland cement lime mortar, masonry cement not allowed.<br />
Mortar Colors:<br />
1. LaFarge North America; “Santan”; color to match (FBR1) Face Brick. Refer to<br />
Section 04810.<br />
2. Spec Mix; Color No. LM-9327-50 #930; color to match (CMU2) Rock Face<br />
Block. Refer to Section 04810.<br />
Mortar Locations:<br />
1. Locations of colored mortar: Used to match Face Brick and Rock Faced Block<br />
Units.<br />
2. Natural colored mortar for all other locations.<br />
(Grout): 3000psi grout.<br />
SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
Concrete Masonry Units<br />
Face Brick Units<br />
(CMU1): Normal weight hollow concrete masonry units.<br />
(CMU2): Normal weight, Integral colored, Rock Face concrete masonry units.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Amcon Block and Precast, Inc., St. Cloud, MN 56304.<br />
Tel: 888-251-6030. www.amconblock.com<br />
2. Color: Custom BWW Blend # RF-526.<br />
(FBR): Type FBS, Grade SW brick units.<br />
1. Size: 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.<br />
2. Manufacturers: Sioux City Brick and Tile Company, Sioux City, Iowa 51102.<br />
Tel: 712-258-7571. www.siouxcitybrick.com<br />
3. Color: Toasted Fine Art Velour.<br />
Material Identification Codes List 11-01-11<br />
00011-2
Block and Brick Coursing: Running Bond, 3/8” concave joints.<br />
Accessories for Section 04810<br />
(Joint Reinforcement): Single Wythe, truss type, hot dip galvanized.<br />
(Wall Ties): Corrugated formed sheet metal, 7/8 inch wide, hot dip galvanized.<br />
(Masonry Veneer Anchors): 2-piece, triangular shape, hot dip galvanized.<br />
(Thru-Wall Flashing): Laminated asphalt impregnated cloth over 3 ounce copper core.<br />
(Building Paper): No. 15 asphalt felt.<br />
(Weeps): Cotton Rope.<br />
(Cavity Mortar Diverter): Semi rigid polyethylene mesh.<br />
DIVISION 5 - METALS<br />
SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING<br />
Indicated on Drawings as: Indicate stud and joist sizes and maximum spacing on Drawings.<br />
(Stl Studs): Structural Steel Studs.<br />
(Stl Joists): Structural Steel Joists.<br />
(Sill Sealer): 1/4” thick, close cell polyethylene.<br />
Exterior Wall Sheathing: Refer to Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry for wall sheathing.<br />
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
Miscellaneous steel shapes, plates and other metal fabrications:<br />
(Stl Angles)<br />
(Stl Channels)<br />
(Loose Lintel)<br />
(Stl Plate)<br />
(Stl Tube)<br />
(Stl Ladder): Steel ladders for roof access.<br />
(Stl Bollards): Exterior bollards.<br />
(SSTL): Stainless Steel Components<br />
DIVISION 6 - WOODS AND PLASTICS<br />
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
Dimensional Framing Lumber and Wood Blocking<br />
(WD FRAMING): Wood framing lumber.<br />
(WD BLKG): Exposed or concealed wood blocking.<br />
Construction Plywood and Sheathing<br />
(SHTG-1): Wall Sheathing:<br />
1. Plywood Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 1, C-D, exposure 1, structural 1. 1/2"<br />
nominal thickness. - Or -<br />
2. Oriented Strand Board Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 2, exposure 1, structural 1.<br />
1/2" nominal thickness.<br />
(SHTG-2): Plywood Roof Sheathing: DOC PS 1, C-D, exterior, structural 1; 3/4" nominal<br />
thickness. Tongue and Groove.<br />
(SHTG-3): Concealed Plywood: DOC PS 1, C-C Plugged, exposure 1. Thickness as<br />
indicated on drawings.<br />
(SHTG-4): Exposed Plywood: DOC PS 1, A-D, interior grade. Thickness as<br />
indicated on drawings.<br />
Material Identification Codes List 11-01-11<br />
00011-3
(SHTG-5): Electrical Panel Boards: APA rated sheathing, fire retardant treated. 3/4”<br />
nominal thickness.<br />
Treated Wood Material<br />
(PT): Preservative treated wood materials.<br />
(FT): Fire retardant treated wood materials.<br />
Fiber Cement Siding and Trim<br />
(Fiber Cement Siding): 5/16” thick, vertical siding panels, smooth texture.<br />
(Fiber Cement Soffit): 1/4" thick, soffit panel, smooth texture.<br />
(Fiber Cement Trim): 1” thick, trim boards, width as indicated, smooth texture.<br />
Membrane Underlayment: 40 mil. thick, self-adhering sheet underlayment at Entry Canopy.<br />
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
Items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor:<br />
(WD1): White Maple, transparent finish.<br />
(WD2): Southern Pine.<br />
Factory Finished Millwork: WIC Manual of Millwork, Section 5, System #5 - Catalyzed<br />
Polyurethane, Clear.<br />
Accessories for Section 06200<br />
(Adjustable Shelf Brackets): Brackets and standards, white finish.<br />
SECTION 06410 – CUSTOM CABINETS<br />
Items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor:<br />
(WD1): White Maple, transparent finish.<br />
Plastic Laminate<br />
(PLAM1): Wilsonart # 1573-60, Frosty White, Matte.<br />
(PLAM3): Wilsonart # 1595-60, Black, Matte<br />
Accessories for Section 06410<br />
(Grommet): Power cord grommet, 3” diameter.<br />
SECTION 06415 - COUNTERTOPS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
Plastic Laminate<br />
Solid Surface<br />
(PLAM2): Wilsonart # 4884-38, Flame Soapstone, Standard finish.<br />
(SS1): Corian, “Aztec Gold”.<br />
(SS2): Corian, “Night Sky”, Black.<br />
Material Identification Codes List 11-01-11<br />
00011-4
SECTION 06605 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
FRP Adhesive<br />
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels (FRP): 0.090 inch thick, USDA approved, textured<br />
surface wall panels with Class III/Class C fire rating.<br />
(FRP1): White.<br />
(FRP2): Black.<br />
Franklin International; Titebond Solvent-Based FRP Adhesive.<br />
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION<br />
SECTION 07100 - SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(Waterproofing): 60 mil. Thick, Self-Adhering, Sheet Membrane Waterproofing.<br />
(i.e. Bituthene 3000)<br />
(Protection Board): 1/4 thick, fan folded extruded-polystyrene board.<br />
SECTION 07160 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(Dampproofing): Emulsified Bituminous Dampproofing, Non-fibered, water-based,<br />
non-sag asphaltic coating designed for spray application.<br />
(Protection Board): 1/4 thick, fan folded extruded-polystyrene board.<br />
SECTION 07212 – BOARD AND BATT INSULATION<br />
Indicated on Drawings as: (INSUL#)<br />
(INSUL1): Unfaced fiberglass batt insulation.<br />
(INSUL2): Under Slab and Foundation Insulation, Extruded Polystyrene Board<br />
(INSUL3): Roof Insulation, Polyisocyanurate board with organic/inorganic facers.<br />
SECTION 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM<br />
Indicated on Drawings as: (EIFS#)<br />
(EIFS1) Key Note 18: Color: # 401, “Pretzel”.<br />
(EIFS2) Key Note 19: Color: Color to Match Sherwin Williams Color # SW6898,<br />
“Social Butterfly”, (C13).<br />
(EIFS3) Key Note 20: Color: # 714, “Licorice”.<br />
(EIFS4) Key Note 21: Color: # 310, “China White”.<br />
Finish: “Sandpebble” finish on all colors.<br />
SECTION 07260 – AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(Air Barrier): DuPont Tyvek.<br />
SECTION 07411 – PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(Standing Seam Metal Roof): 24 gauge, galvanized steel panels, 12 inch wide. Kynar<br />
finish, Color: Matte Black.<br />
Material Identification Codes List 11-01-11<br />
00011-5
SECTION 07424 - ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(Aluminum Composite Panels): 4mm composite panel with 3-coat, Kynar finish.<br />
Color: Una-Clad “Silver Metallic”. Rout and Return wet<br />
joint system.<br />
SECTION 07535 – MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING<br />
Indicated on Drawings as<br />
(Membrane Roofing System): Mechanically attached thermoplastic sheet, .040 inch<br />
thick. FM Class A and I-60 wind resistance.<br />
SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
Indicated on Drawings as: (SHT MET#)<br />
(SHT MET1): Prefinished galvanized steel, kynar coated. Color: Una-Clad “Silver Metallic”.<br />
(SHT MET2): Standard galvanized flashing.<br />
(Reglets): Manufactured reglets, surface mounted and recessed.<br />
SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(Roof Hatch): Roof hatch for vertical ladder locations (2'-6" by 3'-0"), Bilco Type S<br />
Roof Hatch.<br />
SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as: (SLNT)<br />
(SLNT1): General Purpose Exterior Sealant, 1 part, polyurethane.<br />
(SLNT2): General Purpose Interior Sealant, acrylic.<br />
(SLNT3): Sanitary/Tile Sealant, 1 part , mildew resistant silicone.<br />
(SLNT4): Concrete Paving Joint Sealant, 2 part, self-leveling polyurethane for traffic.<br />
(SLNT5): Butyl Sealant.<br />
(SLNT6): Low modulus Silicone Sealant, 1 part, general purpose silicone.<br />
(SLNT7): Ultra-Low Modulus Silicone Sealant, 1 part, silicone.<br />
Sealant Schedule - Sealant types will be scheduled within the project manual as follows:<br />
(SLNT1): General Purpose Exterior Sealant, use for:<br />
a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.<br />
b. Joints between concrete and other materials.<br />
c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.<br />
d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.<br />
(SLNT2): General Purpose Interior Sealant, use for:<br />
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.<br />
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.<br />
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.<br />
(SLNT3): Sanitary/Tile Sealant, use for:<br />
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces.<br />
b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.<br />
c. Control joints in tile installations in toilet rooms and kitchen.<br />
(SLNT4): Concrete Paving Joint Sealant use for:<br />
a. Joints in concrete sidewalks and vehicular paving.<br />
(SLNT5): Butyl Sealant, use for:<br />
a. Seam sealant for masonry flashing.<br />
b. Bedding sealant for thresholds and sills.<br />
Material Identification Codes List 11-01-11<br />
00011-6
(SLNT6): Low modulus Silicone Sealant, use for:<br />
a. Air barrier perimeter.<br />
b. Exterior sheet metal joints.<br />
(SLNT7): Ultra-Low Modulus Silicone Sealant, use for:<br />
a. Perimeter and internal joints in EIFS System.<br />
DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS<br />
SECTION 08110 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(HM Frames): 14 gauge galvanized for Exterior Frames. 14 gauge for Traffic Door<br />
Frames. 16 gauge for Interior Frames.<br />
(HM Doors): 16 gauge galvanized with polystyrene core for Exterior Doors. 16 gauge<br />
with honeycomb core for Interior Doors.<br />
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(Wood Doors): Interior 1-3/4” Solid-Core Doors with Plain Sliced, Select White Maple<br />
veneers.<br />
Finish (PS19): Transparent finished doors field finished under Section 09900 - Paints<br />
and Coatings.<br />
SECTION 08310 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(AP) Access Panel: Access panels for drywall, EIFS and composite panel soffit locations.<br />
SECTION 08380 - TRAFFIC DOORS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(TD): Chase Model # SC-3018, Plastic laminate both sides, 18” s.s. impact plate<br />
and 9” x 14” acrylic vision panel.<br />
Plastic Laminate Colors:<br />
Black: Formica Black 909-58, Dining/Public side of door.<br />
White: Formica White 949-58, Kitchen side of door.<br />
SECTION 08410 – METAL FRAMED STOREFRONTS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(Aluminum Storefront & Window Framing): 2” x 4-1/2”, thermally broken, center glazed<br />
to accept 1/4" and 1” insulated glass. Clear Anodized Finish.<br />
(Aluminum Doors): 1-3/4 thick, medium stile aluminum doors.<br />
Aluminum Door Hardware: All Hardware specified except Cylinders and Door Stops.<br />
Material Identification Codes List 11-01-11<br />
00011-7
SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE<br />
Indicated within the Hardware Groups and on the Door Schedule<br />
Manufacturers<br />
Hardware Supplier<br />
Hinges: PBB.<br />
Lock and Latch Sets; Schlage; ND Series. Cylinders: Schlage.<br />
Exit Alarm Locks: Von Duprin; Guard – X.<br />
Panic Exit Devices: Detex; Value Series.<br />
Push/Pull Sets; Kick Plates/Armor Plates: Hiawatha.<br />
Closers: LCN.<br />
Flush Bolts; Coat Hooks; Hinge Pin Stops; Door Viewers: Ives.<br />
Wall Stops: Don-Jo Manufacturing.<br />
Weatherstripping; Sill Sweep; Thresholds; Rain Drips: Reese.<br />
Twin City Hardware: Brent Chuhel; 651-731-7126; bchuhel@tchco.com<br />
HARDWARE GROUPS<br />
Hardware Furnished by Section 08410 – Metal Framed Storefronts<br />
GROUP 1: Interior Entry Vestibule Doors – Door No. 02<br />
GROUP 2: Exterior Entry and Dining “B” (Patio) Doors – Door Nos. 01 and 15<br />
GROUP 14: Single Aluminum Bar (Patio) Door – Door No. 19<br />
Note: TCH to provide Door Stops for Group 1 & Cylinders and Door Stops for Group 2 & 14<br />
Hardware Furnished by TCH<br />
GROUP 3: Restroom Doors – Door Nos. 03 and 07<br />
GROUP 4: Office – Door No. 10<br />
GROUP 5: Family Restroom<br />
GROUP 6: Exterior Service Doors - Door Nos. 11 and 14<br />
GROUP 7: Restroom Stall Doors – Door Nos. 4, 5, 6, and 8<br />
GROUP 8: Rear Vestibule (Interior) - Door No. 13<br />
GROUP 9: Mechanical Room – Door No. 18<br />
GROUP 10: Patio Gates – Door Nos. 16 and 17<br />
GROUP 11: Traffic Doors – Door Nos. 9 and 12<br />
GROUP 12: Coat Hooks – Bar Stool Area<br />
Hardware Furnished by Owner<br />
GROUP 13: Padlocks – Keg Storage, Trash & Chemical Enclosure & Roof Hatch<br />
Material Identification Codes List 11-01-11<br />
00011-8
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
Monolithic Glass<br />
Insulated Glass<br />
(GL1): Clear tempered glass, 1/4".<br />
(GL2): Clear insulated unit, heat strengthened/tempered, 1/4"/1/2"/1/4". Low E coating<br />
on No. 2 surface.<br />
Insulated Spandrel Units<br />
Unframed Mirrors<br />
(GL3): Clear insulated unit, heat strengthened, 1/4" (clear/frit)/1/2"/1/4" (clear).<br />
Ceramic frit on No. 2 surface. Frit color: Black.<br />
(GL4): Standard tempered glass mirror, 1/4”.<br />
(GL5): One-way mirror glass, 1/4”. Provided by Section 08110.<br />
Tinted Window Film<br />
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES<br />
(TF1): 3M Sun Control Window Film, Prestige Series, PR 70.<br />
SECTION 09220 – PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER<br />
Indicated on Drawings as: (PLS-##)<br />
(Stucco): Exterior portland cement plaster on metal lath.<br />
SECTION 09260 – GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES<br />
Indicated on Drawings as: (GYB-#)<br />
(GYB1): Not Used.<br />
(GYB2): 5/8" Mold and Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board.<br />
Cement Backer Board<br />
(GYB5): 5/8" Portland Cement Panels, USG Corporation: Durock.<br />
Metal Framing Systems (interior non-load bearing)<br />
(Metal Studs): Non-Loadbearing framing.<br />
(Ceiling Channels): 2-1/2”, 20 gauge ceiling channels.<br />
(Furring Channels): 7/8” Hat-shaped furring channels.<br />
Gypsum Board Accessories and Trim Pieces<br />
(Sheet Metal Backing)<br />
(Corner Bead)<br />
(CJ): Control Joint.<br />
(EJ): Expansion Joint.<br />
Gypsum Board Finish Level Schedule<br />
Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view.<br />
Level 2: Utility areas and areas behind cabinetry.<br />
Level 4: Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive paint finish.<br />
Material Identification Codes List 11-01-11<br />
00011-9
SECTION 09300 - TILE<br />
Ceramic Tile<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(CT1): 12” x 12” Floor and Wall Tile, Back Bay Iron Range,<br />
RBC # EQCP96-1212, Sparta.<br />
(CT2): 6” x 12” Cove Base Tile, BWW Super Black Textured,<br />
RBC # BW9235-COVE12, Black.<br />
(CT2a): 1” x 6” Cove Base Outcorner, BWW Super Black Textured,<br />
RBC # BW9235-COVE12OC, Black.<br />
(CT3): 4” x 4” Black Accent Tile, Back Bay “Trend”, RBC # BWTB35-44, Black.<br />
(CT4): 4” x 4” Yellow Accent Tile, Back Bay “Trend”, RBC # BWTB34-44, Yellow.<br />
(T3) Trim: Schluter Systems, Rondec RO 80 EB, brushed stainless. Use w/ tile in restrooms.<br />
(Waterproof Membrane System): Laticrete: 9235 or Hydroment Black Top 90210.<br />
Quarry Tile<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(QT1): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile with abrasive surface, RBC # OT10A-66, Red.<br />
(QT2): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Base, RBC # 10-Q3565, Red.<br />
(QT2a): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Right Corner, RBC # 10-QCR3565, Red.<br />
(QT2b): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Left Corner, RBC # 10-QCL3565, Red.<br />
SECTION 09511 – SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as: (ACT-#)<br />
(ACT1): 24 x 48, Vinyl faced gypsum board, White. USG ClimaPlus Vinyl, Stipple 3270.<br />
(ACT2): 24 x 24, Vinyl faced gypsum board, White. USG ClimaPlus Vinyl, Stipple 3260.<br />
(ACT3): 24 x 24, Mineral fiber, White. USG, Radar ClimaPlus 2210.<br />
(ACT4): 24 x 24, Mineral fiber, Flat Black. USG, Radar ClimaPlus 2210.<br />
(GRID1): 15/16" Light Duty, aluminum grid system. USG; Donn AX Suspension System.<br />
for (ACT1) and (ACT2).<br />
(GRID2): 15/16" Intermediate Duty, galvanized steel grid system. USG; Donn DX/DXL<br />
Double Web Grid System, for (ACT3) and (ACT4).<br />
(Egg Crate Ceiling Panel): 1/2” x 1/2" x 3/8” thick, styrene plastic egg crate panel. 24” x<br />
24” panel, Color Black.<br />
SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
Resilient Base<br />
(RB) 6 inch base, Coved, Color Black.<br />
(T2) Transition Strip: Johnsonite, Inc, Two component system with metal track and vinyl<br />
“T” moulding Use w/ carpet and tile.<br />
Track: # MTC-00-A.<br />
“T” Moulding: CD-XX; Color #40, Black.<br />
SECTION 09666 - SPECIALTY FLOORING<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(SPFL): 1/4” thick, vinyl flooring with heat welded seams and coved base, Light Gray.<br />
(Cove Base Cap): Aluminum “Z” cove base cap.<br />
SECTION 09680 - CARPET<br />
Indicated on Drawings as: (CPT-#)<br />
(CPT1): Custom Mohawk, Broadloom, BWW 50545-37907.<br />
(Carpet Base): Mohawk, Broadloom, Spectrum V, BC246; Color: XJ7234, Black.<br />
6” high.<br />
Material Identification Codes List 11-01-11<br />
00011-10
SECTION 09720 - WALL COVERINGS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as: (WC-#)<br />
(WC1): Forbo Marmoleum, Linoleum Wall Covering, Pattern: Real, Color: #2939,Black.<br />
(T4) Trim: Corner Guard; 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x length as required, PVC corner guard.<br />
SECTION 09900 – PAINTS AND COATINGS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
Color Indicators<br />
(PS#) = Paint System: Prime and Topcoat on Substrate<br />
(C#) = Color Number: Color and Sheen<br />
Example: (PS1/C2) = Paint System and Color<br />
All products from Sherwin-Williams Co., (SW)<br />
(C1): Match RL Steeple Chase, Color Accents, Satin.<br />
(C2): SW #6328, “Fireweed”, Satin.<br />
(C3): SW #6683, “Bee”, Satin.<br />
(C4): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Flat.<br />
(C5): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Satin.<br />
(C6): SW #7006, “Extra White”, Satin.<br />
(C7): SW #6683, “Bee”, Gloss.<br />
(C8): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Semi-Gloss.<br />
(C9): SW #7055, “Enduring Bronze”, Color to match Face Brick (FBR), Semi-Gloss.<br />
Refer to Section 04810.<br />
(C10): SW #6117, “Smoky Topaz”, Color to match (EIFS1), Semi-Gloss.<br />
Refer to Section 07240.<br />
(C11): SW #7055, “Enduring Bronze”, Semi-Gloss Epoxy.<br />
(C12): SW #7006, “Extra White”, Semi-Gloss Epoxy.<br />
(C13): SW #6898, “Social Butterfly”, Satin, Color match for (EIFS2).<br />
(C14): Clear Finish, Polyurethane Satin, Wood Doors.<br />
(C15): SW #6375, “Honeycomb”, Satin.<br />
Substrates<br />
Exterior<br />
Concrete<br />
Concrete block<br />
Steel<br />
Galvanized steel<br />
HM Doors and Frames<br />
Fiber Cement Siding and Trim<br />
Gas Piping<br />
Interior<br />
Gypsum board<br />
HM Doors and Frames<br />
Steel overhead structure<br />
Wood, painted<br />
Wood, clear finished<br />
SECTION 09960 – FIELD APPLIED HIGH PERFORMANCE PAINT SYSTEM<br />
This Optional Section is used for specific remodel projects only.<br />
(PS30): PPG Coraflon ADS; Field applied kynar finish for application to existing<br />
storefronts.<br />
(C20): Color: No. ADS9833030, “Anodized Aluminum”.<br />
Material Identification Codes List 11-01-11<br />
00011-11
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES<br />
SECTION 10010 – MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(Knox Box): Knox Company, 3200 Series, Option for Recessed or Surface Mount. Color:<br />
Dark Bronze.<br />
(Precast Concrete Splash Blocks): Install at downspout locations.<br />
SECTION 10210 - WALL LOUVERS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(LVR1): Intake Louvers with insect screens.<br />
(LVR2): Exhaust Louvers with bird screens.<br />
SECTION 10263 – CORNER GUARDS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(WCG1): 2” x 2” x 48” long, stainless steel wall corner guards.<br />
SECTION 10445 – DOOR AND ROOM SIGNS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(SIGN1): 6” x 9”, Handicap Wall Sign, black sign with engraved white letters and<br />
symbols and Braille coding. Product # SG 2521B, Women.<br />
(SIGN2): 6” x 9”, Handicap Wall Sign, black sign with engraved white letters and<br />
symbols and Braille coding. Product # SG 2511B, Men.<br />
(SIGN3): 4” x 16”, Door sign, black sign with engraved white letters.<br />
Product # SG 2025B, Women.<br />
(SIGN4): 4” x 16”, Door sign, black sign with engraved white letters.<br />
Product # SG 2015B, Men.<br />
SECTION 10500 - LOCKERS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(Lockers): 12” x 12” surface mounted lockers. Configuration: Double tier. 2 units high, 4<br />
units wide, 45” coat rod mounted under lockers. ASI Storage Solutions, Inc.<br />
SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES<br />
Indicated on Drawings as: (FE-#)<br />
(FE1): Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical, bracket mounted.<br />
(FE2): Class K Wet Chemical, bracket mounted.<br />
(FE1 CAB): Cabinet Mounted Portable Fire Extinguishers: Type (FE1) extinguisher.<br />
SECTION 10536 - AWNINGS<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(Fabric Awnings): Fabric awning on aluminum frame, furnished as part of signage<br />
package.<br />
(Awning Fabric): Cooley “Weathertyte Lite” Acrylic Awning Fabric, Part # WTL-74DSBLK.<br />
www.weathertyte.com, Color: Black.<br />
Material Identification Codes List 11-01-11<br />
00011-12
SECTION 10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
The following Toilet Accessories are supplied through Twin City Hardware<br />
Framed Mirrors<br />
(MIR1): Framed mirror, 24” x 36”.<br />
(MIR2): Framed laminated mirror, 24” x 60”.<br />
Unframed Mirrors: Bar Area; Refer to codes under Section 08800 - Glazing.<br />
Sanitary Napkin Disposal<br />
(SND): Surface mounted, sanitary disposal, Bobrick Model B270.<br />
Grab Bars (GB) 1-1/2" Grab Bar - Concealed mounting.<br />
(GB1) 18” long.<br />
(GB2) 36” long.<br />
(GB3) 42” long.<br />
Diaper Changing Station<br />
(DCS): Koala, Model KD-200, wall mounted, horizontal.<br />
The following Toilet Accessories are Owner Furnished<br />
Soap Dispensers<br />
(SDISP): Ecolab, Digitizer Handsoap Dispenser.<br />
Paper Towel Dispenser<br />
(PTD):<br />
Toilet Paper Dispenser<br />
1. Tork, Intuition Hand Towel Roll Dispenser.<br />
OR<br />
2. Tork, Elevation H1 Matic Towel Dispenser.<br />
(TPD): Tork, Bath Tissue Jumbo Roll Twin Dispenser.<br />
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT<br />
NOT USED<br />
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS<br />
SECTION 12493 – WINDOW SHADES<br />
Indicated on Drawings as:<br />
(Window Shades): Owner Furnished, MechoShade 5 manual roller shades.<br />
1. Fabric Color: EuroTwill Shade Cloth; No. 6012, “Charcoal”.<br />
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION<br />
NOT USED<br />
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS<br />
NOT USED<br />
-End of Materials Identification Codes List-<br />
Material Identification Codes List 11-01-11<br />
00011-13
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 00100 - BID SOLICITATION<br />
1.01 Bid Invitation and Submission for the above referenced project shall be by e-mail and<br />
through the Owner’s FTP Web Site.<br />
1.02 Bids are to be received no later than 3:00 PM Central Standard Time on the date defined by<br />
the Owner. LATE BIDS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED FOR CONSIDERATION.<br />
1.03 Bidders agree in submitting a proposal that the bid will remain firm for a period not less than<br />
ninety (90) days from the bid due date stipulated above. Bids to receive consideration must<br />
be complete and cover the full scope of work described in the bid documents and must<br />
include unit pricing (see attached). Substitutions for material and equipment listed in the bid<br />
documents are not permitted. Clarifications and acknowledgement of Addenda shall be<br />
noted in the bid proposal.<br />
1.04 By submitting a bid each bidder represents and acknowledges the following:<br />
A. They have read and understand the bid documents and their bid is made in accordance<br />
therewith. Bid shall acknowledge and record the bid documents issuance dated and index of<br />
drawings;<br />
B. Basis of payment is a LUMP SUM;<br />
C. Has visited the site (General Contractor and/or Subcontractor) and has familiarized themselves<br />
with local conditions under which the work is to be performed. Discrepancies between existing<br />
conditions and bid documents shall be identified, written, and submitted to Owner for<br />
clarification prior to bid submission. Compensation for unidentified discrepancies shall be at the<br />
Owner's discretion for payment.<br />
D. Their bid is based upon the materials, systems and equipment described in the bid documents<br />
without exceptions (No substitutions will be accepted on material and equipment as listed in the<br />
bid documents).<br />
E. Their bid is based on a site specific schedule, from permit to Certificate of Occupancy, as stated<br />
in the Instructions to Bidders Document. No extension of the project's schedule is anticipated<br />
and no extension of the contract is allowed without the specific written instructions of the Owner.<br />
The proposed construction time is firm and critical.<br />
F. Within seven (7) days after award of the contract, the successful bidder will submit a<br />
construction schedule and subcontractor list to the Owner. Owner retains the right to reject any<br />
subcontractor bids as deemed necessary.<br />
G. Upon the start of construction, Contractor shall submit daily progress reports, and weekly<br />
progress photos (hard or digital photos), due on Thursday evenings.<br />
H. The Bid will identify the Project Manager and Superintendent for the job.<br />
1.05 Refer to Drawing Sheet G001 for Project Responsibility Matrix.<br />
1.06 All questions must be received in writing no less than seven days before bids are due.<br />
A. Bid proposals must be in accordance with the Owner provided Bid Template. See Budget Bid<br />
Template issued for site specific bids.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 BID SOLICITATION<br />
00100 -1
SECTION 00200 - INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS<br />
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS<br />
The Pavilions At Talking Stick / Scottsdale, AZ<br />
PART 1 - PRE-BID REQUIREMENTS<br />
1.01<br />
INTENT<br />
A. The Owner/Architect has made every effort to set forth in the Bid Documents the complete<br />
scope of the Work. Nevertheless, minor omissions and discrepancies shall not excuse the<br />
Bidder from providing a price to totally complete the project in accordance with the intent of<br />
these documents.<br />
1. Bring any conflicts, omissions, or discrepancies to the attention of the Owner prior to<br />
submission of an executed bid form. These issues shall be communicated via fax or<br />
email only. No verbal direction is allowed.<br />
2. After execution of the Contract, no extra charges will be allowed for items of work where<br />
such are concluded to conform to normal construction practices and methods.<br />
3. The Contractor and subcontractors have read and understand the Bidding Documents and<br />
shall base their bids in accordance with these documents. If conflicts occur within these<br />
documents, and without prior clarification, the bidders shall base his bid on the most<br />
stringent case of each conflict.<br />
1.02<br />
CONFIRMATION<br />
A. Inquiries: Notify the Owner if the meaning of the documents is in doubt, or if discrepancies<br />
or omissions are noted. This notification shall be by written correspondence only. An<br />
Addendum clarifying the issue in question will be sent to all Bidders.<br />
B. Site Inspection: Visit the location where the Work is to be performed, become thoroughly<br />
familiar with all conditions affecting the work, and compare conditions with the Bid<br />
Documents. No consideration will be granted for any misunderstanding of existing<br />
conditions resulting from failure to visit the site.<br />
04-27-11 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS<br />
00200 -1
CONTRACT FORMS<br />
C. Read carefully and become familiar with the forms identified in the List of Contract Forms.<br />
1. Should the Owner elect to enter into an agreement to execute the Work, the listed forms<br />
prepared by <strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong>, Inc. shall be used. A copy of the Contract accompanies<br />
these Instructions to Bidders for review.<br />
1.03<br />
LAWS AND REGULATIONS<br />
A. All applicable federal, state, and local laws and ordinances, as well as the rules and<br />
regulations of the jurisdiction where the work is to be executed, shall apply to the Contract<br />
throughout. These will be deemed to be included in the Contract to the same extent as<br />
though herein written, including, but not limited to the following:<br />
1. Rules and regulations issued by the City of Scottsdale, AZ.<br />
2. Rules and regulations issued by the State of Arizona.<br />
3. Rules and regulations issued by the Public Health Division of Scottsdale AZ.<br />
4. Rules and regulations issued as part of a developer’s agreement.<br />
1.04<br />
COMPLETION TIME<br />
A. Evaluation of each Bid will include serious consideration of the time of completion. The<br />
Bidder shall be prepared to execute the Contract to accommodate the Owner's commitments<br />
and shall govern himself accordingly in completing the Bid Form.<br />
B. The Bidder is hereby advised that the Owner has made commitments to The Pavilions At<br />
Talking Stick based upon the following construction schedule:<br />
1. Feb 13 th 2012 - Start Construction.<br />
2. June 2012 - Complete Construction.<br />
PART 2 - BID PROCEDURES<br />
2.01<br />
BID DOCUMENTS<br />
A. You may view and order bid documents by going to the <strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong> Online Plan<br />
Room at: www.DesignBidBuild.net/franz?<strong>Buffalo</strong><strong>Wild</strong><strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. If it is your first time, please register and retain your login information for future access to the<br />
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong> Online Plan Room.<br />
C. After you have registered. Please use your email address and the password you created to<br />
log into the Plan Room. Please enter the project password (This is case<br />
sensitive) Once you have selected the project, review the Bid Details for information on<br />
ordering documents.<br />
04-27-11 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS<br />
00200 -2
D. To receive Bid Notices, Bid Addendums, Construction Bulletins, Shipped Order<br />
Confirmations, and Electronic Downloads for this project from <strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong>, you must<br />
place the following email address in your list of Outlook Contacts: notice@designbidbuild.net<br />
Notifications are sent from this email address and not from <strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong>. If you do not<br />
do this, your email server may block the receipt of these notifications. There is a ?Help<br />
button that you can select for assistance using the Online Plan Room.<br />
E. If you still have problems, please contact Franz Reprographics by phone @ 763-503-3401.<br />
F. Trusted Site Settings: www.designbidbuild.net will need to be set as a trusted site. Go to<br />
‘Internet Options’, under ‘Tools’ and click on the ‘Security Tab’. Then go to the ‘Trusted<br />
Sites’ option and click on ‘Sites’. Type: https://www.designbidbuild.net into the text field and<br />
click ‘Add’. The name will then drop into the menu below. Repeat this for:<br />
http://designbidbuild.net when entering this address, uncheck “require server<br />
verification(https:) for all sites in this zone. Click ‘OK’ to leave<br />
2.02<br />
PREPARATION OF BIDS<br />
A. The Bid shall be prepared using the Bid Form template forwarded electronically by <strong>Buffalo</strong><br />
<strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong>, Inc.; no other forms will be considered.<br />
1. Bids shall be submitted electronically, with hard copy to follow within 48 hrs. Email Bids to<br />
Carmen Conley - (bids@buffalowildwings.com)<br />
2. Bids shall include the Bidder's legal name, fully written.<br />
3. Oral, telegraphic, or other modifications will not be considered.<br />
4. Bids shall include a preliminary construction schedule.<br />
5. Bids shall include a list of qualifications and or exclusions.<br />
6. Bid period is approximately three (3) weeks.<br />
B. Bid Forms shall be sent for delivery prior to the date and time indicated in the Invitation to<br />
Bid Letter.<br />
2.03<br />
OWNER’S RESPONSE TO BIDS<br />
A. Submitted Bid Forms will be opened and read privately on the date indicated in the Invitation<br />
to Bid Letter. Notice of award will be made by the Owner after consideration of Bids<br />
received.<br />
B. The Owner reserves the right to respond to the Bids as follows:<br />
1. Reject any or all Bids without explanation.<br />
2. Waive technicalities.<br />
3. Advertise for new bids.<br />
4. Proceed to do the work otherwise.<br />
C. The following Bids may be rejected as being informal:<br />
1. Bids that fail to meet the requirements of these instructions.<br />
2. Bids that are incomplete, conditional, or obscure.<br />
3. Bids that contain additions not called for, erasures, alterations, or other irregularities.<br />
4. Bids that contain abnormally high or abnormally low prices for any class or item of work.<br />
04-27-11 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS<br />
00200 -3
PART 3 - CONTRACT EXECUTION<br />
3.01<br />
POST-BID SUBMITTALS<br />
A. After notification of selection for the award of a Contract, but prior to issuance of a<br />
Construction Agreement, the Bidder shall submit the following to the Owner in writing.<br />
1. A designation of the work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces.<br />
2. Names of the manufacturers, products and the suppliers of principal items or systems of<br />
materials and equipment proposed for the Work.<br />
3. Names of persons or entities proposed for the execution of principal portions of the<br />
Work.<br />
B. The Owner will notify the Bidder in writing if the Owner has reasonable objection to a<br />
Subcontractor proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner has reasonable objection to a proposed<br />
Subcontractor, the Bidder may, at the Bidder's option:<br />
1. Withdraw the bid.<br />
2. Submit an acceptable substitute subcontractor with an adjustment in the Bid to cover the<br />
difference in cost.<br />
C. The Owner may accept the adjusted Bid Price or disqualify the Bidder. Persons and entities<br />
accepted by the Owner must be used on the work for which they were proposed and shall not<br />
be changed except with the written consent of the Owner.<br />
3.02<br />
INSURANCE AND BONDS<br />
A. Insurance: Upon receipt of a written “Notice to Proceed”, the Bidder shall furnish to the<br />
Owner a certificate of insurance in compliance with the requirements of the following:<br />
1. General Conditions of the Contract.<br />
2. Special Conditions of the Contract.<br />
B. Performance and Payment Bonds (if required by Owner): Upon receipt of a Construction<br />
Contract, the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner a Performance Bond and Labor & Materials<br />
Payment Bond, both for the full amount of the Contract.<br />
1. The bonds shall be provided by a properly qualified surety company.<br />
2. The cost of the Performance and Payment Bonds shall be indicated on the Bid Form and<br />
shall be included in the total proposed Contract Amount.<br />
3.03<br />
LABOR FORCE<br />
A. Cooperation: The Bidder is advised that the Work may be performed within a building<br />
currently occupied by the public. The Bidder shall assure the Owner that he will provide<br />
labor that can work without unduly disturbing the public and ongoing operations within the<br />
building.<br />
B. Non-Discrimination: The Bidder is advised that the Owner will not tolerate any<br />
discrimination on the basis of age, gender, race, national origin, or sexual orientation by the<br />
Bidder or Subcontractors.<br />
END OF BID INSTRUCTIONS<br />
04-27-11 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS<br />
00200 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 00220 - SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 GENERAL<br />
A. Geotechnical Investigation (Subsurface Soils Tests) for the project site has been performed and a<br />
report of that investigation has been completed. A copy of the investigation report is contained<br />
within Section 00221.<br />
1.02 SUBSURFACE INFORMATION<br />
A. Log of borings indicates materials penetrated at specific locations. Owner and/or Architect<br />
assume no responsibility for any conclusions or interpretations made by Contractor related to<br />
information included in the Report. Should Contractor require additional information concerning<br />
sub-surface conditions, he may without cost to Owner, make additional investigations. Should<br />
additional investigations produce information different from that in Soil Report, notify Owner in<br />
writing.<br />
1.03 REQUIREMENT<br />
A. Contractor read and otherwise become completely familiar with contents of Soil Report, including<br />
but not limited to its recommendations for preparation of subsoil, bases, sub-bases and fill and<br />
construction of building foundations, parking and paving. Provide building foundations in<br />
compliance with recommendations in Report. Should discrepancy be found between the<br />
requirements of Soil Report and the drawings and/or specifications, notify Owner in writing prior<br />
to beginning Work.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
Not used<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
Not used<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION<br />
00220 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 01100 – SUMMARY OF WORK<br />
PART 1—GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK<br />
A. Project Identification:<br />
1. Project: <strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong> Grill & Bar<br />
The Pavilions At Talking Stick<br />
New Development District<br />
8870 East Indian Bend Road<br />
Scottsdale, AZ 85250-8525<br />
B. Contract Documents, prepared by the Architect, GHA Architecture/Development<br />
C. The Work consists of a total square footage as described in the Contract Documents.<br />
D. All Work shall be constructed in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations. Work<br />
shall be installed in accordance with generally accepted standards of construction and in strict<br />
accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and specifications whether specifically<br />
detailed in the Contract Documents or not.<br />
E. Contractor shall maintain Owner and Landlord required insurance and Workers’ Compensation<br />
at all times and furnish proof of same to Owner prior to start of construction.<br />
F. Work Not Included: The following will be provided by others:<br />
1. See the Comprehensive Equipment Schedule and Project Responsibility Matrix on<br />
Drawing G001, which designates responsibility for furnishing and installing the various<br />
items included in the Project, as well as final connections.<br />
1.02 WORK / SITE RESTRICTIONS<br />
A. Contractor shall comply with all building Owner’s standards.<br />
B. Contractor’s Use of Premises: During construction, Contractor shall have full use of the site.<br />
Contractor’s use of premises is limited only by Owner’s right to perform work or employ other<br />
contractors on portions of Project and as follows:<br />
1. On-Site No Smoking Policy: As designated below, the Contractor will be responsible to<br />
maintain a No Smoking Policy on site. This policy will include the Contractor’s personnel,<br />
subcontractors, material delivery personnel and all other field people on site. There will be<br />
no smoking permitted on site after the following time periods. This No Smoking Policy will<br />
be strictly enforced.<br />
a. There will be no smoking on the roof area after the roofing materials are installed.<br />
b. There will be no smoking inside the building area after the building has been<br />
enclosed. This will commence when the exterior openings have been enclosed and<br />
the insulation and drywall installation begins.<br />
PART 2—PRODUCTS<br />
Not used<br />
PART 3—EXECUTION<br />
Not used<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 SUMMARY OF WORK<br />
01100 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 01200 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES<br />
PART 1—GENERAL<br />
1.01 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES<br />
A. Upon Owner’s approval of a Proposal Request Form from the Contractor, the Owner will initiate<br />
and issue a Change Order, for all changes to Contract Sum or Contract Time. Contractor shall<br />
not proceed with the additional Work without duly executed Change Order.<br />
1.02 PAYMENT PROCEDURES<br />
A. Submit a Schedule of Values with the first Application for Payment. In Schedule of Values,<br />
break down Contract Sum into at least one line item for each Specification Section. Correlate<br />
the Schedule of Values with Contractor’s Construction Schedule.<br />
B. Submit one (1) copy of each application for payment to Owner according to the schedule<br />
established in Owner/Contractor Agreement.<br />
1. Submit final Application for Payment after completion of Project closeout procedures with<br />
final release of liens and supporting documentation. Include consent of surety to final<br />
payment and insurance certificates.<br />
PART 2—PRODUCTS<br />
Not Used<br />
PART 3—EXECUTION<br />
Not Used<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES<br />
01200 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 01300 - ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS<br />
PART 1—GENERAL<br />
1.01 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION<br />
A. Verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to property survey and existing<br />
benchmarks, before laying out the Work.<br />
B. Coordinate construction to ensure efficient and orderly execution of each part of the Work<br />
C. Three (3) Meetings will be held at Project site with the Owner or Architect. The first Meeting will<br />
be held at commencement of Construction; the second Meeting will be roughly halfway through<br />
Construction; the third Meeting will be at the time of generation of the Punch List. Notify Owner<br />
and Architect of Meeting dates. Each subcontractor or other entity concerned with current<br />
progress or involved with planning or coordination of future activities, shall attend.<br />
1. RFI will be generated by General Contractor for issues that will need clarification.<br />
1.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE<br />
A. Prepare a horizontal bar-chart Construction schedule, based on a Construction schedule which<br />
will be provided by the Owner. Provide a separate time bar for each activity and a vertical line<br />
to identify the first workday of each week. Use same breakdown of Work indicated in the<br />
Schedule of Values. As Work progresses, mark each bar to indicate actual completion.<br />
1. Submit within 10 days after date established for Commencement of the Work.<br />
2. Coordinate each element with other activities. Show each activity in proper sequence.<br />
Indicate sequences necessary for completion of related Work.<br />
3. Indicate Substantial Completion and allow time for Owner’s procedures necessary for<br />
certifying Substantial Completion.<br />
4. Schedule Distribution: Distribute copies to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, and parties<br />
required to comply with dates.<br />
5. Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been<br />
made. Distribute revised copies to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, and parties required<br />
to comply with dates.<br />
1.03 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES<br />
A. Coordinate submittal preparation with construction schedule, fabrication lead-times, other<br />
submittals, and activities that require sequential operations.<br />
1. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized due to failure to transmit submittals in<br />
time to permit processing sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the<br />
Work.<br />
2. Structural Engineer/Architect will not accept submittals from sources other than the<br />
Contractor.<br />
B. Prepare submittals by placing a permanent label on each for identification. Provide a space on<br />
the label or beside title block to record review and approval markings and action taken. Include<br />
the following information on the label:<br />
1. Project name.<br />
2. Date.<br />
3. Name and address of Contractor.<br />
4. Name and address of subcontractor or supplier.<br />
5. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.<br />
6. Contractor’s certification that materials comply with specified requirements.<br />
C. Coordinate each submittal with other submittals and with Work that does not require submittals.<br />
04-27-11 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS<br />
01300 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
D. Product Data: Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Include the following:<br />
1. Data indicating compliance with specified standards and requirements.<br />
2. Notation of coordination requirements.<br />
3. For equipment data, include rated capacities, dimensions, weights, required clearances,<br />
and furnished specialties and accessories.<br />
E. Shop Drawings: Submit newly prepared information drawn to scale. Do not reproduce Contract<br />
Documents or copy standard information. Submit four (4) blue or black line prints. Structural<br />
Engineer/Architect will return two (2) copies. Include the following:<br />
1. Dimensions, profiles, methods of attachment, coordination with adjoining work, large scale<br />
details, and other information, as appropriate for the Work.<br />
2. Identification of products and materials.<br />
3. Notation of coordination requirements.<br />
4. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.<br />
5. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.<br />
F. Samples: Submit Samples finished as specified and identical with the material proposed.<br />
Include product name or name of manufacturer.<br />
G. Structural Engineer/Architect will review each submittal, mark as appropriate to indicate action<br />
taken, and return copies less those retained. Compliance with specified requirements remains<br />
Contractor’s responsibility.<br />
1. Structural Engineer to review all structural related submittals for all projects.<br />
2. Architect to review substitution requests for alternate products as applicable per project.<br />
H. Shop Drawings, sample and/or Product Data Submittals are required for the specification<br />
sections identified on the schedules following this section.<br />
PART 2—PRODUCTS<br />
Not used<br />
PART 3—EXECUTION<br />
Not used<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS<br />
01300 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS<br />
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Quality control services include inspections, tests, and related actions including reports. Quality<br />
control services are further specified in other Sections of these Specifications and shall be<br />
performed by independent testing agencies provided by Contractor or Owner, as specified.<br />
1. Unless otherwise indicated, quality-control services required by authorities having<br />
jurisdiction will be provided by Owner.<br />
B. Contractor is responsible for scheduling inspections and tests.<br />
C. Retesting: Contractor shall pay for retesting where results of inspections and tests prove<br />
unsatisfactory and indicate noncompliance with requirements.<br />
D. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with agencies performing inspections and tests. Provide auxiliary<br />
services as requested. Notify agency in advance of operations requiring tests or inspections, to<br />
permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services include the following:<br />
1. Access to the Work.<br />
2. Incidental labor and facilities to assist inspections and tests.<br />
3. Adequate quantities of materials that require testing, and assisting in taking samples.<br />
4. Facilities for storage and curing of test samples.<br />
5. Security and protection of samples and test equipment.<br />
E. Duties of Testing Agency: Testing agency shall cooperate with Architect and Contractor in<br />
performing its duties. Agency shall provide qualified personnel to perform inspections and tests.<br />
1. Agency shall promptly notify Architect and Contractor of irregularities or deficiencies<br />
observed in the Work during performance of its services.<br />
2. Agency shall not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge requirements of the Contract Documents<br />
or approve or accept any portion of the Work.<br />
3. Agency shall not perform duties of Contractor.<br />
F. Submittals: Testing agency shall submit a certified written report of each inspection and test to<br />
the following:<br />
1. Owner.<br />
2. Architect.<br />
3. Contractor.<br />
4. Authorities having jurisdiction, when authorities so direct.<br />
G. Report Data: Reports of each inspection, test, or similar service shall include at least the<br />
following:<br />
1. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.<br />
2. Project title and testing agency's project number.<br />
3. Designation (number) and date of report.<br />
4. Dates and locations where samples were taken or inspections and field tests made.<br />
5. Names of individuals taking the sample or making the inspection or test.<br />
6. Designation of the product and test method.<br />
7. Complete inspection or test data including an interpretation of test results.<br />
8. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing.<br />
9. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work complies with<br />
requirements.<br />
10. Recommendations on retesting or re-inspection.<br />
11. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.<br />
04-27-11 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS<br />
01400 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
H. Testing Agency Qualifications: Engage inspection and testing agencies that are prequalified as<br />
complying with the American Council of Independent Laboratories' "Quality Assurance Manual"<br />
and that specialize in the types of inspections and tests to be performed.<br />
1. Each testing agency shall be authorized by authorities having jurisdiction to operate in the<br />
State where Project is located.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
Not used<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
Not used<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS<br />
01400 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1—GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION REQUIREMENTS<br />
SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS<br />
A. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241, "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and<br />
Demolition Operations"; ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction<br />
and Demolition"; and NECA Electrical Design Library's "Temporary Electrical Facilities."<br />
1. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for<br />
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.<br />
B. At the earliest possible time, when acceptable to Owner, change over from use of temporary<br />
utility services to use of permanent utilities.<br />
C. Remove temporary facilities and controls before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining<br />
after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions<br />
acceptable to Owner.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
Not used<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 TEMPORARY UTILITIES<br />
A. Provide temporary utility services, including electric power & lighting, water, power, fire<br />
protection, gas & telephone to Project site for use during construction. Arrange for and<br />
coordinate utility services with local utility companies.<br />
1. Contractor shall pay use charges for temporary utilities.<br />
B. Provide temporary heat for curing or drying of work, and for protection of new construction from<br />
adverse effects of low temperatures. Use of gasoline-burning heaters and open-flame heaters is<br />
not permitted.<br />
1. Maintain a minimum 50 degree F. temperature within the construction area until such time<br />
as the permanent heating plant is installed, inspected and functional.<br />
3.02 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES<br />
A. Provide field offices, storage trailers, and other support facilities as necessary for efficient<br />
prosecution of the Work.<br />
1. Temporary facilities located within the construction area or within 30 feet of building lines<br />
shall be of noncombustible construction.<br />
B. Contractor shall confirm with the Owner’s representative an acceptable location outside the<br />
building to securely store materials and stage construction operations. Thence, the Contractor<br />
shall confine operations strictly within this area. Contractor shall keep storage and staging area<br />
clean and neat at all times and shall not allow the accumulation of debris or trash.<br />
C. Provide temporary sanitary facilities for all construction personnel. Comply with regulations and<br />
health codes for type, number, location, and maintenance of facilities.<br />
D. Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction and workers from exposure and<br />
inclement weather and for containment of heat.<br />
E. Install project identification and other signs in locations approved by Owner to inform the public<br />
and persons seeking entrance to Project.<br />
04-27-11 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS<br />
01500 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
F. Collect waste daily and, when containers are full, legally dispose of waste off-site.<br />
1. Contractor is responsible for maintaining a dumpster for waste generated by all<br />
subcontractors (owner’s & contractor’s) & trades until the restaurant opens for business.<br />
Waste removal shall be scheduled on a regular basis.<br />
2. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials in separate closed waste<br />
containers. Dispose of material according to applicable laws and regulations.<br />
G. Open flames are expressly prohibited without the knowledge of and prior consent of the owner’s<br />
representative.<br />
3.03 TEMPORARY CONTROLS<br />
A. Provide temporary fire protection per OSHA until permanent systems supply fire-protection<br />
needs.<br />
1. Provide adequate numbers and types of fire extinguishers.<br />
2. Store combustible materials in fire-safe containers in fire-safe locations.<br />
3. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas.<br />
4. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar<br />
sources of fire ignition.<br />
B. Provide temporary barricades, warning signs, and lights to protect the public and construction<br />
personnel from construction hazards per OSHA.<br />
1. Enclose construction areas with fences with lockable entrance gates, to prevent<br />
unauthorized access per OSHA.<br />
C. Provide temporary environmental controls as required by authorities having jurisdiction<br />
including, but not limited to, dust control, noise control, and pollution control.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS<br />
01500 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS<br />
PART 1—GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Provide products of same kind from a single source. The term "product" includes the terms<br />
"material”, "equipment”, "system”, and similar terms.<br />
B. Deliver, store, and handle products according to manufacturer's written instructions, using<br />
means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.<br />
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage and to prevent overcrowding Construction<br />
spaces.<br />
2. Deliver in manufacturer's original sealed packaging with labels and written instructions for<br />
handling, storing, protecting, and installing.<br />
3. Inspect products at time of delivery for compliance with the Contract Documents and to<br />
ensure items are undamaged and properly protected.<br />
4. Store heavy items in a manner that will not endanger supporting construction.<br />
5. Store products subject to damage on platforms or pallets, under cover in a weather tight<br />
enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and<br />
humidity within range required.<br />
C. Product Substitutions: Reasonable and timely requests for substitutions will be considered.<br />
Substitutions include products and methods of Construction differing from that required by the<br />
Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor after award of Contract.<br />
1. Submit four (4) copies of each request for product substitution. Identify product to be<br />
replaced and provide complete documentation showing compliance of proposed<br />
substitution with applicable requirements. Include a full comparison with the specified<br />
product, a list of changes to other Work required to accommodate the substitution, and any<br />
proposed changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time should the substitution be accepted.<br />
2. Submit requests for product substitution in time to permit processing of request for<br />
subsequent Submittals, if any, sufficiently in advance of when materials are required in the<br />
Work. Do not submit unapproved substitutions on Shop Drawings or other submittals.<br />
3. Architect & Owner will review the proposed substitution and notify Contractor of its<br />
acceptance or rejection. Acceptance of substitution does not relieve the Contractor of<br />
coordinating all other items. The substitution affects at no additional cost to the Owner.<br />
PART 2—PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS<br />
A. Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged, and are new at the<br />
time of installation.<br />
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, and other devices and<br />
components needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.<br />
B. Do not attach manufacturer's labels or trademarks, except for required nameplates, on surfaces<br />
exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. Do not remove labels from equipment<br />
required to have labels attached.<br />
C. Select products as follows:<br />
1. Where only a single product or manufacturer is named, provide the item indicated. No<br />
substitutions will be permitted.<br />
2. Where two or more product or manufacturers are named, provide one of the items<br />
indicated. No substitutions will be permitted.<br />
3. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or<br />
equal," provide the named item or comply with provisions concerning "product<br />
substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product or manufacturer.<br />
4. Where a product is described with required characteristics, with or without naming a brand<br />
04-27-11 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS<br />
01600 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
or trademark, provide a product that complies with those characteristics and other Contract<br />
requirements.<br />
5. Where compliance with performance requirements is specified, provide products that<br />
comply and are recommended in writing by the manufacturer for the Application.<br />
6. Where compliance with codes, regulations, or standards is specified, select a product that<br />
complies with the codes, regulations, or standards referenced.<br />
D. Unless otherwise indicated, architect will select color, pattern, and texture of each product from<br />
manufacturer's full range of standard options.<br />
2.02 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS<br />
A. The following products will be furnished by Owner and shall be installed by Contractor as part of<br />
the Work:<br />
1. See the Comprehensive Equipment Schedule and Project Responsibility Matrix on the<br />
Architectural Drawing G100.<br />
B. Contractor shall coordinate all delivery dates and installation requirements & verify quantities of<br />
Owner-furnished items with the Owner prior to the start of Construction.<br />
PART 3—EXECUTION<br />
Not used<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS<br />
01600 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 01620 - REFERENCES<br />
PART 1—GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Definitions of terms.<br />
2. Provisions of reference standards.<br />
1.02 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. By Owner: Items that will be ordered, paid for and shipped to Project by Owner. Contractor to<br />
receive, unload, unpack or uncrate, protect, move into place, install and connect these items as<br />
specified or indicated in the Contract Documents.<br />
B. Provide: Furnish and install, including without limitation, labor, materials, equipment,<br />
transportation, services, and other items required to complete referenced tasks.<br />
C. Furnish: Pay for, deliver (or receive), unload, inspect, and store as specified or directed while<br />
retaining care, custody and control until received for installation by others.<br />
D. Install: Receive, set or place in position, make required connections, adjust and test for<br />
satisfactory performance and operation.<br />
E. Product: Materials, systems, and equipment incorporated in or to be incorporated in the Project.<br />
F. Herein: As used in the Contract Documents refers to the contents of a particular Section, of the<br />
contents within parts of the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 - General Requirements.<br />
G. Not In Contract (N.I.C.): Products not in the Contract, but which may require provisions in the<br />
construction for future installation by Others.<br />
H. Work: Construction and services required by Contract Documents, whether completed of<br />
partially completed, and includes labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be<br />
provided by Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole<br />
or a part of the Project.<br />
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS<br />
A. Reference Standards: For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, Federal<br />
Standards, or other reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except<br />
when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by governing regulations.<br />
B. Standard Dates: Where no specific date of standard is specified, use the most current issued<br />
standard that is in effect as of the Project Bid date.<br />
C. When required by individual Specification Sections or otherwise needed for proper performance<br />
of Work, obtain a copy of the standard. Maintain a copy of standard at Site during submittals,<br />
planning, and progress of the affected work, until Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
Not used<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
Not Used<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 REFERENCES<br />
01620 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS<br />
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Record Drawings: Maintain a set of Contract Drawings as Record Drawings. Mark to show<br />
installation that varies from the Work originally shown.<br />
B. Record Specifications: Maintain one copy of the Project Manual, including addenda, as Record<br />
Specifications. Mark to show variations in Work performed in comparison with the text of the<br />
Specifications and modifications.<br />
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Organize data into three-ring binders, with pocket folders for<br />
folded sheet information. Mark identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the<br />
following:<br />
1. Emergency instructions.<br />
2. Spare parts list.<br />
3. Copies of warranties.<br />
4. Wiring diagrams.<br />
5. Shop Drawings and Product Data.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
Not used<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with manufacturer's written requirements<br />
including, but not limited to, surfaces that are sound, level, and plumb; substrates within<br />
installation tolerances; surfaces that are smooth, clean, and free of deleterious substances; and<br />
application conditions within environmental limits. Proceed with installation only after<br />
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
B. Prepare substrates and adjoining surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions,<br />
including, but not limited to, filler and primer application.<br />
C. Where Drawings indicate dimensions of existing construction verify by field measurement.<br />
Where fabricated products are to be fitted to other construction, verify dimensions by field<br />
measurement before fabricating and, when possible, allow for fitting and trimming during<br />
installation.<br />
3.02 CUTTING AND PATCHING<br />
A. Do not cut structural members without prior written approval of Architect.<br />
B. For patching, provide materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of<br />
existing materials. For exposed surfaces, provide or finish materials to visually match existing<br />
adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installation. Anchor each product securely in<br />
place, accurately located and aligned. Clean exposed surfaces and protect from damage. If<br />
applicable, prepare surfaces for field finishing.<br />
B. Comply with NFPA 70 for installation of electrically operated equipment and electrical<br />
components and materials.<br />
04-27-11 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS<br />
01700 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.04 FINAL CLEANING<br />
A. Clean each surface or item as follows before requesting inspection for certification of<br />
Substantial Completion:<br />
1. Remove labels that are not permanent.<br />
2. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors. Remove excess glazing compounds.<br />
Replace chipped or broken glass.<br />
3. Clean exposed finishes to a dust-free condition, free of stains, films, and foreign<br />
substances. Leave concrete floors broom clean.<br />
4. Vacuum carpeted surfaces and clean quarry tile flooring & base.<br />
5. Clean according to tile & grout manufacturers’ specific recommendations.<br />
6. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excess lubrication. Clean<br />
plumbing fixtures. Clean light fixtures and lamps. Clean walk-in refrigeration units.<br />
7. Remove all construction debris, unused materials, etc. when project is turned over to<br />
Owner. Maintain the site in a clean condition during the course of construction. Sweep<br />
paved areas; remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits. Rake grounds to a smooth, eventextured<br />
surface.<br />
3.05 PUNCH LIST<br />
A. At time of third Meeting (refer to Specification Section 01300) A copy of the Punch List will be<br />
provided to the Contractor.<br />
3.06 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES<br />
A. Request Substantial Completion inspection once the following are complete:<br />
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.<br />
2. Submit Record Drawings and Specifications, maintenance manuals, warranties, and<br />
similar record information.<br />
3. Complete startup testing of systems and instruction of operation to Owner’s personnel.<br />
4. Remove temporary facilities and controls.<br />
5. Complete final cleanup.<br />
6. Complete Punch List Repairs.<br />
7. Obtain final inspections from authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
8. Obtain Certificate of Occupancy.<br />
9. Obtain Certificate of Capacity.<br />
10. Submit Consent of Surety to final payment.<br />
B. Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires operation and maintenance to provide<br />
instruction to Owner's personnel. Include a detailed review of the following:<br />
1. Startup and shutdown.<br />
2. Emergency operations and safety procedures.<br />
3. Noise and vibration adjustments.<br />
4. Maintenance manuals.<br />
5. Spare parts, tools, and materials.<br />
6. Lubricants and fuels.<br />
7. Identification systems.<br />
8. Control sequences.<br />
9. Hazards.<br />
10. Warranties and bonds.<br />
C. Request inspection for certification of final acceptance, once the following are complete:<br />
1. Submit a copy of the Substantial Completion inspection list stating that each item has been<br />
completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.<br />
04-27-11 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS<br />
01700 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
D. Owner will re-inspect the Work on receipt of notice that the Work has been completed.<br />
1. If the Work has been satisfactorily completed, Owner will sign and date the punchlist cover<br />
sheet. GC will fax/email a copy of this signed and dated cover sheet to the Construction<br />
Manager prior to Opening. GC Superintendent is to remain at the job site through Store<br />
Opening to provide Supervision of all Punchlist item completions, Vendor Installation and<br />
all adjustments as required by Store Personnel. Contractor shall guarantee all materials<br />
and workmanship for one year beginning at date of Opening.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS<br />
01700 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
SECTION 02223 - MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING<br />
A. Removal of designated construction.<br />
B. Disposal of materials.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 01100 – Summary of Work: Work sequence and continued occupancy of the building.<br />
B. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary enclosures.<br />
C. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. American National Standards Institute:<br />
1. ANSI A10.6: “Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition”.<br />
B. National Fire Protection Association:<br />
1. NFPA 241: “Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations”.<br />
1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical<br />
disconnection and re-connection.<br />
B. Obtain required permits from authorities.<br />
C. Do not close or obstruct egress from any building exit or site exit without specific approval from<br />
the Owner and municipal authority.<br />
D. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 days' prior written notice to<br />
Owner and without specific approval from the municipal authority.<br />
E. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
F. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when hazardous or contaminated materials are<br />
discovered.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the<br />
necessary trades and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods<br />
needed for proper performance of the work of this section.<br />
B. Comply with ANSI 10.6 and NFPA 241.<br />
1.05 SCHEDULING<br />
A. Schedule work under the provisions of Section 01300.<br />
B. Schedule work to coincide with new construction and phasing.<br />
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas.<br />
1. Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum<br />
interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, parking lots, and other adjacent<br />
occupied and used facilities.<br />
B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect. Do not<br />
resume operations until directed.<br />
04-27-11 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING<br />
02223 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
Not Used<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 PREPARATION<br />
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be performed. Correct<br />
conditions detrimental to timely and proper execution of the Work. Do not proceed until<br />
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.<br />
B. In company with the Owner, Architect and appropriate engineering disciplines, visit the site and<br />
verify the extent of selective demolition required.<br />
1. Carefully identify limits of selective demolition.<br />
2. Mark interface surfaces as required to enable workers to identify items to be removed and<br />
items to be left intact.<br />
C. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers at locations indicated and as otherwise<br />
determined to be necessary.<br />
D. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings.<br />
E. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit<br />
continued building occupancy.<br />
F. Protect existing materials that are not to be demolished.<br />
G. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring.<br />
H. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements.<br />
I. Mark location and termination of utilities.<br />
J. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress.<br />
3.02 DEMOLITION<br />
A. Disconnect, remove, and identify designated utilities within demolition areas.<br />
B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members.<br />
C. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn<br />
or bury materials on site.<br />
D. Remove materials as demolition progresses. Upon completion of demolition, leave areas in<br />
clean condition.<br />
E. Remove temporary facilities.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING<br />
02223 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Soil treatment for termite control.<br />
SECTION 02360 - SOIL TREATMENT<br />
B. Application below grade and at interior and exterior foundation perimeter.<br />
1.02 REFERENCES<br />
A. United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):<br />
1. EPA - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act.<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Submittal Procedures<br />
1. Product Data: Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule,<br />
and intended application rate.<br />
2. Assurance/Control Submittals:<br />
a. Certificates:<br />
1) Manufacturer's certificate that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.<br />
2) Certification that Products comply with EPA regulations for termiticides.<br />
3) Certification that Products conform to requirements of local authority having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
b. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating<br />
compliance with specified qualification requirements.<br />
B. Closeout Submittals: Procedures for closeout submittals.<br />
1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record moisture content of soil before treatment,<br />
date and rate of application, areas of application, diary of meter readings and<br />
corresponding soil coverage.<br />
2. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty with forms complete.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with<br />
minimum 5 years documented experience and licensed in accordance with regulations of<br />
authorities having jurisdiction for application of chemical toxicant.<br />
B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for application requirements, application<br />
licensing, authority to use toxicant chemicals, and in accordance with EPA regulations.<br />
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original unopened containers with labels intact, identifying<br />
Product and manufacturer, application instructions, and EPA federal registration number.<br />
B. Do not store Products on site. Deliver Products to site at time of application.<br />
1.06 SITE CONDITIONS<br />
A. Take necessary precautions to prevent leaching, spillage, and wind drift or spray or dust of<br />
material. Do not drain or flush storage containers and application equipment outside treated<br />
area or into sewers or water courses.<br />
B. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply soil treatment to frozen or wet soils or during rain or<br />
snow.<br />
04-27-11 SOIL TREATMENT<br />
02360 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.07 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty:<br />
1. Submit written warranty signed by soil treatment applicator and Contractor certifying that<br />
applied chemical toxicant treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites.<br />
a. State that application was made at concentration, rates, and methods as specified.<br />
b. State that if subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period,<br />
Contractor will retreat soil and repair damage caused by termite infestation at no<br />
additional cost to the Owner.<br />
2. Cover against invasion or propagation of subterranean termites, damage to building or<br />
building contents caused by termites; repairs to building or building contents so caused.<br />
3. Provide for inspection of Work annually; report in writing to designated Owner’s<br />
representative.<br />
4. Warranty Period: 5 years.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MATERIALS<br />
A. EPA and local authority having jurisdiction approved chemical toxicant; water based emulsion,<br />
uniform composition, with synthetic dye to permit visual identification of treated soil, bearing<br />
Federal registration number of the EPA.<br />
B. Do not use fuel oil as diluents.<br />
C. Specially formulated to prevent infestation by termites.<br />
D. Solution containing one of the following chemical elements and concentrations:<br />
1. Permathrin: 0.5 percent in water emulsion.<br />
a. Dragnet FT, by FMC Corporation.<br />
b. Torpedo, by ICI Americas Corporation.<br />
2.02 MIX DILUTION<br />
A. Dilute and mix toxicant chemical to manufacturer's published instructions.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions<br />
are as required, and ready to receive Work.<br />
1. Verify the soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, ready to receive<br />
treatment.<br />
2. Verify final grading is complete.<br />
B. Report in writing to Owner prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution<br />
of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been<br />
corrected.<br />
C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting<br />
unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Remove foreign matter, loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted<br />
areas under slabs and foundations.<br />
3.03 APPLICATION<br />
A. Apply toxicant within 12 hours before installation of vapor retardant under slab-on-grade.<br />
04-27-11 SOIL TREATMENT<br />
02360 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. Apply toxicant to soil at the following rates, using metered applicator:<br />
1. Under Floor Slabs-On-Grade:<br />
a. Soil or Unwashed Gravel: 1 gallon per 10 square feet.<br />
b. Washed Gravel or Other Course Absorbent Material: 1-1/2 gallons per 10 square<br />
feet.<br />
2. Both Sides of Foundation Wall:<br />
a. Concrete: 4 gallons per 10 lineal feet, to depth of 12 inches.<br />
b. Masonry: 4 gallons per 10 lineal feet for each foot of foundation depth.<br />
c. Foundation Penetrations: 2 gallons per lineal foot.<br />
C. Exterior Foundation: 4 gallons per 10 lineal feet of trench along outside edge of building.<br />
1. Dig trench 6 inches to 8 inches wide along outside of foundation to minimum depth of 12<br />
inches and apply toxicant.<br />
2. Mix toxicant with soil as it is being backfilled.<br />
D. Apply toxicant as a coarse spray; provide uniform distribution.<br />
E. Reapply toxicant to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, landscape grading, or other<br />
construction activities occurring after initial toxicant application.<br />
3.04 CONSTRUCTION<br />
A. Interface with Other Work:<br />
1. Coordinate application of toxicant at foundation perimeter with finish grading and<br />
landscaping work; avoid disturbance of treated soil.<br />
B. Post signs in areas of application to warn workers that toxicant has been applied to soil.<br />
Remove signs after areas are covered by other construction.<br />
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Inspect and test soil areas where toxicant was applied to determine the presence of any<br />
remaining termites before covering with subsequent construction.<br />
B. Reapply toxicant to areas where inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites. Use<br />
same toxicant as for original treatment.<br />
3.06 CLEANING<br />
A. Remove storage containers and application equipment from site immediately after application.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 SOIL TREATMENT<br />
02360 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 03300 - CAST- IN - PLACE CONCRETE<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Concrete formwork.<br />
B. Floors and slabs on grade.<br />
C. Concrete reinforcement.<br />
D. Joint devices associated with concrete work.<br />
E. Concrete curing.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements.<br />
B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements.<br />
C. Section 03351 - Concrete Integral Hardener and Sealer.<br />
D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. American Concrete Institute, (ACI):<br />
1. ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and<br />
Mass Concrete; American Concrete Institute International.<br />
2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute<br />
International.<br />
3. ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute<br />
International.<br />
4. ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American<br />
Concrete Institute International.<br />
5. ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International.<br />
6. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International..<br />
7. ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International.<br />
8. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary;<br />
American Concrete Institute International.<br />
B. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM):<br />
1. ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain,<br />
for Concrete.<br />
2. ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for<br />
Concrete Reinforcement.<br />
3. ASTM C 33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates.<br />
4. ASTM C 39/C 39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical<br />
Concrete Specimens.<br />
5. ASTM C 94/C 94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete.<br />
6. ASTM C 143/C 143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete.<br />
7. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.<br />
8. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.<br />
9. ASTM C 173/C 173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by<br />
the Volumetric Method.<br />
10. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.<br />
11. ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for<br />
Curing Concrete.<br />
12. ASTM C 494/C 494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.<br />
04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
03300 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
13. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural<br />
Pozzolan for Use in Concrete.<br />
14. ASTM C 685/C 685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching<br />
and Continuous Mixing.<br />
15. ASTM C 1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout<br />
(Nonshrink).<br />
16. ASTM D 994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete<br />
(Bituminous Type).<br />
17. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete<br />
Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types).<br />
18. ASTM E 1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact<br />
with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Refer to Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Mix Designs: Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to Construction Manager<br />
for review prior to commencement of concrete operations.<br />
C. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and<br />
components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.<br />
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from<br />
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures<br />
through one source from a single manufacturer.<br />
C. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.<br />
D. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 FORMWORK<br />
A. Form Materials: Provide standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic<br />
head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances.<br />
1. Form Coating: Release agent that will not bond with, stain or adversely affect concrete or<br />
interfere with application of coatings.<br />
2.02 REINFORCEMENT<br />
A. Comply with requirements as indicated on Structural Drawings.<br />
B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed.<br />
C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel<br />
wire into flat sheets.<br />
D. Reinforcement Accessories:<br />
1. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and<br />
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar<br />
supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of<br />
Standard Practice".<br />
04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
03300 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS<br />
A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal and Type IA - Air-Entraining Portland type.<br />
B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.<br />
C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F.<br />
D. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C 618, Class N.<br />
E. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.<br />
2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES<br />
A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight<br />
of cement.<br />
B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. Provide Daravair manufactured by W. R. Grace.<br />
C. Chemical Admixtures:<br />
1. Water Reducing: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.<br />
2. Retarding: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.<br />
3. Accelerating: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.<br />
4. Water Reducing and Retarding: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.<br />
5. Water Reducing and Accelerating: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type E.<br />
6. Water Reducing, High Range: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.<br />
7. Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G.<br />
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS<br />
A. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class C, not less than 10 mils thick. Include manufacturer's<br />
recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive joint tape.<br />
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:<br />
a. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block VB10.<br />
b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type- 65.<br />
c. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 10 mils.<br />
B. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,<br />
cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.<br />
1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7000 psi.<br />
a. Conspec: “Enduro 50 Grout”.<br />
b. Euclid: "Euco N-S Grout".<br />
c. L & M: "Duragrout".<br />
d. Sonneborn: "Sonogrout 10k".<br />
e. Five Star Products, Inc.: "Five Star Grout".<br />
f. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.: Certi-Vex Grout #1000.<br />
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; regular curing paper, white curing paper, clear<br />
polyethylene, white polyethylene, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.<br />
D. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent.<br />
1. Provide curing compound that is compatible with floor finish adhesives.<br />
2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS<br />
A. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM<br />
D 1751, thickness as indicated on drawings and full depth of slab less 1/2 inch.<br />
B. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07900.<br />
04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
03300 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN<br />
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of<br />
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.<br />
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture<br />
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.<br />
2. Take care in developing mix designs to minimize curling and effects of casting directly on<br />
vapor retarder.<br />
3. Develop concrete mix designs for slabs on grade to minimize curling and other effects<br />
resulting from casting directly on vapor retarder sheet.<br />
B. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.<br />
C. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates<br />
recommended by manufacturer.<br />
D. Concrete Mix Properties:<br />
1. Structural Concrete:<br />
a. 28 day compressive strength: 3000 psi.<br />
b. Maximum aggregate size: 3/4 inch.<br />
c. Maximum slump: 3-5 inches.<br />
d. Maximum water/cement ratio: 0.5.<br />
2. Interior slab on grade:<br />
a. 28 day compressive strength: 4000 psi.<br />
b. Maximum aggregate size: 3/4 inch.<br />
c. Maximum slump: 3-5 inches.<br />
d. Maximum water/cement ratio: 0.5.<br />
3. Exterior concrete exposed to freeze-thaw cycles:<br />
a. 28 day compressive strength: 4000 psi.<br />
b. Maximum aggregate size: 3/4 inch.<br />
c. Maximum slump: 3-5 inches.<br />
d. Maximum water/cement ratio: 0.55.<br />
e. Entrained Air Content: 6±1%.<br />
4. Masonry Grout:<br />
a. 28 day compressive strength: 3000 psi.<br />
b. Maximum aggregate size: 3/8 inch.<br />
c. Maximum slump: 8-10 inches.<br />
2.08 MIXING<br />
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to<br />
ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.<br />
B. Project Site Mixing: Measure, batch and mix in drum type batch mixer, according to ASTM C<br />
685. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all<br />
applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.<br />
B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.<br />
C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of<br />
form accessories.<br />
04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
03300 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
D. Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by<br />
cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's<br />
instructions.<br />
E. Install No. 5 rebar dowels 24 inches on center where new concrete slabs abut existing concrete<br />
slabs. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing<br />
concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.<br />
F. Install vapor retarder directly below interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6 inches and<br />
seal watertight by taping edges and ends and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.<br />
3.03 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT<br />
A. Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.<br />
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before<br />
placing concrete.<br />
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that<br />
would reduce bond to concrete.<br />
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and<br />
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover as indicated on<br />
structural drawings. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.<br />
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.<br />
E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to<br />
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset<br />
laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with<br />
wire.<br />
3.04 PLACING CONCRETE<br />
A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.<br />
B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.<br />
C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not<br />
be disturbed during concrete placement.<br />
D. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair<br />
with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.<br />
E. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler.<br />
F. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/2 inch of finished slab surface. Conform to<br />
Section 07900 for finish joint sealer requirements.<br />
G. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
H. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set<br />
top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.<br />
I. Apply sealants in joint devices in accordance with Section 07900.<br />
J. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature, and<br />
test samples taken.<br />
K. Place concrete continuously between predetermined expansion, control, and construction joints.<br />
L. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.<br />
M. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade.<br />
04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
03300 -5
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
N. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft.<br />
3.05 CONCRETE FINISHING<br />
A. (CONC1) Unexposed Form Finish: Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately<br />
after removing formwork. Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in<br />
height.<br />
C. (CONC2) Interior Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:<br />
1. Steel trowel surfaces that will receive carpeting, resilient flooring, and thin set ceramic tile.<br />
2. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to<br />
drains at 1:100 nominal. Provide an 8 inch diameter slope area around all floor drains.<br />
E. (CONC3) Exterior Horizontal Concrete Surfaces: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete<br />
sidewalks, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.<br />
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen surface by brooming with fiber-bristle<br />
broom perpendicular to main traffic route.<br />
2. Refer to Section 03351 for hardener / sealer applied to exterior concrete surfaces.<br />
F. Interior Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is<br />
still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections,<br />
and terminations slightly rounded.<br />
G. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations<br />
as shown on Drawings. Steel-trowel surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections,<br />
and terminations slightly rounded.<br />
1. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations, complying with<br />
diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.<br />
3.06 CURING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Utilize curing methods that are compatible with floor finish installation recommendations and<br />
that are approved by floor finish manufacturer and installer.<br />
B. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from<br />
premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.<br />
C. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period<br />
necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.<br />
1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days.<br />
D. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:<br />
1. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep<br />
continuously moist for not less than three days by water-saturated sand, water-fog spray,<br />
or saturated burlap.<br />
2. Begin final curing after initial curing but before surface is dry.<br />
a. Moisture-retaining cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive.<br />
b. Curing compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate<br />
recommended by manufacturer. Contractor verify compatibility with specified floor<br />
finishes.<br />
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section<br />
01400.<br />
B. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.<br />
C. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance<br />
with specified requirements.<br />
04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
03300 -6
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
D. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete<br />
test cylinders plus one field cured cylinder. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of<br />
each class of concrete placed.<br />
E. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same<br />
conditions as concrete it represents.<br />
F. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM C<br />
143/C 143M.<br />
3.08 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE<br />
A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor<br />
within 24 hours of test.<br />
B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances<br />
or specified requirements.<br />
C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Owner’s Construction<br />
Manager. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is<br />
identified.<br />
D. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction<br />
of Architect for each individual area.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
03300 -7
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
SECTION 03351 - CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER<br />
A. Integral hardener and sealer for exterior application as indicated on the Drawings and<br />
Schedules as (SC), Sealed Concrete.<br />
B. All components and accessories required for a complete installation.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.<br />
B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act<br />
1. ADA Slip Fall Resistance Tests<br />
B. Federal VOC Standards for the Concrete Construction Industry.<br />
C. EPA - Environmental Protection Agency.<br />
1. Modified EPA Test Method 300.<br />
D. USDA - United States Department of Agriculture.<br />
E. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials<br />
1. AASHTO T 259 Modified - Crack Sealing Capabilities<br />
F. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.<br />
1. ASTM C-666 (Concrete Durability Test)<br />
2. ASTM C-672 (Scaling Resistance)<br />
3. ASTM C-642 (Absorption)<br />
4. ASTM C-779 (Abrasion Resistance)<br />
5. ASTM E-274 (Skid Resistance)<br />
6. ASTM E-1155 (Floor Flatness)<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Comply with Section 01400, Quality Assurance.<br />
B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in Work of the Section with documented experience.<br />
Components to be by one manufacturer. Manufacturer to provide a list of installations of similar<br />
scope and level of quality.<br />
C. Installer: Companies specializing in Work of this Section with documented experience.<br />
D. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site. Review methods and<br />
procedures related to installation including, but not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Inspect and discuss conditions of concrete and other preparatory work performed under<br />
other contracts.<br />
2. In addition to the Contractor and the installer, arrange for the attendance of installers<br />
affected by the Work, The Owner's representative, the Architect.<br />
E. The Contractor to verify special conditions required for the installation of the system.<br />
F. The Contractor to notify the Architect of any discrepancies.<br />
G. Materials to comply with all applicable V.O.C. standards<br />
H. Provide as a complete system. Refer to schedules.<br />
I. Discoloration and odors are unacceptable.<br />
04-27-11 CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER<br />
03351 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions.<br />
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Coordinate the work with concrete slab placement and curing.<br />
1.07 WARRANTY<br />
A. Provide manufacturer's standard written warranty.<br />
1. Repair defects from faulty materials or workmanship developed during the warranty period,<br />
or replace with new materials/components, at no expense to Owner.<br />
2. Length of warranty to be scheduled by the Owner from manufacturer's standard warranties.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. (SC) Exterior Concrete Hardener / Sealer.<br />
1. Chemtec International; Product ChemTec One: www.concretesealer.net.<br />
2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work of this Section will be performed. Correct<br />
conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. Do not proceed until<br />
unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.<br />
B. Examine substrates surfaces, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.<br />
C. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Surfaces to be treated to meet manufacturers product requirements.<br />
B. New Concrete: Clean surfaces to remove loose and foreign matter that could interfere with<br />
application or performance of products. Allow surfaces to dry completely before beginning<br />
application.<br />
1. The surfaces of the concrete to be clean and free of foreign material, such as grease and<br />
coatings, that would prevent the product from penetrating into the concrete.<br />
2. Acid washing of concrete is unacceptable.<br />
3. Concrete to be completely dry before start of application.<br />
C. Existing Concrete:<br />
1. Clean all surfaces so that they are water permeable.<br />
2. Strip off coatings, sealers, paint or other contaminant that would prevent the process from<br />
penetrating into the concrete.<br />
3. Acid washing of concrete is unacceptable.<br />
4. Concrete to be completely dry before start of application.<br />
D. Protect adjacent and underlying surfaces by masking or by other means.<br />
1. Protect asphaltic and mastic type surfaces from spillage and heavy overspray.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install at locations as indicated, to comply with final shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions<br />
and recommendations for application and coverage.<br />
04-27-11 CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER<br />
03351 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. Materials to be premixed and ready to use. Mixing and agitation to be in accordance with<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
C. Method of application to be by pouring, pumping or spraying. Equipment to be recommended by<br />
manufacturer.<br />
D. Test application: Contractor to treat an area and textures of the installation to establish physical<br />
and visual effects of application and absorption level to establish coverage rates.<br />
E. Install when concrete surface temperatures comply with manufacturer's recommended minimum<br />
standards.<br />
F. When the work cannot be completed in one application, location where application is stopped to<br />
be noted and clearly marked.<br />
G. Application on exterior concrete surfaces.<br />
1. Substrates to be brushed, finished, and fully cured.<br />
2. Apply sealer in two applications at manufacturer's recommended rate with a minimum of 4<br />
to 6 hours between applications.<br />
3. Surface to be saturated with material.<br />
4. Puddle areas should be pushed over to dryer areas. Areas that dry prematurely to have<br />
additional formula brushed around surface until absorption is complete. Re-spraying is<br />
acceptable.<br />
3.04 CURING<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Allow a minimum period of 12 hours where no<br />
water is allowed on the surface. Period of time starting after completion of last application.<br />
B. Flush surfaces with fresh water, approximately 24 hours after the last application has dried, to<br />
prevent any un-reacted material that may be on the surface from becoming slick at the first rain.<br />
D. Do not allow concrete to freeze for 24 hours after installation.<br />
E. Wait for a minimum of 48 hours prior to application of joint sealants, traffic paints, and/or asphalt<br />
overlays.<br />
3.05 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.<br />
B. Immediately upon completion of installation, clean surfaces.<br />
C. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation upon completion of<br />
work and leave areas of installation in neat, clean condition.<br />
D. Dispose of waste properly per federal, state or local environmental regulations when required.<br />
3.06 PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect installation throughout construction process until date of final completion.<br />
B. Provide protection for the installation, ensuring satisfactory operating condition at completion of<br />
Project.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 CONCRETE INTEGRAL HARDENER AND SEALER<br />
03351 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Mortar for masonry.<br />
B. Grout for masonry.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
SECTION 04065 - MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT<br />
A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Installation of mortar and grout.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements For Masonry Structures; American<br />
Concrete Institute International.<br />
B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute<br />
International.<br />
C. ASTM C 143 - Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.<br />
D. ASTM C 144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.<br />
E. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.<br />
F. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.<br />
G. ASTM C 270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.<br />
H. ASTM C 387 - Standard Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and<br />
Concrete<br />
I. ASTM C 404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.<br />
J. ASTM C 476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry.<br />
K. ASTM C 780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of<br />
Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.<br />
L. ASTM C 1019 - Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except<br />
where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents.<br />
1. Maintain one copy of each document on project site.<br />
B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, from<br />
single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for<br />
each aggregate.<br />
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign<br />
matter.<br />
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS<br />
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during,<br />
and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.<br />
B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during,<br />
and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.<br />
04-27-11 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT<br />
04065 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MATERIALS<br />
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal; standard gray color.<br />
B. Packaged Dry Mortar: ASTM C 387, Type as indicated on the Drawings, using gray color<br />
cement.<br />
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.<br />
D. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144.<br />
E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404.<br />
F. Water: Clean and potable.<br />
2.02 MORTAR COLOR<br />
A. Colored Mortar: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use<br />
in mortar mixes.<br />
1. Colors:<br />
a. LaFarge North America; “Santan”; color to match (FBR1) Face Brick. Refer to Section<br />
04810.<br />
b. Spec Mix; Color No. LM-9327-50 #930; color to match (CMU2) Rock Face Block.<br />
Refer to Section 04810.<br />
2. Mortar Locations:<br />
a. Locations of colored mortar: Used to match Face Brick and Rock Faced Block Units.<br />
b. Natural colored mortar for all other locations.<br />
2.03 MORTAR MIXES<br />
A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C 270, Property Specification.<br />
1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S.<br />
2. Engineered masonry: Type S.<br />
3. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type S.<br />
4. Exterior, non-loadbearing masonry: Type S.<br />
5. Interior, loadbearing and non-loadbearing masonry: Type S.<br />
2.04 MORTAR MIXING<br />
A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM C<br />
270 and in quantities needed for immediate use.<br />
B. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.<br />
C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.<br />
D. If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing.<br />
E. Use mortar within two hours after mixing at temperatures of 90 degrees F, or two-and-one-half<br />
hours at temperatures under 50 degrees F.<br />
2.04 GROUT MIXES<br />
A. Grout for Engineered Masonry, Bond Beams, Lintels, and Corefill: Comply with ASTM C 476.<br />
1. Use grout type as indicated below:<br />
a. Fine grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension of 2 inches or less.<br />
b. Coarse grout for spaces with smallest horizontal dimension greater than 2 inches.<br />
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476,for specified 28-day compressive<br />
strength, 3000 psi.<br />
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.<br />
04-27-11 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT<br />
04065 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.05 GROUT MIXING<br />
A. Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with<br />
ASTM C 476 for fine and coarse grout.<br />
B. Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.<br />
C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 PREPARATION<br />
A. Apply bonding agent to existing concrete surfaces.<br />
B. Plug clean-out holes for grouted masonry with block masonry units. Brace masonry to resist<br />
wet grout pressure.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specified.<br />
B. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.<br />
C. Do not install grout in lifts greater than 16 inches without consolidating grout by rodding.<br />
D. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.<br />
E. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.<br />
3.03 GROUTING<br />
A. Low-Lift Grouting:<br />
1. Limit height of grout pours to 60 inches.<br />
2. Limit height of fresh masonry to 60 inches above each grout pour.<br />
3. Pour grout only after vertical and horizontal reinforcing is secured in place using<br />
reinforcement positioners. Prevent displacement of bars as grout is poured.<br />
4. Place grout for each pour continuously and consolidate immediately; do not interrupt pours<br />
for more than 1-1/2 hours.<br />
5. Stop grout pour 1 ½” below the top of masonry unit to form a key with the next pour, except<br />
at tops of walls.<br />
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. An independent testing agency will perform field tests, in accordance with provisions of Section<br />
01400.<br />
B. Test and evaluate mortar in accordance with ASTM C 780 procedures.<br />
1. Test frequency: Two tests for first 10,000 units laid. If acceptable, continue testing at two<br />
tests for every 50,000 units laid.<br />
C. Test and evaluate grout in accordance with ASTM C 1019 procedures.<br />
1. Test frequency: Three samples for every 50 cubic yards or once per week.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 MORTAR AND MASONRY GROUT<br />
04065 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Concrete Block.<br />
B. Clay Facing Brick.<br />
C. Reinforcement and Anchorage.<br />
D. Flashings.<br />
E. Accessories.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES<br />
A. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry.<br />
B. Section 04065 - Mortar and Masonry Grout.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 - Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American<br />
Concrete Institute International.<br />
B. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 - Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete<br />
Institute International.<br />
C. ASTM A 82/A 82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement.<br />
D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel<br />
Hardware.<br />
E. ASTM C 90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.<br />
F. ASTM C 216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made From Clay or<br />
Shale).<br />
G. ASTM C 954 - Specification for Steel Drill Screws.<br />
H. ASTM D 226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and<br />
Waterproofing.<br />
I. ASTM E 119 - Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Comply with provisions of ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 and ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602, except<br />
where exceeded by requirements of the contract documents.<br />
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an<br />
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If<br />
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.<br />
B. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt<br />
and oil.<br />
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during,<br />
and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.<br />
04-27-11 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES<br />
04810 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during,<br />
and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.<br />
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with<br />
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when<br />
construction is not in progress.<br />
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least<br />
three days after building masonry walls or columns.<br />
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left<br />
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such<br />
masonry.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MASONRY UNITS - GENERAL<br />
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to<br />
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units<br />
where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.<br />
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fireresistance<br />
ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent<br />
masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS<br />
A. (CMU1) Standard Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:<br />
1. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight.<br />
a. Hollow block, as indicated.<br />
b. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, movement joints, headers, bonding,<br />
and other special conditions as indicated or required.<br />
B. (CMU2): Integral Colored Rock Faced Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and<br />
as follows:<br />
1. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C 90, normal weight.<br />
a. Hollow block, as indicated.<br />
b. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, movement joints, headers, bonding,<br />
and other special conditions as indicated or required.<br />
2. Manufacturer: Amcon Block and Precast, Inc., St. Cloud, MN 56304. Tel: 888-251-6030.<br />
www.amconblock.com<br />
3. Color: Custom BWW Blend # RF-526.<br />
4. Colored Mortar: Refer to Section 04065 – Mortar and Masonry Grout.<br />
2.02 BRICK UNITS<br />
A. (FBR1) Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Type FBS, Grade SW.<br />
1. Size: Actual; 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.<br />
2. Special shapes: Molded units as required by conditions indicated, unless standard units<br />
can be sawn to produce equivalent effect.<br />
3. Manufacturer: Sioux City Brick and Tile Company, Sioux City, Iowa 51102.<br />
Tel: 712-258-7571. www.siouxcitybrick.com<br />
4. Color and Texture: Toasted Fine Art Velour.<br />
5. Colored Mortar: Refer to Section 04065 – Mortar and Masonry Grout.<br />
2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS<br />
A. Mortar and grout: As specified in Section 04065.<br />
04-27-11 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES<br />
04810 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE<br />
A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors:<br />
1. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com<br />
2. Heckmann Building Products, Inc: www.heckmannbuildingprods.com<br />
3. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: www.h-b.com<br />
4. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: www.wirebond.com<br />
5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.<br />
B. Reinforcing Steel: As indicated on the Drawings.<br />
C. Wire Positioners: Provide 9 gage wire unless noted otherwise.<br />
1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:<br />
a. Dur-O-Wal: D/A 811 and D/A 816.<br />
b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc: RB and RB-Twin.<br />
c. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America: No. 3401 and No. 3402.<br />
D. Joint Reinforcement: Single wythe, truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, hot dip<br />
galvanized after fabrication to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483<br />
inch cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of<br />
mortar coverage on each exposure.<br />
E. Wall Ties: Corrugated formed sheet metal, 7/8 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, hot dip galvanized<br />
to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2<br />
inch of mortar coverage from masonry face.<br />
F. Masonry Veneer Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between<br />
masonry veneer and structural backup, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.<br />
1. Anchor plates: Not less than 0.075 inch thick, designed for fastening to structural backup<br />
through sheathing by two fasteners.<br />
2. Wire ties: triangular shape, 0.1875 inch thick.<br />
3. Vertical adjustment: Not less than 2 inches.<br />
G. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon-steel<br />
drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except<br />
manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene or EPDM washer, No. 10 diameter by length<br />
required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads.<br />
1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:<br />
a. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Stainless Steel SX Fastener.<br />
b. ITW Buildex; Scots long life Teks.<br />
2.05 THRU-WALL FLASHING<br />
A. Thru-Wall Flashing: Copper-Laminated Flashing, 3-oz./sq. ft. copper sheet bonded between 2<br />
layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.<br />
1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:<br />
a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. www.abpnow.com<br />
b. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Fabric Thru-Wall Flashing.<br />
www.dur-o-wal.com<br />
c. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing. www.h-b.com<br />
2.06 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding; 4<br />
inch wide by maximum lengths available.<br />
B. Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I ("No.15") asphalt felt.<br />
C. Weeps: Cotton rope.<br />
04-27-11 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES<br />
04810 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
D. Cavity Mortar Diverter: Semi-rigid polyethylene or polyester mesh blocks, sized to fill bottom of<br />
wall cavity and suspend mortar droppings above weep/cavity vents to allow cavity drainage.<br />
1. Provide system manufactured by Mortar Net or CavClear.<br />
E. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.<br />
B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.<br />
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.<br />
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building<br />
structure provides permanent bracing.<br />
3.03 COURSING<br />
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.<br />
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform<br />
thickness.<br />
C. Concrete Masonry Units:<br />
1. Bond: Running.<br />
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.<br />
3. Mortar Joints: 3/8”, Concave.<br />
D. Brick Units:<br />
1. Bond: Running.<br />
2. Coursing: Three units and three mortar joints to equal 8 inches.<br />
3. Mortar Joints: 3/8”, Concave.<br />
3.04 PLACING AND BONDING<br />
A. Lay solid masonry units in full bed of mortar, with full head joints, uniformly jointed with other<br />
work.<br />
B. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.<br />
C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.<br />
D. Interlock intersections and external corners.<br />
E. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean, unchipped<br />
edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.<br />
3.05 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS<br />
A. Install weeps in veneer walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above thru-wall flashing.<br />
B. Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended<br />
by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents.<br />
04-27-11 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES<br />
04810 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL<br />
A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal<br />
joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.<br />
B. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.<br />
3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - SINGLE WYTHE MASONRY<br />
A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.<br />
3.08 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - MASONRY VENEER<br />
A. Stud Back-Up: Secure veneer anchors to stud framed back-up and embed into masonry veneer<br />
at maximum 16 inches on center vertically and 24 inches on center horizontally. Place<br />
additional anchors at perimeter of openings and ends of panels, so maximum spacing of<br />
anchors is 8 inches on center.<br />
3.09 MASONRY FLASHINGS<br />
A. Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all<br />
locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.<br />
1. Extend flashing full width at such interruptions and at least 4 inches into adjacent masonry<br />
or turn up at least 4 inches to form watertight pan at non-masonry construction.<br />
2. Remove or cover protrusions or sharp edges that could puncture flashing.<br />
B. Extend flashing to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry.<br />
3.10 LINTELS<br />
A. Install loose steel lintels over openings.<br />
3.11 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS<br />
A. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.<br />
3.12 BUILT-IN WORK<br />
A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work<br />
and furnished under other sections.<br />
B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.<br />
C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid<br />
with grout.<br />
1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.<br />
3.13 CLEANING<br />
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.<br />
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.<br />
C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.<br />
3.14 PROTECTION<br />
A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that<br />
are subject to damage by construction activities.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES<br />
04810 -5
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Structural steel framing members.<br />
B. Base plates.<br />
C. Grouting under base plates.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 05210 - Steel Joists.<br />
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL<br />
B. Section 05310 - Steel Deck: Support framing for small openings in deck.<br />
C. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work.<br />
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS<br />
A. AISC (MAN) - Steel Construction Manual; American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc.<br />
B. AISC S303 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; American Institute of<br />
Steel Construction, Inc.<br />
C. AISC S348 - Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.<br />
D. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.<br />
E. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,<br />
Welded and Seamless.<br />
F. ASTM A 108: Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon, Cold-Finished.<br />
G. ASTM A 307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile<br />
Strength.<br />
H. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi<br />
Minimum Tensile Strength.<br />
I. ASTM A 500: Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural<br />
Tubing in Rounds and Shapes<br />
J. ASTM A 563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.<br />
K. ASTM A 992/A 992M - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes.<br />
L. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout<br />
(Nonshrink).<br />
M. ASTM E 164 - Standard Practice for Ultrasonic Contact Examination of Weldments.<br />
N. ASTM F 436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers.<br />
O. ASTM F 959 - Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators<br />
for Use with Structural Fasteners.<br />
P. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;<br />
American Welding Society.<br />
Q. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society.<br />
R. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings.<br />
S. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.<br />
04-27-11 STRUCTURAL STEEL<br />
05120 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Shop Drawings:<br />
1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of structural members, cuts, openings,<br />
attachments, and fasteners.<br />
2. Indicate connections including connections not specifically detailed.<br />
3. Indicate cambers and loads.<br />
4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts.<br />
Identify pre-tensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections.<br />
5. Indicate welds by standard AWS A2.4 symbols, distinguishing between shop and field<br />
welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.<br />
C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within<br />
the previous 12 months.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual."<br />
B. Comply with Section 10 of AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for<br />
architecturally exposed structural steel.<br />
C. Maintain one copy of each document on site.<br />
D. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a record of<br />
successful in-service performance.<br />
E. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with a record of successful<br />
in-service performance.<br />
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off<br />
ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel<br />
members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.<br />
1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or<br />
overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or<br />
structures as directed.<br />
B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers.<br />
1.07 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint<br />
and coating manufacturers' recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are<br />
compatible with one another.<br />
B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction<br />
without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and<br />
directions for installation.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MATERIALS<br />
A. Steel Angles, Plates, Channels, S Shapes, M Shapes, and HP Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
B. Steel W Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.<br />
C. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B. (Fy = 46 ksi)<br />
D. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B, Finish black and galvanized, as indicated. (Fy = 35 ksi)<br />
04-27-11 STRUCTURAL STEEL<br />
05120 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
E. Shear Stud Connectors: Fabricate from ASTM A 108 Grade 1015 bars.<br />
F. Structural Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade A.<br />
G. High-Strength Structural Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1,<br />
medium carbon, plain.<br />
H. Anchor Rods: ASTM A 36.<br />
I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.<br />
J. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,<br />
cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.<br />
1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7000 psi.<br />
a. Conspec: “Enduro 50 Grout”.<br />
b. Euclid: "Euco N-S Grout".<br />
c. L & M: "Duragrout".<br />
d. Sonneborn: "Sonogrout 10k".<br />
e. Five Star Products, Inc.: "Five Star Grout".<br />
f. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.: Certi-Vex Grout #1000.<br />
K. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC limitations of<br />
authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
L. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: Fabricator's standard, complying with VOC<br />
limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
2.02 FABRICATION<br />
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate<br />
according to AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360.<br />
1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated.<br />
2. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.<br />
3. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shoppriming<br />
operations.<br />
4. Fabricate connections for bolt, nut, and washer connectors.<br />
2.03 FINISH<br />
A. Prepare structural component surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 7 and SP2 or SP3.<br />
B. Immediately after surface preparation, shop prime structural steel members. Do not prime<br />
surfaces that will be field welded, in contact with concrete, or high strength bolted with slipcritical<br />
connectors.<br />
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of shop-bolted connections in accordance<br />
with AISC "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325..<br />
1. Visually inspect 100 percent of connections to ensure that all plies of connected parts are<br />
in complete contact.<br />
B. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all shop-welded connections and test 100 percent of full<br />
penetration welds using the following:<br />
1. Ultrasonic testing performed in accordance with ASTM E 164.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that conditions are appropriate for erection of structural steel and that the work may<br />
properly proceed.<br />
04-27-11 STRUCTURAL STEEL<br />
05120 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural<br />
steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in<br />
intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel,<br />
connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.<br />
3.02 ERECTION<br />
A. Erect structural steel in compliance with AISC "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings<br />
and Bridges".<br />
B. Use carbon steel bolts only for temporary bracing during construction, unless otherwise<br />
specifically permitted on drawings. Install high-strength bolts in accordance with AISC<br />
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325.<br />
C. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Architect.<br />
D. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in<br />
contact with concrete.<br />
E. Grout solidly between column base plates and bearing surfaces, complying with manufacturer's<br />
instructions for nonshrink grout. Trowel grouted surfaces smooth, splaying neatly to 45<br />
degrees.<br />
3.03 TOLERANCES<br />
A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative.<br />
B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.<br />
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section<br />
01400.<br />
B. High-Strength Bolts: Provide testing and verification of field-bolted connections as stated in<br />
Section 05120, Article 2.04.<br />
C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect all field-welded connections and test welds as stated in<br />
Section 05120, Article 2.04.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 STRUCTURAL STEEL<br />
05120 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 05210 – STEEL JOISTS<br />
PART 1—GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Open web steel joists.<br />
B. Joist accessories.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 05120 – Structural Steel.<br />
B. Section 05310 - Steel Deck.<br />
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS<br />
A. American Welding Society, (AWS):<br />
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M-02: Structural Welding Code – Steel.<br />
B. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM):<br />
1. ASTM A 36/A 36M: Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.<br />
2. ASTM A 307: Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.<br />
C. The Society for Protective Coatings, (SSPC):<br />
1. SSPC-Paint 15: Paint Specification No. 15: Steel Joist Shop Primer.<br />
2. SSPC-SP 2: Surface Preparation Specification No. 2: Hand Tool Cleaning<br />
D. Steel Joist Institute, (SJI):<br />
1. SJI "Standard Specification, Load Tables, and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist<br />
Girders,".<br />
2. SJI "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Joists and Joist Girders".<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists.<br />
Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, extensions, joist accessories; splice<br />
and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction.<br />
1. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction.<br />
2. Indicate welds by standard AWS A2.4 symbols, distinguishing between shop and field<br />
welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld.<br />
C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within<br />
the previous 12 months.<br />
D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that joists comply with<br />
requirements.<br />
E. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying<br />
with applicable standard specifications and load tables of SJI "Specifications."<br />
1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for<br />
designing special joists to comply with performance requirements.<br />
B. SJI Specifications: Comply with standard specifications in SJI's "Specifications" that are<br />
applicable to types of joists indicated.<br />
C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding<br />
Code - Steel."<br />
04-27-11 STEEL JOISTS<br />
05210 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications."<br />
B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and<br />
handling.<br />
PART 2—PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MATERIALS<br />
A. Steel: Comply with SJI "Specifications" for web and steel-angle chord members.<br />
B. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
C. Carbon-Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon-steel, hex-head<br />
bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon-steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers.<br />
D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.<br />
2.02 K-SERIES STEEL JOISTS<br />
A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web<br />
Steel Joists, K-Series" in SJI "Specifications," with steel-angle top and bottom chord members,<br />
underslung ends, and parallel top chord.<br />
1. Joist Type: K-series steel joists.<br />
B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds,<br />
and methods used in correcting welding work.<br />
C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists.<br />
D. Top-Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI Type S top-chord extensions where<br />
indicated, complying with SJI "Specifications."<br />
E. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI Type R extended ends where indicated,<br />
complying with SJI "Specifications."<br />
F. Do not camber joists.<br />
G. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturer's standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist<br />
slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches.<br />
2.03 JOIST ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Bridging: Fabricate as indicated and according to SJI "Specifications." Furnish additional<br />
erection bridging if required for stability.<br />
B. Fabricate steel bearing plates with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses as indicated.<br />
Shop prime paint.<br />
C. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist<br />
manufacturer to complete joist installation.<br />
2.04 PRIMERS<br />
A. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance<br />
requirements in SSPC-Paint 15.<br />
04-27-11 STEEL JOISTS<br />
05210 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.05 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING<br />
A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and<br />
accessories.<br />
B. Apply 1 coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous,<br />
dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick.<br />
PART 3—EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for<br />
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting<br />
performance.<br />
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured.<br />
B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting<br />
construction according to SJI "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations,<br />
and requirements in this Section.<br />
1. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening.<br />
2. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that<br />
joists are stabilized during construction.<br />
3. Delay rigidly connecting bottom-chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads<br />
have been applied.<br />
C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding<br />
sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and<br />
procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting<br />
welding work.<br />
D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts in locations indicated.<br />
E. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are<br />
applied.<br />
F. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams.<br />
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section<br />
01400.<br />
B. Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.<br />
C. Bolted connections will be visually inspected.<br />
D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in<br />
compliance with specified requirements.<br />
E. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified<br />
requirements.<br />
04-27-11 STEEL JOISTS<br />
05210 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.04 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or re-prime field<br />
connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted joists, bearing plates, abutting<br />
structural steel, and accessories.<br />
1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand-tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2.<br />
2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 STEEL JOISTS<br />
05210 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Roof deck.<br />
SECTION 05310 - STEEL DECK<br />
B. Supplementary framing for openings up to and including 10 inches.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel.<br />
B. Section 05210 - Steel Joists: Support framing for openings larger than 18 inches.<br />
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS<br />
A. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,<br />
Structural, High-Strength, Low Alloy, and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability,<br />
Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardened.<br />
B. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society<br />
C. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society.<br />
D. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; The Society for Protective Coatings.<br />
E. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, reinforcement,<br />
pertinent details, and accessories.<br />
C. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and<br />
finishes.<br />
D. Certificates: Certify that products furnished meet or exceed specified requirements.<br />
E. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within<br />
the previous 12 months.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Design deck layout, spans, fastening, and joints under direct supervision of a Professional<br />
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in.<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with a<br />
record of successful in-service performance.<br />
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and<br />
handling.<br />
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a<br />
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.<br />
04-27-11 STEEL DECK<br />
05310 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Steel Deck:<br />
1. United Steel Deck , Inc: www.njb-united.com.<br />
2. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com.<br />
3. Wheeling Corrugating Co: www.wheelingcorrugating.com.<br />
4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.<br />
2.02 STEEL DECK<br />
A. Roof Deck: Wide Rib (Type B) Roof deck:<br />
1. Non-galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Grade 3.<br />
2. Primer: Shop coat of manufacturer's standard primer paint over cleaned and phosphatized<br />
substrate.<br />
3. Structural Properties:<br />
a. Section modulus: SDI minimum for type of deck shown on Drawings.<br />
b. Span Design: 3 span minimum.<br />
4. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: Refer to Drawings for gauge.<br />
5. Nominal Height: 1-1/2 inch.<br />
6. Profile: Wide Rib, Type B.<br />
7. Formed Sheet Width: 36 inch.<br />
8. Side Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened. Provide #10 TEK fasteners.<br />
9. End Joints: Lapped, welded, 4” minimum end lap.<br />
2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS<br />
A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1.<br />
B. Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping.<br />
C. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities<br />
having jurisdiction.<br />
1. Primer Color: Gray.<br />
D. Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 inch thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck.<br />
2.04 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips and cover plates, 22 gage thick sheet steel;<br />
of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck.<br />
B. Roof Sump Pans: 14 gage sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides, recessed 1-1/2 inches below<br />
roof deck surface, bearing flange 3 inches wide, sealed watertight.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align<br />
and level.<br />
B. On steel supports provide minimum 1-1/2 inch bearing.<br />
C. Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports as indicated on the<br />
Drawings.<br />
D. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3.<br />
04-27-11 STEEL DECK<br />
05310 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
E. At deck openings from 6 inches to 10 inches in size, provide 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch steel angle<br />
reinforcement. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each<br />
side of opening and fusion weld or mechanically attach to deck at each flute.<br />
F. Where deck changes direction, install 6 inch minimum wide sheet steel cover plates, of same<br />
thickness as deck. Fusion weld 12 inches on center maximum.<br />
G. At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and<br />
angle flashings to close openings.<br />
H. Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam<br />
cell closures.<br />
I. Position roof drain pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Fusion weld at each deck<br />
flute.<br />
J. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned<br />
areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer.<br />
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Welded Connections: Visually inspect 100 percent of connections to ensure that all plies of<br />
connected parts are in complete contact.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 STEEL DECK<br />
05310 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
SECTION 05400 - COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING<br />
A. Formed steel stud exterior wall framing and bracing.<br />
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies.<br />
B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel.<br />
C. Section 05310 - Steel Deck.<br />
D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud framing.<br />
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS<br />
A. AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural<br />
Members; American Iron and Steel Institute<br />
B. AISI SG-971 - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; American<br />
Iron and Steel Institute<br />
C. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel<br />
Hardware<br />
D. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron<br />
and Steel Products.<br />
E. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or<br />
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.<br />
F. ASTM C 955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,<br />
Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and<br />
Metal Plaster Bases.<br />
G. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society.<br />
H. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for<br />
Protective Coatings.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish,<br />
product criteria, limitations.<br />
C. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacing, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal<br />
framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.<br />
Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging,<br />
splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.<br />
D. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within<br />
the previous 12 months.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Calculate structural properties of framing members in accordance with requirements of AISI<br />
North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.<br />
04-27-11 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING<br />
05400 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during<br />
delivery, storage, and handling.<br />
B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid<br />
condensation.<br />
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the drawings.<br />
B. Coordinate work of this section with the placement of components within the stud framing<br />
system.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 FRAMING SYSTEM<br />
A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips,<br />
fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.<br />
2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS<br />
A. Studs and Track: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched<br />
web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height.<br />
1. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings.<br />
2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M G90/Z275 coating.<br />
B. Joists and Purlins: Fabricated from ASTM A 653/A 653M steel sheet, with G90/Z275 hot dipped<br />
galvanized coating.<br />
1. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings.<br />
2.03 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions<br />
encountered; finish to match framing components.<br />
B. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed Sheet Steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered;<br />
finish to match framing components.<br />
C. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with<br />
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
D. Sill Sealer: Closed-cell polyethylene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's<br />
standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.<br />
2.04 FASTENERS<br />
A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A<br />
153/A 153M.<br />
B. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated and Drilled expansion bolts.<br />
C. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.<br />
2.05 SHOP FABRICATED ASSEMBLIES<br />
A. Shop fabricate metal framing to the greatest extent possible.<br />
B. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with<br />
connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards,<br />
manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.<br />
1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.<br />
2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.<br />
04-27-11 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING<br />
05400 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, or riveting as<br />
standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.<br />
a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and<br />
quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.<br />
b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw<br />
penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.<br />
4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw<br />
fastening, according to Shop Drawings.<br />
C. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection<br />
stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION OF FRAMING<br />
A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and Drawings.<br />
B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with<br />
connections securely fastened.<br />
C. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of<br />
foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.<br />
D. Install studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted.<br />
E. Install studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design requirements.<br />
F. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.<br />
Independently frame both sides of joints.<br />
G. Install insulation, specified in Section 07212 in built-up exterior framing members, such as<br />
headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion<br />
of framing work.<br />
H. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.<br />
3.03 TOLERANCES<br />
A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch.<br />
B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/8 inch.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING<br />
05400 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Shop fabricated miscellaneous metal items.<br />
B. Custom stainless steel fabrications<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications in concrete.<br />
B. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.<br />
B. ASTM A 53/A 53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,<br />
Welded and Seamless.<br />
C. ASTM A 123/A 123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron<br />
and Steel Products.<br />
D. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel<br />
Hardware.<br />
E. ASTM A 325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi<br />
Minimum Tensile Strength.<br />
G. ASTM A 325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa<br />
Tensile Strength (Metric).<br />
H. ASTM A 500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel<br />
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.<br />
I. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or<br />
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.<br />
J. ASTM A 666-03: Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet,<br />
Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.<br />
K. AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;<br />
American Welding Society.<br />
L. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society.<br />
M. OSHA 29 CFR Standard 1910.27 - Fixed Ladders; Occupational Safety and Health Standards.<br />
N. SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings.<br />
O. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for<br />
Protective Coatings.<br />
1.04 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for<br />
installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral<br />
anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in<br />
time for installation.<br />
04-27-11 METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
05500 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 METALS, GENERAL<br />
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise<br />
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials<br />
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.<br />
2.02 MATERIALS - STEEL<br />
A. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.<br />
D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight, (Schedule 40), black finish.<br />
E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), with G90/Z275 galvanized<br />
coating.<br />
F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A<br />
153M where connecting galvanized components.<br />
G. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded.<br />
H. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities<br />
having jurisdiction.<br />
I. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with<br />
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
2.02 FABRICATION<br />
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units<br />
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain<br />
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.<br />
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius<br />
of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on<br />
exposed surfaces.<br />
C. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.<br />
D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or<br />
welds where possible.<br />
E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude<br />
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.<br />
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,<br />
and similar items.<br />
G. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located;<br />
consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.<br />
H. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related<br />
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted<br />
otherwise.<br />
2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS<br />
A. Exterior patio guardrail/fence: Galvanized steel tube and plate materials as indicated on<br />
Drawings.<br />
04-27-11 METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
05500 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. RTU roof reinforcement angle frames.<br />
C. Bent, welded steel bar brackets for toilet room lavatory countertops.<br />
D. Steel half-wall reinforcement posts and anchors.<br />
E. Steel Roof Access Ladder: Unless otherwise indicated fabricate steel ladder as follows.<br />
1. Stringers (Side rails): 3 inches by 3/8 inch steel bars with eased edges.<br />
2. Rungs: 3/4 inch diameter smooth steel rods at 12 inches on center. Fit rungs in centerline<br />
of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth and flush on outer rail faces.<br />
3. Brackets: 3 inches by 3/8 inch bent steel plate to form a “U” bracket welded to stringers. In<br />
locations as indicted on Drawings, but not more than 6 feet on center. Brackets to be<br />
bolted to wall with two bolts per bracket. Coordinate locations of blocking.<br />
4. Center line of rungs minimum 7 inches from wall.<br />
5. Width: 1’-8” inches between stringers.<br />
6. Finish: Factory prime painted. Field finished under Section 09900.<br />
7. Comply with applicable OSHA requirements for steel ladders.<br />
F. Keg Storage Fencing and Gates:<br />
1. Fence Fabric: Chain link fence fabric, 2 inch mesh, 9 gauge galvanized coated wire.<br />
2. Posts, Rails and Braces: Nominal 2 inch diameter galvanized steel pipe. Provide<br />
galvanized components for attaching fence fabric, top caps, 4” by 4” x 1/4” galvanized steel<br />
base plates for posts and 5/8” stainless steel anchor bolts.<br />
3. Gates: Fabricate single swing gates as indicated on Drawings with forked type latch for<br />
padlock, 3 hinges per gate and cane bolts. All components galvanized.<br />
4. Hardware: Padlock by Section 08710 Door Hardware.<br />
5. Accessories: Provide other components required for complete installation.<br />
G. Trash Enclosure Gates:<br />
1. Gate Frame: 2” x 2” x 1/8”, ASTM A500 structural steel tubing. Continuously weld tube<br />
connections and grind welds smooth.<br />
2. Corrugated Metal Panels: 18 gauge, 1-1/2” deep, galvanized steel roof deck.<br />
3. Steel Casters: Provide 4” diameter steel casters capable of carrying the gate load, 1 per<br />
gate. Casters to be welded to bottom of gates at locations indicated on Drawings.<br />
4. Hardware: Fabricate gate hinges in configuration as indicated on Drawings. 2 hinges per<br />
gate. Provide cane bolts welded to frame, 1 per gate.<br />
H. Steel Channel Support System: Unistrut P1001HS. As indicated on Structural Drawings for<br />
support of 1/2" diameter threaded rods. Refer to detail 7/S202.<br />
I. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and<br />
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for<br />
each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single<br />
unit where indicated.<br />
J. Custom Stainless Steel Fabrications: Provide 18 gauge, Type 304 brushed stainless steel wall<br />
angles, wall channels, trim and base components as indicated on Drawings. Hem edges, round<br />
off corners and adhesively apply in locations as indicated.<br />
2.04 FINISHES - STEEL<br />
A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.<br />
B. Prime paint all steel items with one coat of fabricators standard shop primer.<br />
C. Galvanizing of non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M<br />
requirements.<br />
04-27-11 METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
05500 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES<br />
A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements.<br />
B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch.<br />
C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch.<br />
D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches.<br />
E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.<br />
B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until<br />
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.<br />
C. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.<br />
D. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.<br />
E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except<br />
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.<br />
F. Coordinate with other related trades and suppliers for acceptable dimensions and tolerances.<br />
G. Install ladders in accordance with manufacturers instructions using manufacturer supplied<br />
brackets and accessories.<br />
3.04 INSTALLATION OF BOLLARDS<br />
A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards. Place concrete in<br />
bollard and vibrate or tamp for consolidation, round off concrete at top of bollard. Support and<br />
brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
05500 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Dimensional Framing Lumber.<br />
B. Roof and Wall Sheathing.<br />
C. Wood nailers and curbs for roofing and items installed on roof.<br />
D. Concealed wood blocking for support of equipment, toilet and bath accessories, wall cabinets,<br />
wood trim, and shelving.<br />
E. Miscellaneous wood nailers and furring strips.<br />
F. Preservative treatment of wood.<br />
G. Fire retardant treatment of wood.<br />
H. Fiber Cement Siding Panels, Soffit Panels and Trim.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel<br />
Hardware.<br />
B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.<br />
C. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure<br />
Processes; American Wood-Preservers' Association.<br />
D. AWPA C20 - Structural Lumber -- Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American<br />
Wood-Preservers' Association.<br />
E. AWPA C27 - Plywood -- Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-<br />
Preservers' Association.<br />
F. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood-<br />
Preservers' Association.<br />
G. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology<br />
(Department of Commerce).<br />
H. DOC PS 2: Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels.<br />
I. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology<br />
(Department of Commerce).<br />
J. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies.<br />
B. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSCaccredited<br />
testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA<br />
standards.<br />
04-27-11 ROUGH CARPENTRY<br />
06100 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air<br />
circulation around stacks and under coverings.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.<br />
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER<br />
A. General:<br />
1. Grading Agency: Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).<br />
2. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.<br />
3. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.<br />
B. Framing Lumber: 2” x 4” or larger; No. 2 Southern Pine, No. 2 Douglas Fir Larch or equivalent.<br />
C. Joists and Rafters: Select Grade, Southern Pine, Douglas Fir Larch or equivalent.<br />
D. Roof Edge Bevel Blocking:<br />
1. Provide redwood, cedar or pressure treated material.<br />
E. Miscellaneous Blocking, Furring, and Nailers:<br />
1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.<br />
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.<br />
2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS<br />
A. (SHTG-1) Wall Sheathing: The contractor has the option to use one of the following wall<br />
sheathing panels.<br />
1. Plywood Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 1, C-D, exposure 1, structural 1.<br />
2. Oriented Strand Board Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 2, exposure 1, structural 1.<br />
3. Nominal Thickness: 1/2 inch.<br />
B. (SHTG-2) Plywood Roof Sheathing: DOC PS 1, C-D, exterior, structural 1.<br />
1. Nominal Thickness: 3/4 inch.<br />
2. Edge Detail: Tongue and Groove.<br />
C. (SHTG-3) Concealed Plywood: DOC PS 1, C-C Plugged, exposure 1.<br />
1. Nominal Thickness: as indicated on drawings.<br />
D. (SHTG-4) Exposed Plywood: DOC PS 1, A-D, interior grade.<br />
1. Nominal Thickness: as indicated on drawings.<br />
E. (SHTG-5) Electrical Panel Boards: APA rated sheathing, fire retardant treated.<br />
1. Nominal Thickness: 3/4 inch.<br />
2.04 FIBER CEMENT SIDING AND TRIM<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:<br />
1. James Hardie Building Products, Inc., Mission Viejo, CA; www.jameshardie.com<br />
2. Substitutions: Not permitted.<br />
04-27-11 ROUGH CARPENTRY<br />
06100 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. Materials:<br />
1. (FC SIDING) Siding Panels: HardiePanel Vertical Siding.<br />
a. Thickness: 5/16” thick.<br />
b. Panel Size: Provide panel sizes to minimize joints and to provide acceptable batten<br />
pattern.<br />
c. Texture: Smooth.<br />
d. Finish: Primed Finish for field painting under Section 09900.<br />
2. (FC SOFFIT) Soffit Panels: HardieSoffit.<br />
a. Thickness: 1/4" thick.<br />
b. Texture: Smooth.<br />
c. Finish: Primed Finish for field painting under Section 09900.<br />
3. (FC TRIM) Trim Boards: HardieTrim.<br />
a. Thickness: 1” thick.<br />
b. Texture: Smooth.<br />
c. Finish: Primed Finish for field painting under Section 09900.<br />
C. Installation: Install materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's written installation<br />
instructions.<br />
2.05 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Fasteners and Anchors:<br />
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for exterior, high<br />
humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.<br />
B. Metal Framing Connectors: Manufactured by The Simpson Co.<br />
1. Refer to Structural Drawings for specific components.<br />
C. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's<br />
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.<br />
D. Membrane Underlayment: 40 mil. thick, self-adhering sheet underlayment for high temperature<br />
applications.<br />
1. Grace Construction Products: Grace Ice and Water Shield HT.<br />
2. Location: Use at Entry Canopy Roof over sheathing.<br />
2.06 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT<br />
A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System<br />
for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific<br />
applications.<br />
B. (FT) Fire Retardant Treated Lumber:<br />
1. Interior Type A: AWPA Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H (Treatment C20<br />
for lumber and C27 for plywood), low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically<br />
treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of<br />
25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, with no evidence of significant combustion<br />
when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes.<br />
a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber<br />
and 15 percent for plywood.<br />
b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated .<br />
c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may<br />
become wet.<br />
04-27-11 ROUGH CARPENTRY<br />
06100 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
C. (PT) Preservative Pressure Treated Lumber, Above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC3B,<br />
Commodity Specification A (Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft<br />
retention.<br />
1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.<br />
2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.<br />
3. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and<br />
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.<br />
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for<br />
attaching other construction.<br />
B. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,<br />
specialty items, and trim.<br />
C. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be<br />
exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members.<br />
Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
D. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating<br />
lapping side members.<br />
E. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings.<br />
3.02 MEMBRANE UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION<br />
A. Apply 1 layer of membrane underlayment over entire canopy area that is to receive aluminum<br />
composite panels. Lap joints 6 inches.<br />
3.03 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT<br />
A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts,<br />
complying with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 ROUGH CARPENTRY<br />
06100 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Installation of finish millwork items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor.<br />
B. Adjustable Shelf Hardware.<br />
C. Hardware and attachment accessories.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 06110 - Rough Carpentry.<br />
B. Section 06410 - Custom Cabinets.<br />
C. Section 06415 - Countertops.<br />
D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.<br />
E. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Painting and finishing of millwork items.<br />
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack materials flat<br />
with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation within<br />
and around stacks and under temporary coverings.<br />
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not have materials delivered or install interior finish carpentry<br />
materials until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in space is completed and<br />
nominally dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative<br />
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS<br />
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.<br />
2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS<br />
A. (WD1) Select White Maple: maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of<br />
quality suitable for transparent finish. Furnished by Millwork Vendor for installation under this<br />
Section.<br />
B. (WD2) Southern Pine: No. 1, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of<br />
quality suitable for intended use.<br />
2.03 ADJUSTABLE SHELF HARDWARE<br />
A. Standards for Adjustable Shelf Brackets: Knape & Vogt, No. KV87-36” – White.<br />
B. Adjustable Shelf Brackets: Knape & Vogt, No. KV187-18” – White.<br />
C. Accessories: Provide bracket manufacturers standard shelf rests as applicable for installation<br />
indicated on drawings. Finish: White.<br />
D. Shelves: Furnished by Millwork Vendor.<br />
04-27-11 FINISH CARPENTRY<br />
06200 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.04 SHEET MATERIALS<br />
A. Cork Board: 1/4 inch thick fine grained cork for adhesive application. Furnished by Millwork<br />
Vendor.<br />
2.05 ADHESIVE<br />
A. Adhesive: Type recommended by AWI to suit application.<br />
2.06 FASTENERS<br />
A. Fasteners for Interior Finish Carpentry: Nails, screws, and other anchoring devices of type,<br />
size, material, and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,<br />
concealed where possible.<br />
2.07 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking: Southern Pine.<br />
B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type.<br />
C. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color.<br />
2.08 HARDWARE<br />
A. Refer to Drawings for special hardware items.<br />
B. Provide incidental hardware as required.<br />
2.09 FABRICATION<br />
A. To greatest degree possible, shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage<br />
through building openings.<br />
B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.<br />
Provide trim for scribing and site cutting.<br />
C. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Fit<br />
corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate<br />
counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.<br />
2.10 FACTORY FINISHING<br />
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.<br />
B. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding<br />
surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.<br />
C. Finish work in accordance with WIC Manual of Millwork, Section 5, System #5 - Catalyzed<br />
Polyurethane, Clear.<br />
D. Seal and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Spray or brush apply.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install interior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use<br />
concealed shims where necessary for alignment.<br />
B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use<br />
additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.<br />
04-27-11 FINISH CARPENTRY<br />
06200 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
C. Cope all inside corners, miter all outside corners.<br />
D. Countersink fasteners, apply wood filler in exposed fastener indentations. Sand work smooth<br />
and flush.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION OF ADJUSTABLE SHELF HARDWARE<br />
A. Install standards for adjustable shelf brackets according to manufacturer's written instructions,<br />
spaced not more than 36 inches o.c. and within 6 inches of end of shelves. Fasten to framing<br />
members, blocking, or metal backing, or use toggle bolts or hollow wall anchors.<br />
B. Cut shelves to neatly fit openings with only enough gap to allow shelves to be removed and<br />
reinstalled. Install shelves, fully seated on cleats, brackets, and supports.<br />
C. Fasten shelves to brackets to comply with bracket manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 FINISH CARPENTRY<br />
06200 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 06410 - CUSTOM CABINETS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Installation of custom cabinetry and millwork items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor as<br />
follows:<br />
1. Specially fabricated cabinet units.<br />
2. Adjustable cabinet shelving.<br />
3. Cabinet hardware.<br />
4. Factory finishing.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 06415 - Countertops: Plastic laminate and solid surface countertops.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. ANSI A135.4 - American National Standard for Basic Hardboard.<br />
B. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard.<br />
C. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use.<br />
D. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural<br />
Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada.<br />
E. GSA CID A-A-1936 - Adhesive, Contact, Neoprene Rubber; Federal Specifications and<br />
Standards.<br />
F. HPVA HP-1 - American National Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood; Hardwood<br />
Plywood & Veneer Association.<br />
G. NHLA G-101 - Rules for the Measurement & Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress; National<br />
Hardwood Lumber Association.<br />
H. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology<br />
(Department of Commerce).<br />
I. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology<br />
(Department of Commerce).<br />
J. WI (MAN) - Manual of Millwork; Woodwork Institute.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint<br />
details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes.<br />
C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.<br />
D. Millwork Vendor is contracted direct by Owner. Millwork Vendor will submit shop drawings to<br />
General Contractor for dimension verification.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Perform work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards<br />
Illustrated, Custom quality, unless other quality is indicated for specific items.<br />
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in<br />
this section with minimum three years of documented experience.<br />
04-27-11 CUSTOM CABINETS<br />
06410 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect units from moisture damage.<br />
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions<br />
in building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS<br />
A. Custom cabinetry and millwork items furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor.<br />
2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS<br />
A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.<br />
2.03 LUMBER MATERIALS<br />
A. Softwood Lumber: NIST PS 20; Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural<br />
Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; average moisture content of 4-9 percent; species as<br />
follows:<br />
1. Exposed Surfaces: Species Pine.<br />
2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Species Pine.<br />
3. Concealed Surfaces: Species Pine.<br />
B. Hardwood Lumber: NHLA; Graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork<br />
Quality Standards Illustrated, Grade III/Economy; average moisture content of 4-9 percent;<br />
species as follows:<br />
1. Exposed Surfaces: (WD1) Select White Maple.<br />
2. Concealed Surfaces: Poplar.<br />
2.04 PANEL MATERIALS<br />
A. Softwood Faced Plywood:<br />
1. Exposed Surfaces: NIST PS 1; APA A-A Grade, plain-sliced white pine face veneer,<br />
Interior rated adhesives, core of particleboard, medium density fiberboard, or engineered<br />
combination, thickness as indicated.<br />
2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: NIST PS 1; APA A-B Grade, rotary cut Douglas fir face veneer,<br />
Interior rated adhesives, core of medium density fiberboard, engineered combination, fireretardant<br />
treated particleboard, or veneer, thickness as indicated.<br />
3. Concealed Surfaces: NIST PS 1; APA B-B Grade, rotary cut Douglas fir face veneer,<br />
Interior rated adhesives, core of medium density fiberboard, engineered combination, fireretardant<br />
treated particleboard, or veneer, thickness as required.<br />
B. Hardwood Faced Plywood: HPVA HP-1; graded in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural<br />
Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, core of veneer; type of glue recommended for specific<br />
application; thickness as required; face veneer as follows:<br />
1. Exposed Surfaces: (WD1) Select White Maple.<br />
C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; medium density industrial type as specified in AWI/AWMAC<br />
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, composed of wood chips bonded with<br />
moisture resistant adhesive under heat and pressure; sanded faces; thickness as required; use<br />
for components indicated on drawings.<br />
04-27-11 CUSTOM CABINETS<br />
06410 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
D. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): ANSI A208.2; type as specified in AWI/AWMAC<br />
Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; composed of wood fibers pressure<br />
bonded with moisture resistant adhesive to suit application; sanded faces; thickness as<br />
required.<br />
E. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 1/4 inch<br />
thick, smooth one side (S1S); use for drawer bottoms, dust panels, and other components<br />
indicated on drawings.<br />
2.05 LAMINATE MATERIALS<br />
A. Manufacturers:<br />
1. Wilsonart International; www.wilsonart.com<br />
B. Plastic Laminate: In accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated, 0.039 inch Post<br />
Forming quality.<br />
1. Color, Pattern, and Surface Textures:<br />
a. (PLAM1): Wilsonart # 1573-60, Frosty White, Matte.<br />
b. (PLAM3): Wilsonart # 1595-60, Black, Matte<br />
C. Laminate Backing Sheet: 0.020 inch Backing Sheet grade, undecorated plastic laminate.<br />
2.06 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Adhesive: GSA CID A-A-1936 contact adhesive.<br />
B. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application and as indicated on the Drawings.<br />
C. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel.<br />
D. Stainless steel legs: 6 inches long, NSF approved for food preparation areas.<br />
E. Grommets: Nominal 3 inch round, black, plastic material for cut-outs, supplied and installed by<br />
GC.<br />
2.07 HARDWARE<br />
A. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using surface mounted metal shelf<br />
standards and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing<br />
adjustments.<br />
1. Product: No. KV 255 and 256 manufactured by Knape & Vogt.<br />
B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard back-mounted system using surface mounted metal shelf<br />
standards and coordinated cantilevered shelf brackets, satin chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch<br />
spacing adjustments.<br />
1. Product: No. KV 187 and 87 manufactured by Knape & Vogt.<br />
C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, stainless steel with satin finish, 4 inch centers.<br />
D. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, master keyed, steel with chrome finish.<br />
E. Catches: Magnetic on all cabinets.<br />
F. Hinges: European style concealed type, steel with polished finish. Self-closing.<br />
G. Cup Dispensers: Install cup dispensers furnished by Owner’s Equipment Vendor.<br />
2.08 FABRICATION<br />
A. Coordinate with Owner supplied components and equipment.<br />
B. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit<br />
passage through building openings.<br />
04-27-11 CUSTOM CABINETS<br />
06410 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
C. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern.<br />
D. Door Fronts: 3/4 inch thick; overlay style.<br />
E. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for<br />
cutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.<br />
F. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with<br />
manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Locate<br />
counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.<br />
G. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.<br />
H. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions.<br />
Prime paint cut edges.<br />
I. Provide grommets in locations as indicated on cabinet drawings.<br />
J. Provide white melamine surface on interior surfaces of closed cabinets, unless otherwise noted<br />
on the Drawings.<br />
K. Provide plastic laminate surfaces on exposed surface of cabinets and interiors of open shelf<br />
cabinets normally exposed to view.<br />
L. Provide stainless steel legs on laminate casework located at food preparation areas as detailed.<br />
2.09 FACTORY FINISHING<br />
A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.<br />
B. For opaque finishes, apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and sand smooth.<br />
C. On items to receive transparent finishes, use wood filler matching or blending with surrounding<br />
surfaces and of types recommended for applied finishes.<br />
D. Finish work in accordance with WIC Manual of Millwork, Section 5, System #5 - Catalyzed<br />
Polyurethane, Clear.<br />
E. Seal and varnish exposed to view surfaces. Spray or brush apply.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.<br />
B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.<br />
B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.<br />
C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units.<br />
D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not<br />
use additional overlay trim for this purpose.<br />
E. Secure cabinets to wall and floor using appropriate angles and anchorages.<br />
3.03 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Adjust installed work.<br />
B. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.<br />
04-27-11 CUSTOM CABINETS<br />
06410 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.04 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 CUSTOM CABINETS<br />
06410 -5
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 06415 - COUNTERTOPS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Installation of countertops for manufactured casework furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor.<br />
B. Wall-hung counters and vanity tops.<br />
1.02 REFERENCES<br />
A. ANSI A208.2 - American National Standard for Medium Density Fiberboard for Interior Use.<br />
B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.<br />
C. ISSFA-2 - Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; International Solid Surface<br />
Fabricators Association.<br />
D. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates.<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint<br />
details, fastening methods, and schedule of finishes.<br />
C. Millwork Vendor is contracted direct by Owner. Millwork Vendor will submit shop drawings to<br />
General Contractor for dimension verification.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Qualified installer for solid surface materials that is trained and certified<br />
by manufacturer for the installation of the specified products.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES<br />
A. Countertops furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor.<br />
B. Plastic Laminate Countertops: High pressure decorative laminate sheet bonded to substrate.<br />
1. Laminate Sheet, Unless Otherwise Indicated: NEMA LD 3 Grade HGS, 0.048 inch nominal<br />
thickness.<br />
a. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread 25, maximum; smoke developed 450,<br />
maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.<br />
b. NSF approved for food contact.<br />
c. Finish: Matte or suede, gloss rating of 5 to 20.<br />
d. Surface Color and Pattern: (PLAM2) Wilsonart # 4884-38, Flame Soapstone,<br />
Standard finish.<br />
2. Laminate Backing Sheet: 0.020 inch Backing Sheet grade, undecorated plastic laminate.<br />
3. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same construction.<br />
B. Solid Surfacing Countertops: Solid surfacing sheet or plastic resin casting over continuous<br />
substrate.<br />
1. Flat Sheet Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum.<br />
COUNTERTOPS<br />
06415 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2. Solid Surfacing Sheet and Plastic Resin Castings: Complying with ISSFA-2 and NEMA LD<br />
3; acrylic or polyester resin, mineral filler, and pigments; homogenous, non-porous and<br />
capable of being worked and repaired using standard woodworking tools; no surface<br />
coating; color and pattern consistent throughout thickness.<br />
a. NSF approved for food contact.<br />
b. Finish on Exposed Surfaces: Matte, gloss rating of 5 to 20.<br />
c. Colors and Patterns:<br />
1). (SS1) Corian, “Aztec Gold”.<br />
2). (SS2) Corian, “Night Sky”, Black.<br />
3. Other Components Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum.<br />
4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Built up to minimum 1-1/4 inch thick; square edge or as<br />
indicated on Drawings.<br />
5. Back and End Splashes: Same sheet material, square top; minimum 4 inches high.<br />
6. Skirts: As indicated on drawings.<br />
2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS<br />
A. Medium Density Fiberboard for Supporting Substrate: ANSI A208.2.<br />
B. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of<br />
materials being joined.<br />
2.03 FABRICATION<br />
A. Fabricate tops, splashes and sills in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints<br />
smooth and flush.<br />
1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer.<br />
2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against<br />
cabinet or wall.<br />
3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or<br />
unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.<br />
B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
1. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Solid Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive<br />
sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.<br />
D. Wall-Mounted Counters: Provide skirts, aprons, and brackets required and as indicated on<br />
drawings.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.<br />
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Construction Manager of<br />
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.<br />
C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets<br />
are installed in proper locations.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.<br />
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best<br />
result for the substrate under the project conditions.<br />
COUNTERTOPS<br />
06415 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.03 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level;<br />
shim where required.<br />
B. Attach plastic laminate countertops using screws with minimum penetration into substrate board<br />
of 5/8 inch.<br />
C. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces with clear silicone sealant.<br />
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.<br />
B. Protect installed products until completion of project.<br />
C. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
COUNTERTOPS<br />
06415 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
SECTION 06605 - FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS<br />
A. Fiberglass reinforced polyester panel system for adhesive mounting.<br />
B. Moldings, adhesive, and joint sealants.<br />
1.02 REFERENCES<br />
A. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.<br />
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.<br />
B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials,<br />
in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits<br />
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under<br />
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Crane Composites, Inc., (Formerly Kemlite Company), Channahon,<br />
IL. www.cranecomposites.com<br />
2.02 PANEL SYSTEM<br />
A. Plastic Panel System: Factory finished panels, trim, sealant, and accessories.<br />
B. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels (FRP): 0.090 inch thick, USDA approved, textured<br />
surface wall panels with Class III/Class C fire rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E<br />
84.<br />
1. Product: Crane Composities, Glasbord-P, Embossed Class C Wall Panel.<br />
2. Flame Spread:
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.<br />
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory<br />
preparation before proceeding.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Take panels out of cartons and allow to acclimatize to room conditions for at least 48 hours prior<br />
to installation.<br />
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best<br />
result for the substrate under the project conditions.<br />
C. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.<br />
D. Protect existing surfaces from damage due to installation.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Use the adhesives recommended by the panel manufacturer unless prohibited by local<br />
regulations; obtain manufacturer's approval of alternative adhesives.<br />
C. Install panels continuous from floor to ceiling without horizontal joints.<br />
D. Install continuous bead of silicone sealant in each joint and trim groove and between trim and<br />
adjacent construction, maintaining 1/8 inch expansion space.<br />
E. Avoid contamination of panel faces with adhesives, solvents, or cleaners; clean as necessary<br />
and replace if not possible to repair to original condition.<br />
F. Protect installed products until completion of project.<br />
G. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products after Substantial Completion.<br />
H. Cove base to be installed on top of FRP with no bottom trim. Caulk top of cove to FRP with<br />
clear silicone.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS<br />
06605 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
SECTION 07100 – SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING<br />
A. Self-Adhering, Sheet Membrane Waterproofing.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 03300 – Cast-in-place Concrete.<br />
B. Section 04810 – Unit Masonry Assemblies.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):<br />
1. ASTM C 272: Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich<br />
Constructions.<br />
2. ASTM D 1227: Specification for Emulsified Asphalt used as a Protective Coating for<br />
Roofing.<br />
3. ASTM D 1621: Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.<br />
4. ASTM D 1668: Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and<br />
Waterproofing.<br />
5. ASTM D 4258: Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating.<br />
6. ASTM D 6135: Practice for Application of Self-Adhering Modified Bituminous<br />
Waterproofing.<br />
B. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA):<br />
1. Waterproofing Manual.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following:<br />
1. Manufacturer's written installation instructions.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary waterproofing materials and primers through one source<br />
from a single manufacturer.<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer for installation of<br />
waterproofing required for this Project.<br />
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible<br />
manufacturer's identification.<br />
B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.<br />
1. Store in cool, dry place at temperature of not less than 40 degrees F., out of direct sunlight,<br />
and with adequate ventilation.<br />
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather<br />
conditions permit waterproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written<br />
instructions.<br />
B. Do not apply waterproofing to damp, frozen, dirty, or dusty surfaces unacceptable to<br />
waterproofing system manufacturer.<br />
04-27-11 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING<br />
07100 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Waterproofing:<br />
1. W.R. Grace & Co.; Bituthene 3000. www.graceconstruction.com<br />
2. American Hydrotech, Inc.; VM 75. www.hydrotechusa.com<br />
3. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861. www.carlisle-cww.com<br />
4. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; SealTight Mel-Rol. www.wrmeadows.com<br />
2.02 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING<br />
A. (Waterproofing): Modified Bituminous Sheet of not less than 60-mil thick, self-adhering sheet<br />
consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil thick, polyethylene film with<br />
release liner on adhesive side and formulated for application with primer or surface conditioner.<br />
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended<br />
use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.<br />
1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet<br />
waterproofing material.<br />
C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by<br />
manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.<br />
D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low<br />
viscosity.<br />
E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating.<br />
F. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheet strips of same material and thickness as<br />
sheet waterproofing.<br />
G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended<br />
by waterproofing manufacturer.<br />
H. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick, predrilled at 9-inch<br />
centers.<br />
I. Protection Board: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced one or<br />
both sides with plastic film, nominal thickness 1/4 inch, with compressive strength of not less<br />
than 8 psi per ASTM D 1621, and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6 percent per<br />
ASTM C 272.<br />
1. Owens Corning's "Fanfold DWB.<br />
2. Dow Chemical Company's "Protection Board III.<br />
3. Comparable products from other manufacturers.<br />
04-27-11 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING<br />
07100 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface<br />
smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.<br />
1. Proceed with waterproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating<br />
work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by<br />
waterproofing manufacturer.<br />
3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture.<br />
4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION<br />
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide<br />
clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.<br />
B. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other<br />
contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.<br />
C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets,<br />
holes, and other voids.<br />
D. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints<br />
and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.<br />
E. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.<br />
1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fillets of liquid<br />
membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows:<br />
a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction from corner or<br />
install membrane strip centered over corner.<br />
F. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations<br />
through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.<br />
3.03 APPLICATION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are<br />
indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of waterproofing.<br />
B. Install sheet waterproofing according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and<br />
according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135.<br />
C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be<br />
covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Re-prime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.<br />
D. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and<br />
maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and<br />
stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.<br />
1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install selfadhering,<br />
modified bituminous sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not<br />
use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F.<br />
E. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and<br />
contraction joints.<br />
F. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashing or ending<br />
in reglets with mastic.<br />
04-27-11 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING<br />
07100 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in sheet waterproofing not complying with requirements.<br />
Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches<br />
beyond repaired areas in all directions.<br />
H. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements;<br />
repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.<br />
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION BOARD<br />
A. Install protection board with butted joints over sheet waterproofing immediately after installation.<br />
Comply with waterproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching<br />
protection board.<br />
3.05 PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect waterproofing and protection board from damage during remainder of construction<br />
period.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING<br />
07100 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
SECTION 07160 – BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING<br />
A. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing.<br />
B. Protection board.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 03300 – Cast-in-place Concrete.<br />
B. Section 04810 – Unit Masonry Assemblies.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):<br />
1. ASTM C 272: Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural.<br />
2. ASTM D 1227: Specification for Emulsified Asphalt used as a Protective Coating for<br />
Roofing.<br />
3. ASTM D 1621: Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.<br />
4. ASTM D 1668: Specification for Glass Fabrics (Woven and Treated) for Roofing and<br />
Waterproofing.<br />
B. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA):<br />
1. Waterproofing Manual.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Product Data: Include recommendations for method of application, primer, number of coats,<br />
coverage or thickness and reinforcing. Submit manufacturer’s technical bulletins and MSDS.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source<br />
from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of<br />
primary materials.<br />
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather<br />
conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written<br />
instructions.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Dampproofing:<br />
1. BASF Building Systems.<br />
2. Karnak Corporation.<br />
3. W.R. Meadows, Inc.<br />
4. Tamms Industries, Inc.<br />
04-27-11 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING<br />
07160 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.02 COLD-APPLIED, EMULSIFIED ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING<br />
A. (Dampproofing) Emulsified Bituminous Dampproofing: Non-fibered, water-based, non-sag<br />
asphaltic coating designed for spray application on damp substrate and conforming to ASTM D<br />
1227, Type III, Class 1.<br />
1. BASF: Hydrocide 600.<br />
2. W.R. Meadows: Sealmastic Emulsion Type I – Spray Grade.<br />
3. Karnak Corporation: 100AF Non-Fibered Emulsion Dampproofing.<br />
4. Tamms: Dehydratine 75.<br />
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as<br />
recommended by manufacturer.<br />
B. Fiber Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I.<br />
1. Karnak Corporation: No. 31 Fiberglass Membrane.<br />
2. Sonoshield Reinforcing Fabric by BASF Building Systems.<br />
3. Comparable products from other manufacturers complying with specified requirements.<br />
C. Patching Compound: Fibered mastic of type recommended by dampproofing manufacturer.<br />
D. Protection Board: Fan folded, with a core of extruded-polystyrene board insulation faced one<br />
or both sides with plastic film, nominal thickness 1/4 inch, with compressive strength of not less<br />
than 8 psi per ASTM D 1621, and maximum water absorption by volume of 0.6 percent per<br />
ASTM C 272.<br />
1. Owens Corning's "Fanfold DWB.<br />
2. Dow Chemical Company's "Protection Board III.<br />
3. Comparable products from other manufacturers.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface<br />
smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work.<br />
1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating<br />
work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being<br />
stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering<br />
and clogging weep holes and drains.<br />
B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and<br />
apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer.<br />
C. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other<br />
imperfections.<br />
3.03 APPLICATION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are<br />
indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing.<br />
1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve coverage<br />
indicated.<br />
2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats.<br />
3. Allow 24 hours drying time prior to backfilling or coverage by other materials.<br />
04-27-11 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING<br />
07160 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. Locations:<br />
1. Foundation Walls: Apply dampproofing to foundation walls where opposite side of wall<br />
faces building interior and other locations indicated on drawings.<br />
a. Apply from finished grade line to 16 inches below building floor line.<br />
b. Extend 12 inches onto intersecting surfaces, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed<br />
to view when Project is completed.<br />
c. Install fiber glass fabric stripping at internal and external corners, changes in plane,<br />
construction joints, cracks, by embedding an 8 inch wide strip of fiber glass fabric in a<br />
heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to<br />
other coats required.<br />
d. Coverage Rate: Apply 2 spray coats at not less than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. for first coat<br />
and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat.<br />
2. Cavity Walls: Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior<br />
face of back-up surface on masonry and concrete cavity walls.<br />
a. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties,<br />
and other items that penetrate applied surface.<br />
b. Coverage rate: Apply 1 spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft.<br />
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION BOARD<br />
A. Install protection board over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing<br />
material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection board.<br />
1. Support protection board with spot application of adhesive of type recommended by<br />
protection board manufacturer over cured coating.<br />
3.05 CLEANING<br />
A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING<br />
07160 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 07212 - BOARD AND BATT INSULATION<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Batt insulation in exterior wall construction.<br />
B. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces, crevices in exterior wall and<br />
roof, and roof and miscellaneous stud spaces.<br />
C. Batt insulation for acoustic insulation in interior partitions.<br />
D. Board Insulation at roof.<br />
E. Board Insulation for exterior foundations.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Supporting construction for batt insulation.<br />
B. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry.<br />
C. Section 07260 – Air and Vapor Barriers.<br />
D. Section 07535 - Mechanically Attached Membrane Roofing.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. ASTM C 665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light<br />
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.<br />
B. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At<br />
750 Degrees C.<br />
C. ASTM C 578 – Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.<br />
D. ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal<br />
Insulation Board.<br />
E. ASTM D 1621 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties Of Rigid Cellular Plastics.<br />
F. ASTM D 1622 - Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics.<br />
G. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single<br />
manufacturer.<br />
B. Verify that polyisocyanurate roof insulation is acceptable with roof membrane manufacturer.<br />
Refer to Section 07535.<br />
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,<br />
and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written<br />
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.<br />
03/09/10 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION<br />
07212 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS<br />
A. (INSUL1) Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; preformed mineral fiber batt; friction fit, conforming to<br />
the following:<br />
1. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136, except for<br />
facing, if any.<br />
2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings for wall thickness.<br />
3. Facing: Unfaced.<br />
4. Manufacturers:<br />
a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com<br />
b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com<br />
c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com<br />
5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.<br />
2.02 BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS<br />
A. (INSUL2): Under Slab and Foundation Insulation: Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation, 2”<br />
inch thick, unless noted otherwise, ASTM C 578, Type IV, 30 psi minimum compressive<br />
strength, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., with a flame-spread of 5 and smoke-developed indexes of 45-75:<br />
1. Manufacturers:<br />
a. Diversifoam Products: Certifoam.<br />
b. Dow Chemical: Styrofoam.<br />
c. Owens Corning: Foamular LT30.<br />
B. (INSUL3): Roof Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board to ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class I, Grade<br />
2; rigid, closed cell type, with specially formulated organic/inorganic facers.<br />
1. Long Term Thermal Resistance (ASTM C518): R=6.0 per 1 inch of thickness.<br />
2. Board Size: 48”x48” and 48”x96”.<br />
3. Nominal Product Thickness: 4 inches unless noted otherwise.<br />
4. Compressive Strength (ASTM D1621): minimum 20 psi.<br />
5. Density (ASTM D1622): 2 pcf.<br />
6. Edges: Square.<br />
7. Dimensional Stability: less than 2 percent linear change.<br />
8. Flame Spread (ASTM E84): 25.<br />
9. Provide tapered insulation boards and thicknesses to create tapered areas as indicated on<br />
Roof Plan.<br />
10. Manufacturers and Products:<br />
a. Johns Manville: Enrgy 3 Roof Insulation Board. www.jm.com<br />
b. GAF Materials Corporation: EnergyGuard Roof Insulation Board. www.gaf.com<br />
c. Firestone Building Products: ISO 95+. www.firestonebpco.com<br />
d. Comparable products from other roofing insulation manufacturers that meet or exceed<br />
the specified requirements and are acceptable to the roof membrane manufacturer.<br />
C. Mechanical Fasteners: Screw type, 6 ga. diameter, self-tapping, galvanized steel, sufficient<br />
length to secure anchor system into place and to withstand all super-imposed loads: complete<br />
with 1 1/2 inch diameter 14 ga. thick galvanized steel discs.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and compatible.<br />
B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, sound, free of honeycomb, oil, grease, fins, or other<br />
irregularities.<br />
03/09/10 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION<br />
07212 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.02 DELIVERY AND STORAGE<br />
A. Deliver in original unopened packages and store in enclosed shelter; protect from damage and<br />
exposure to direct sunlight. Remove damaged or deteriorated materials from premises.<br />
3.03 BATT INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.<br />
C. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services<br />
within the plane of the insulation.<br />
3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION<br />
A. Insulate interior face of exterior concrete foundation, including returns under floor slab as<br />
indicated on the drawings. Provide complete insulation membrane around entire building<br />
whether specifically indicated or not.<br />
B. Mechanically fasten insulation boards to substrate at NRCA, UL or FM required spacing,<br />
whichever is more stringent.<br />
C. Apply insulation boards parallel to roof perimeter edges.<br />
D. Lay second layer of insulation with joints staggered from first layer<br />
E. Lay insulation boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly<br />
to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof.<br />
F. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day.<br />
G. Keep insulation a minimum of 3 inches from heat emitting devices, and a minimum 2 inches<br />
from sidewalls.<br />
H. Install after building embankment and granular cushion have been completed and vapor<br />
retarder is in place. Lay insulation in place, edges closely pressed together, against inside face<br />
of foundation beam excavation; returned under floor slab as shown on the drawings. Pour<br />
concrete to cover insulation.<br />
3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK<br />
A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.<br />
3.06 CLEAN-UP<br />
A. Upon completion of work of this section, remove related debris from premises.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
03/09/10 BOARD AND BATT INSULATION<br />
07212 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
SECTION 07240 – EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM<br />
A. Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS), Class PB.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 01300 – Administration Requirements: for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry: for wall framing and sheathing.<br />
C. Section 07620 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.<br />
D. Section 07920 – Joint Sealants: Expansion joint and perimeter sealants.<br />
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION<br />
A. Water Drainable EIFS: A “nonload bearing, water drainage exterior wall cladding system that<br />
consists of a fluid applied water resistive coating applied over sheathing or concrete masonry,<br />
insulation board attached adhesively with notched trowel; an integrally reinforced base coat;<br />
and a textured protective finish coat,” as defined by ASTM C 1397.<br />
1.04 REFERENCES<br />
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):<br />
1. ASTM C150 – “Spec for Portland Cement”.<br />
2. ASTM C578 – “Spec for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation”.<br />
3. ASTM C 1397 – “Practice for Application of Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish<br />
Systems”.<br />
4. ASTM C 1481: Guide for Use of Joint Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems<br />
(EIFS).<br />
5. ASTM D 578-00: Specification for Glass Fiber Strands.<br />
6. ASTM D 1784-03: Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and<br />
Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.<br />
7. ASTM D 3273: Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior<br />
Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.<br />
8. ASTM D 3274: Test Method for Evaluating Degree of Surface Disfigurement of Paint Films<br />
by Microbial (Fungal or Algal) Growth or Soil and Dirt Accumulation.<br />
9. ASTM E84 – “Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.”<br />
B. EIFS Industry Members Association (EIMA) Standards:<br />
1. EIMA101.01 – Standard Test Method for Freeze-Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation<br />
and Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB (Modified ASTM C67).<br />
2. EIMA 101.02 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Water Penetration of Exterior<br />
Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB, (Modified ASTM E 331).<br />
3. EIMA 101.03 – Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Strength of an<br />
Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS), and Components, Class PB (Modified ASTM<br />
C297).<br />
4. EIMA 101.86 – Standard Test Method for Resistance of Exterior Insulation and Finish<br />
Systems (EIFS), Class PB, to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact).<br />
5. EIMA 105.01 – Standard Test Method for Alkali Resistance of Glass Fiber Reinforcing<br />
Mesh for use in Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB.<br />
6. EIMA 300.01 – Standard Test Method for Determining Tensile Adhesion Properties of<br />
Sealants when used with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB.<br />
7. EIMA- Class PB Details - Exterior Insulation and Finish System Class PB Details.<br />
8. EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board.<br />
12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM<br />
07240 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
C. ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES):<br />
1. ICC-ES AC12: Interim Criteria for Foam Plastic Insulation.<br />
2. ICC-ES AC24: Interim Criteria for Exterior Insulation and Finish System.<br />
3. ICC-ES AC219: Acceptance Criteria for Exterior Insulation and Finish System.<br />
1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. EIFS Performance: Provide a system to comply with the following:<br />
1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and<br />
supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other<br />
in-service conditions.<br />
2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into water-drainage EIFS<br />
and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in<br />
deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and<br />
assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish,<br />
and including a means that allows water entering into an EIFS assembly to drain to the<br />
exterior.<br />
B. Class PB EIFS: Provide EIFS having physical properties and structural performance that<br />
comply with the following:<br />
1. Abrasion Resistance: No cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity when tested per<br />
ASTM D 968, Method A.<br />
2. Absorption - Freeze Resistance: No visible deleterious effects and negligible weight loss<br />
after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01.<br />
3. Accelerated Weathering: Five samples per ICC-ES AC219 showing no cracking, checking,<br />
crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, delamination per ASTM G 153.<br />
4. Freeze -Thaw: No surface changes, cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting,<br />
blistering, peeling, or delamination per ICC-ES AC219.<br />
5. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: No growth when tested per ASTM D 3273 and<br />
evaluated according to ASTM D 3274.<br />
6. Salt-Spray Resistance: No deleterious affects when tested according to ICC-ES AC219.<br />
7. Tensile Adhesion: No failure in EIFS, adhesive, base coat, or finish coat when tested per<br />
EIMA 101.03.<br />
8. Water Penetration: No water penetration into the plane of the base coat to expandedpolystyrene<br />
board interface per EIMA 101.02.<br />
9. Water Resistance: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or<br />
delamination after testing for 14 days per ASTM D 2247.<br />
10. Wind-Driven-Rain Resistance: When applicable with stud framed wall substrates; resist<br />
wind-driven rain according to ICC-ES AC219.<br />
11. Impact Resistance: Tested per EIMA 101.86; and meeting or exceeding the following:<br />
12. Standard Impact Resistance: 25 to 49 inch-lb.<br />
13. High Impact Resistance: 90 to 150 inch-lb.<br />
14. Drainage: According to ICC-ES AC235.<br />
15. Structural Performance Testing: EIFS assembly and components to comply with ICC-<br />
ES AC219 when tested per ASTM E 330.<br />
1.06 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Installer’s Certification:<br />
1. List of at least 3 successfully completed EIFS projects of similar complexity, completed<br />
within the last 2 years.<br />
2. Installer’s approved and current Applicator’s Certificate.<br />
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer, certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install<br />
manufacturer's system using trained workers.<br />
12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM<br />
07240 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from<br />
sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components.<br />
C. Fire Test Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following<br />
fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system<br />
components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency<br />
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of<br />
applicable testing agency.<br />
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and<br />
finish coats with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 450 or<br />
less, per ASTM E 84.<br />
2. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to NFPA 268.<br />
3. Potential Heat: Acceptable level when tested according to NFPA 259.<br />
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver products to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packaging with labels<br />
intact clearly identifying products.<br />
B. Inspect products for damage and notify manufacturer of any discrepancies. Do not use<br />
damaged or unsatisfactory materials.<br />
C. Store materials inside under cover protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface<br />
contamination, aging, damaging temperatures, construction traffic and other causes.<br />
1. Do not store at less than 40 deg. F.<br />
2. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground.<br />
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Weather Limitations: Comply with exterior insulation finish system manufacturer’s requirements<br />
for temperatures and environmental conditions before during and after application.<br />
1. Do not apply EIFS system unless the ambient temperature is above 40 deg. F and rising at<br />
the time of installation and remains so for 24 hours following installation.<br />
2. Do not apply EIFS system materials to substrates whose temperature is below 40 deg. F.<br />
3. Do not apply EIFS system during inclement weather unless appropriate protection is<br />
employed.<br />
1.10 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall<br />
assemblies, including sheathing, flashing, trim, joint sealants, aluminum framing systems, and<br />
doors, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, corrosion, moisture, and other<br />
causes. Do not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and barrier coating of EIFS.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and System:<br />
1. Dryvit System Inc.: (Outsulation MD System).<br />
2. Senergy, Inc.: (Senerflex Channeled Adhesive System).<br />
3. STO Corporation.: (StoTherm Essence Next).<br />
4. Parex Inc.: (Standard Water Master System).<br />
2.02 MATERIALS<br />
A. Compatibility: Provide water-resistive coating, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing<br />
meshes, base- and finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one<br />
another and with substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project.<br />
12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM<br />
07240 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use<br />
as water/weather-resistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and<br />
performance criteria of ICC-ES AC212.<br />
1. Sheathing Joint Tape: Type recommended by EIFS manufacturer for sealing joints<br />
between and penetrations through sheathing.<br />
C. Drainage Strip/Track: Manufacturer’s standard PVC track or strip to provide drainage of system.<br />
Coordinate component selected with specific details indicated on Drawings.<br />
D. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use,<br />
compatible with substrate, and complying with the following:<br />
1. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and fillers<br />
specified for base coat.<br />
E. Insulation Board: Molded, rigid cellular polystyrene insulation board complying with<br />
ASTM C 578, Type I; EIFS manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline<br />
Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for most stringent requirements<br />
for material performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible<br />
variations, and the following:<br />
1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less<br />
than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results.<br />
2. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, per<br />
ASTM E 84.<br />
3. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards in thickness indicated, but not more than 4 inches<br />
thick or less than thickness allowed by ASTM C 1397.<br />
4. Foam Shapes: Provide with profiles and dimensions indicated on Drawings.<br />
F. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for<br />
compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multi-end strands with retained<br />
mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. per EIMA 105.01; complying with ASTM D 578<br />
and the following requirements for minimum weight:<br />
1. Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd.<br />
2. High-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 15 oz./sq. yd.<br />
3. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd.<br />
4. Corner Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz./sq. yd.<br />
G. Base Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following:<br />
1. Formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or natural color;<br />
and manufacturer's standard 100% acrylic adhesive designed for use with portland<br />
cement.<br />
2. Materials to be shipped pre-measured for job-site mixing.<br />
H. Tinted Base-Coat Primer (provide if required by manufacturer): EIFS manufacturer's standard<br />
100% acrylic primer for preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat.<br />
1. Note: Primer to be tinted to closely match Finish Coat including custom colors.<br />
I. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard 100% acrylic-based coating complying<br />
with the following:<br />
1. Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound<br />
stone particles, and fillers.<br />
2. Refer to EIFS Schedule at end of this Section for finish coat color and texture.<br />
J. Mildew Resistant Finish Additive: EIFS manufacturer's standard mildew resistance additive for<br />
the EIFS system finish coat.<br />
Dryvit: “PMR Finish”.<br />
Comparable products from other specified EIFS manufacturers.<br />
K. Water: Potable.<br />
12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM<br />
07240 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
L. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply<br />
with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and<br />
complying with ASTM D 1784.<br />
M. Sealant: Sealant and joint backing materials as specified under Section 07900 – Joint Sealers,<br />
(SLNT7), and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in ASTM C 1481.<br />
1. Sealant Color: To match EIFS topcoat color.<br />
2.03 MIXING<br />
A. General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials.<br />
1. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS<br />
manufacturer.<br />
2. Mix materials in clean containers.<br />
3. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS.<br />
B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other<br />
construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry.<br />
2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS.<br />
Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish<br />
coats on other work.<br />
B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during<br />
installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deterioration of<br />
substrates.<br />
C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain<br />
optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.<br />
1. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Provide clean, dry, neutral-pH substrate for insulation<br />
installation. Verify suitability of substrate by performing bond and moisture tests<br />
recommended by EIFS manufacturer.<br />
3.03 EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS<br />
as applicable to each type of substrate indicated.<br />
3.04 SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION<br />
A. Water-Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to<br />
provide water-/weather-resistive barrier.<br />
1. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners of<br />
sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Flexible-Membrane Flashing: Install over sheathing, applied and lapped to shed water; seal at<br />
openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written<br />
instructions to protect wall assembly from degradation. Prime substrates, if required, and install<br />
flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions and details.<br />
12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM<br />
07240 -5
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.05 TRIM INSTALLATION<br />
A. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, at window sills, and<br />
elsewhere as indicated, according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with<br />
installation of insulation.<br />
1. Weep Screed/Track: Use at bottom termination edges, at window and door heads of waterdrainage<br />
EIFS unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Window Sill Flashing: Use at windows unless otherwise indicated.<br />
3. Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings.<br />
4. Casing Bead: Use at other locations.<br />
3.06 INSULATION INSTALLATION<br />
A. Mesh Backwrap at Edge Conditions: Prior to installing insulation and before applying reinforcing<br />
mesh, fully wrap board edges with detail reinforcing mesh. Cover edges of board and extend<br />
encapsulating mesh not less than 2 inches over front, edge and back face of board as indicated<br />
on Drawings.<br />
1. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows:<br />
a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat,<br />
reinforcing mesh, and finish coat.<br />
b. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between EIFS<br />
and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh.<br />
B. Board Insulation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397,<br />
EIFS manufacturer's written application instructions, and the following:<br />
1. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched-trowel method in a manner that results in coating<br />
the entire surface of sheathing with adhesive once insulation is adhered to sheathing.<br />
a. NOTE: Apply the adhesive so that the ribbons run vertically when the insulation board<br />
is placed on the wall.<br />
2. Press and slide insulation into place. Apply pressure over the entire surface of insulation<br />
to accomplish uniform contact, high initial grab, and overall level surface.<br />
3. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for period recommended by EIFS<br />
manufacturer, but not less than 24 hours, before beginning rasping and sanding insulation,<br />
or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh.<br />
4. Apply insulation over dry substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented<br />
horizontally.<br />
5. Begin first course of insulation from a level base line and work upward.<br />
6. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running bond<br />
pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches wide or 6 inches<br />
high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches from corners of window and door openings and<br />
not less than 4 inches from aesthetic reveals.<br />
a. Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches from horizontal<br />
and 4 inches from vertical joints in sheathing.<br />
7. Place insulation with adhesive channels aligned in the vertical position for drainage. Align<br />
drainage channels in insulation boards above and below.<br />
8. Interlock ends at internal and external corners.<br />
9. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush,<br />
continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps greater<br />
than 1/16 inch occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using<br />
adhesive or other material.<br />
10. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and<br />
shapes complying with details indicated.<br />
11. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than<br />
1/16 inch from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do<br />
not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch.<br />
12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM<br />
07240 -6
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
12. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured<br />
to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and locations<br />
indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at aesthetic reveals to less than 3/4 inch.<br />
13. Install foam shapes and attach to sheathing or structure.<br />
14. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated.<br />
15. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and<br />
between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to<br />
produce joint widths indicated on Drawings after encapsulating joint substrates with base<br />
coat and reinforcing mesh.<br />
16. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not<br />
allow water to penetrate behind flashing and EIFS protective-coating.<br />
C. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as<br />
follows:<br />
1. At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS.<br />
2. Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other EIFS.<br />
3. At floor lines in multilevel framed construction.<br />
4. Where wall height or building shape changes.<br />
5. Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous elevations.<br />
3.06 BASE COAT INSTALLATION<br />
A. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of concrete, insulation and foam shapes, as applicable,<br />
in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-<br />
inch dry-coat thickness.<br />
B. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free<br />
installation with mesh continuous at corners and overlapped not less than 2 inches or otherwise<br />
treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Do<br />
not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying<br />
additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible.<br />
C. Install reinforcing mesh types where recommended by the manufacturer and as follows:<br />
1. Standard Mesh: Wall areas subject to normal impact and flat walls or walls with moderate<br />
contours.<br />
2. High Impact Mesh: Wall areas as follows:<br />
a. Areas below 8’-0” in height or subject to touch.<br />
b. Areas where projects are located in Wind Debris Zones (120 mph or higher).<br />
c. Where specifically indicated on Drawings.<br />
3. Detail Mesh: Used over special shapes and irregular detail work, at the base of a wall, at<br />
aesthetic and expansion/control joints, around openings and projections.<br />
4. Corner Mesh: For clean, crisp arises, outside corners, prefabricated panel edges and<br />
additional impact resistance.<br />
D. Double-Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat and<br />
second layer of reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2 inches to comply with<br />
ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions in same manner as first application.<br />
1. Do not apply until first base coat has cured.<br />
E. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings extending 4 inches<br />
beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of<br />
openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch- wide strip corner reinforcing mesh at both inside<br />
and outside building corners.<br />
1. At aesthetic reveals, apply strip detail reinforcing mesh not less than 8 inches wide.<br />
2. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh.<br />
F. Foam Shapes: Fully embed detail reinforcing mesh in base coat.<br />
12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM<br />
07240 -7
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
G. Double Base-Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and<br />
thickness as first application except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat<br />
has cured.<br />
3.07 FINISH COAT INSTALLATION<br />
A. Primer: Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform<br />
appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color<br />
and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture<br />
variations.<br />
1. Refer to EIFS Schedule at end of this Section for finish coat color and texture.<br />
3.08 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS<br />
A. Sealant and installation of sealant as specified under Section 07900.<br />
1. Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat.<br />
3.09 FINAL INSPECTION/REVIEW<br />
A. General: Conduct inspections, and make repairs or replace unsatisfactory EIFS panels as<br />
required. Completed work exposed to view, to be uniform in texture and color without defects.<br />
B. Additional Requirements: in addition to above, in-place EIFS panels may be rejected for any<br />
one of the following:<br />
1. Exceeding specified installation tolerances.<br />
2. Damaged during construction operations.<br />
3. Exposed-to-view surfaces which develop surface finish deficiencies.<br />
4. Exposed-to-view color and/or texture of surfaces which does not match other surfaces,<br />
adjacent or remote.<br />
5. Exposed-to-view color and texture of surfaces which does not match approved samples<br />
and/or approved mock-up sample.<br />
3.12 EIFS SCHEDULE<br />
A. Finishes for this project are not <strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong> Prototype. Refer to Exterior Finishes<br />
Schedule Drawing Sheets A100 & A101 for EIFS Key Note Locations.<br />
B. Colors and Textures indicated are those of Dryvit Systems, Inc. Provide comparable colors and<br />
textures from other specified manufacturers with approved samples.<br />
3.13 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials<br />
from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS<br />
coatings.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
12/28/10 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM<br />
07240 -8
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 07260 - AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Air Barriers: Materials to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints between exterior<br />
walls and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: for vapor retarder under slab.<br />
B. Section 07212 - Board and Batt Insulation.<br />
C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and installation techniques.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. ASTM E 96/E 96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.<br />
B. ASTM E 1677 - Specification for an Air Retarder (AR) Material or System for Low-Rise Framed<br />
Building Walls.<br />
C. AATCC – American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists.<br />
1. Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Vapor Permeability (Perm): Measure in accordance with ASTM E 96 Procedure E.<br />
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before,<br />
during and after installation.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MATERIALS<br />
A. Air Barrier: Spunbonded olefin, nonwoven, non-perforated:<br />
1. Tyvek(R) Water Resistant Barrier, Manufactured by DuPont Company, Wilmington, DE.<br />
a. Classification: ASTM E 1677, Type I; air leakage at 25 mph wind pressure less than<br />
0.06 cubic feet per minute per square foot.<br />
b. Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms ASTM E 96, Method B.<br />
c. Water Penetration Resistance: Minimum 78.7 inches per AATCC Test Method 127.<br />
2. Sealing Tape: DuPont Tyvek Tape.<br />
04-27-11 AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS<br />
07260 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.<br />
3.02 AIR BARRIER INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Install air barrier materials and assemblies in conjunction with materials described in other<br />
sections to provide continuous sealed barrier in the exterior enclosure of the building.<br />
C. Over exterior surface of sheathing, behind facing brick, install sheet with fasteners as<br />
recommended by sheet manufacturer.<br />
1. Note: Do not install air barrier over sheathing in areas that receive EIFS. In EIFS areas, a<br />
liquid water resistive barrier will be installed over sheathing as part of EIFS system. Refer<br />
to Section 07240.<br />
D. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.<br />
E. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 AIR AND VAPOR BARRIERS<br />
07260 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
SECTION 07411 - PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS<br />
A. Standing Seam Metal Roofing and Wall System.<br />
B. Accessories and miscellaneous components.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Roof framing and purlins.<br />
B. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing.<br />
C. Section 07212 – Board and Batt Insulation: Board insulation under roof system.<br />
D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Field-installed sealants.<br />
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION<br />
A. Standing Seam Roof System: Standing seam metal roof system applied over # 30 roof felt over<br />
1” polyisocyanurate board insulation on 5/8” roof sheathing on metal roof deck.<br />
B. Standing Seam Canopy End Panel System: Standing seam metal roof system applied vertically<br />
over # 30 roof felt on 5/8” plywood sheathing for canopy end panels.<br />
1.04 REFERENCES<br />
A. AAMA 621: Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated<br />
Architectural Hot Dipped Galvanized (HDG) and Zinc-Aluminum Coated Steel Substrates.<br />
B. ASTM D 226: Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and<br />
Waterproofing.<br />
C. ASTM A 653/A 653M: Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron<br />
Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.<br />
D. UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.<br />
1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Performance Requirements: Provide complete engineered system complying with specified<br />
requirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movement<br />
of substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system.<br />
B. Wind Uplift: System to comply with requirements for UL Classification 580 for UL classified 90<br />
rated assemblies.<br />
1.06 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions,<br />
spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayment, and special conditions.<br />
1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled.<br />
C. Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been<br />
completed in Owner's name and are registered with manufacturer.<br />
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing systems<br />
similar to those required for this project, with not less than 5 years of documented experience.<br />
04-27-11 PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS<br />
07411 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to<br />
panels prior to installation.<br />
1.09 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate sheet metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of<br />
sheathing, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a watertight, secure, and<br />
noncorrosive installation.<br />
1.10 WARRANTY<br />
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.<br />
B. Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s special warranty covering failure of factory-applied<br />
exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence<br />
of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified<br />
warranty period of 20 year period from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
C. Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s warranty for weathertightness of roofing<br />
system, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water within<br />
specified warranty period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:<br />
1. Architectural Building Components: www.archmetalroof.com. Permaseam Roofing<br />
System.<br />
2. Petersen Aluminum Corporation: www.pac-clad.com. Snap Clad Roofing Panels.<br />
2.02 METAL PANELS<br />
A. Panel Material: G-90 galvanized steel sheet in compliance with ASTM A653.<br />
1. Gauge: 24 gauge.<br />
2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum 1-3/4” inch seam height; concealed fastener system<br />
for field snap lock type installation.<br />
3. Texture: Smooth, not embossed.<br />
4. Length: Maximum possible length to minimize lapped joints.<br />
5. Width: 12 inch wide panels.<br />
6. Finish: 70% polyvinylidene flouride resin type “Kynar 500” or equivalent, AAMA 621.<br />
a. Color: Matte Black.<br />
2.03 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM<br />
A. Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard concealed anchor clips designed for<br />
specific roofing system and engineered to meet performance requirements, including<br />
anticipated thermal movement.<br />
1. Note: Roof system manufacturer to provide extended panel clips or bearing plates to<br />
accommodate the 1” thick roof insulation and to allow direct fastening of system to plywood<br />
substrate.<br />
2.04 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS<br />
A. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, trim, moldings, closure strips, and other<br />
exposed components of the same material, thickness, and finish as used for the roofing panels.<br />
Items completely concealed after installation may optionally be made of stainless or galvanized<br />
steel.<br />
B. Fasteners: Hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel, furnished by metal panel manufacturer for<br />
specific substrate.<br />
04-27-11 PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS<br />
07411 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
C. Roofing Felt: Type 30, asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated, conforming to ASTM D226.<br />
D. Roof Insulation: 1” thick, polyisocyanurate insulation board as specified under Section 07212 for<br />
mechanical installation to plywood substrate.<br />
E. Sealants: As specified under Section 07900.<br />
1. Exposed sealant must cure to rubber-like consistency.<br />
2. Concealed sealant must be non-hardening type.<br />
2.05 FABRICATION<br />
A. Panels: Fabricate panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer’s standard<br />
processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of<br />
the Work.<br />
1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or<br />
blocking, that tops of fasteners are flush with surface, and that installation is within flatness<br />
tolerances required for finished roofing installation.<br />
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely<br />
anchored, and that provision has been made for drainage, flashings, and penetrations<br />
through sheet metal roofing.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other<br />
adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks.<br />
B. Remove protective film from surface of roof panels immediately prior to installation. Strip film<br />
carefully, to avoid damage to prefinished surfaces.<br />
C. Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt<br />
sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer.<br />
D. Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal<br />
joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel<br />
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions.<br />
Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and<br />
structural movement.<br />
B. Standing Seam Roof System:<br />
1. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and<br />
application indicated.<br />
2. Install roofing system clips and bearing plates to plywood substrate with approved<br />
fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to allow for thickness of<br />
insulations board.<br />
3. Mechanically fasten insulation board to plywood substrate with anchors and washers as<br />
recommended by insulation manufacturer with edges butted tightly in both directions.<br />
Anchor clips should protrude through insulation joints for anchoring of roof panels.<br />
04-27-11 PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS<br />
07411 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
4. Roofing Felt: Install felt underlayment over insulation board under sheet metal roofing.<br />
Use adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under<br />
sheet metal roofing. Apply over entire roof surface, in shingle fashion to shed water, with<br />
lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.<br />
5. Install roof flashing, trim and moldings securely to substrate. Seal joints and laps in<br />
components for water tight seal. Install metal flashing to lap over sheet metal roofing to<br />
allow moisture to run over and off the material.<br />
6. Install roof panels securely in place in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions<br />
with provisions for thermal and structural movement.<br />
C. Standing Seam Canopy End Panel System:<br />
1. Install roofing system clips and bearing plates to plywood substrate with approved<br />
fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.<br />
2. Roofing Felt: Install felt underlayment over plywood substrate under sheet metal roofing.<br />
Use adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under<br />
sheet metal roofing. Apply over entire vertical surface, in shingle fashion to shed water,<br />
with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.<br />
3. Install roof flashing, trim and moldings securely to substrate. Seal joints and laps in<br />
components for water tight seal. Install metal flashing to lap over sheet metal roofing to<br />
allow moisture to run over and off the material.<br />
4. Install roof panels securely in place in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions<br />
with provisions for thermal and structural movement.<br />
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films,<br />
excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and<br />
unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish.<br />
B. Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary<br />
walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until<br />
completion of project.<br />
C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before date of Substantial<br />
Completion.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 PREFORMED METAL ROOF PANELS<br />
07411 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
SECTION 07424 - ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM<br />
A. Aluminum composite panels including related flashing and accessory components.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry: Canopy framing and sheathing.<br />
B. Section 07260 – Air Barriers.<br />
C. Section 07620 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.<br />
D. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers.<br />
D. Section 08310 – Access Doors and Panels: for access panel in entry soffit.<br />
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION<br />
A. System: Preformed and prefinished aluminum composite panel system with sub-girt<br />
framing/anchorage, clip angles fasteners and other accessories for secure anchorage to<br />
structural subframe installed using a rout and return wet joint system.<br />
1.04 REFERENCES<br />
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):<br />
1. ASTM B 209: Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.<br />
2. ASTM C 920: Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.<br />
3. ASTM D 2244: Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally<br />
Measured Color Coordinates.<br />
4. ASTM D 4214: Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films.<br />
B. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA):<br />
1. AAMA 620: Voluntary Specification High Performance Organic Coatings on Coil Coated<br />
Architectural Aluminum.<br />
C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).<br />
1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer: Minimum 5 years of continuous experience manufacturing composite panels of<br />
the type specified, and capable of providing a list of 5 projects of comparable size.<br />
B. Fabricator/Installer: Certified by panel manufacturer, minimum 5 years of continuous experience<br />
fabricating and installing composite panels of the type specified.<br />
C. Take field measurements prior to completion of shop fabricate and finishing.<br />
1.06 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material<br />
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of<br />
composite panel and accessory.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate fabrication and installation layouts of composite panels; details of edge<br />
conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings,<br />
closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish among factory, shop, and fieldassembled<br />
work.<br />
C. Warranties: Samples of special warranties.<br />
04-27-11 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM<br />
07424 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store and handle panels according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Deliver, composite panels, and other manufactured components so as not to be damaged or<br />
deformed. Package composite panels for protection during transportation and handling.<br />
C. Unload, store, and erect composite panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,<br />
and surface damage.<br />
D. Store metal-faced composite panels vertically, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated<br />
covering. Store composite panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water.<br />
Do not store composite panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting,<br />
or other surface damage. Do not allow storage space to exceed 120 deg F.<br />
E. Retain strippable protective covering on composite panel for period of panel installation.<br />
F. Protect installed panels from damage. Replace any panels damaged during storage and<br />
construction.<br />
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather<br />
conditions permit assembly of composite panels to be performed according to manufacturer's<br />
written instructions and warranty requirements.<br />
B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by<br />
field measurements before composite panel fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop<br />
Drawings.<br />
1.09 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate composite panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction<br />
of studs, soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a watertight, secure, and noncorrosive<br />
installation.<br />
1.10 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace components of composite panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within<br />
specified warranty period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Structural failures, including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.<br />
b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.<br />
2. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer<br />
agrees to repair finish or replace composite panels that show evidence of deterioration of<br />
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.<br />
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.<br />
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.<br />
2. Finish Warranty Period: Twenty (20) years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
04-27-11 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM<br />
07424 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:<br />
1. Alcoa Architectural Products: Reynobond ACM. www.alcoaarchitecturalproducts.com<br />
2. Firestone Metal Products: Una-clad Series 1000UC Aluminum Composite Panel System.<br />
www.unaclad.com<br />
3. Mitsubishi Plastics Composites, Inc.: Alpolic Composite Metal Panels.<br />
www.alpolic-usa.com<br />
2.02 MATERIALS<br />
A. Aluminum Sheet: Coil-coated sheet, ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer, with<br />
temper as required to suit forming operations and structural performance required.<br />
1. Surface: Smooth, flat finish.<br />
2. Exposed Coil-Coated Finishes:<br />
a. Metallic Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. 3-coat fluoropolymer finish with suspended<br />
metallic flakes containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color<br />
coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pre-treat, and apply coating to exposed metal<br />
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.<br />
3. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored<br />
acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum<br />
total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.<br />
B. Panel Sealants:<br />
1. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use<br />
classifications required to seal joints in composite panels and remain weathertight; and as<br />
recommended in writing by panel manufacturer.<br />
a. Sealant Color: Color to match panel color.<br />
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FRAMING<br />
A. Panel System Subgrits: Provide galvanized steel of gauge and spacing required for panel<br />
system structural requirements, as recommended by panel manufacture and in accordance with<br />
approved shop drawings. To avoid galvanic reaction, separate dissimilar metals.<br />
B. Fasteners for Miscellaneous Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance,<br />
holding power, and other properties required to fasten miscellaneous metal framing members to<br />
substrates.<br />
2.04 COMPOSITE PANELS<br />
A. General: Provide factory-formed and assembled, aluminum faced composite panels fabricated<br />
from two metal facings bonded, using no glues or adhesives, to solid, extruded thermoplastic<br />
core; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment system<br />
components and accessories required for weathertight system.<br />
B. Aluminum Composite Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch thick, coil-coated aluminum sheet<br />
facings.<br />
1. Panel Thickness: 4 mm.<br />
2. Core: Standard.<br />
3. Exterior Finish: 3-coat Metallic fluoropolymer.<br />
4. Color: Una-Clad “Silver Metallic”.<br />
a. Comparable color from the other specified composite panel manufacturer’s with color<br />
samples approved by Architect.<br />
04-27-11 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM<br />
07424 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete composite panel<br />
assembly including trim, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar<br />
items. Match material and finish of composite panels for exposed items.<br />
B. Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded studs, and<br />
other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads.<br />
C. Flashing: Aluminum, same finish as for aluminum panel where exposed; secured with<br />
concealed fastening method.<br />
2.06 FABRICATION<br />
A. General: Fabricate and finish composite panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent<br />
possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes. Comply with indicated profiles<br />
and with dimensional and structural requirements.<br />
B. Metal-Faced Composite Panels: Factory form panels in a continuous process with no glues or<br />
adhesives between dissimilar materials. Trim and square edges of sheets with no displacement<br />
of face sheets or protrusion of core material.<br />
1. Form panel lines, breaks, and angles to be sharp and true, with surfaces free from warp<br />
and buckle.<br />
2. Fabricate panels with sharply cut edges, with no displacement of face sheets or protrusion<br />
of core material.<br />
3. Fabricate panels with panel stiffeners, as required to comply with deflection limits, attached<br />
to back of panels with structural silicone sealant or bond tape.<br />
4. Dimensional Tolerances:<br />
a. Panel Bow: 0.8 percent maximum of panel length or width.<br />
b. Squareness: 0.25 inch (5 mm) maximum.<br />
C. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in<br />
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and<br />
other characteristics of item indicated.<br />
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,<br />
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded<br />
back to form hems.<br />
D. System Type: Rout and Return Wet Joint System.<br />
PART - 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for installation tolerances of composite panel supports, and other conditions<br />
affecting performance of the Work.<br />
1. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking<br />
and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by composite panel<br />
manufacturer.<br />
2. Verify that air barrier has been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to prevent air<br />
infiltration or water penetration.<br />
B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating composite panels to verify actual<br />
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of panels before panel installation.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
04-27-11 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM<br />
07424 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Miscellaneous Framing: Install subgirts, furring, and other miscellaneous wall panel support<br />
members and anchorage according to composite panel manufacturer's written instructions and<br />
approved Shop Drawings.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Attachment System Installation: Install attachment system required to support metal-faced<br />
composite panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including perimeter<br />
extrusions, tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels.<br />
1. Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery,<br />
and panel-system joint seals.<br />
B. Install composite panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in orientation, sizes,<br />
and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to subgirts unless otherwise<br />
indicated. Anchor panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions<br />
for thermal and structural movement.<br />
1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving composite panels.<br />
2. Flash and seal composite panels at perimeter of all openings. Do not begin installation until<br />
air barrier and flashings that will be concealed by panels are installed.<br />
3. Install flashing and trim as composite panel work proceeds.<br />
4. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating panels.<br />
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,<br />
protect against galvanic action as recommended by composite panel manufacturer.<br />
D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for<br />
weathertight performance of composite panel assemblies.<br />
1. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07900 Joint<br />
Sealers.<br />
E. Coordinate installation of composite panel system with installation of entry canopy access<br />
panel. Refer to Section 08310.<br />
3.04 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and<br />
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.<br />
1. Install components required for a complete composite panel assembly including trim,<br />
flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.<br />
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation<br />
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners<br />
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,<br />
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.<br />
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool<br />
marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form<br />
hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and<br />
weather-resistant performance.<br />
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space<br />
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner<br />
or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be<br />
sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked<br />
flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints).<br />
04-27-11 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM<br />
07424 -5
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.05 ERECTION TOLERANCES<br />
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align composite panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4<br />
inch in 20 feet, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within<br />
1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.<br />
3.06 CLEANING<br />
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as composite panels are<br />
installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On<br />
completion of installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by panel manufacturer.<br />
Maintain in a clean condition during construction.<br />
B. After composite panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt,<br />
and sealant.<br />
C. Replace composite panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful<br />
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 ALUMINUM COMPOSITE PANEL SYSTEM<br />
07424 -6
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
SECTION 07535 - MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING<br />
A. Mechanically-attached single-ply roofing, insulation and accessories, installed in accordance<br />
with drawings and specifications approved by the roofing membrane manufacturer.<br />
B. Indicated on the drawings as: Membrane Roofing System.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 05310 - Steel Deck.<br />
B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.<br />
C. Section 07212 – Board and Batt Insulation for roof insulation board.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. ASTM D 471 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Effect of Liquids.<br />
B. ASTM D 751 - Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics.<br />
C. ASTM D 1149 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Deterioration--Surface Ozone Cracking in a<br />
Chamber.<br />
D. ASTM D 1204 - Standard Test Method for Linear Dimensional Changes of Nonrigid<br />
Thermoplastic Sheeting or Film at Elevated Temperature.<br />
E. ASTM D-2136 - Standard Test Method for Coated Fabrics - Low-Temperature Bend Test.<br />
F. FM P7825 - Approval Guide; Factory Mutual Research Corporation.<br />
G. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Certification: Manufacturer's written approval of this specification and of any proposed<br />
deviations from the specification or drawings or previously approved details. The<br />
manufacturer's approval does not constitute a waiver of the requirements of this specification or<br />
the drawings or approval of deviations not specifically itemized.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Roofing contractor certified by manufacturer.<br />
1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE<br />
A. Deliver materials with packaging labels indicating appropriate warnings, storage conditions, lot<br />
numbers, and usage instructions.<br />
B. Store materials in their original undamaged packaging; maintain storage conditions in<br />
accordance with the manufacturer's requirements.<br />
1.07 WARRANTY<br />
A. See Section 01700 - Execution Requirements, for additional warranty requirements.<br />
B. Provide manufacturer's standard "Total System" material and labor, 10-year warranty.<br />
04-27-11 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING<br />
07535 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURER<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. 525 Morley Drive, Saginaw, MI 48601, 800-<br />
248-0280. www.duro-last.com<br />
2.02 ROOFING SYSTEM<br />
A. Duro-Last 5-Foot Tab, Mechanically-Attached.<br />
1. Classified by Underwriters Laboratories as a Class A roofing material for use in<br />
construction of Class A roofing assemblies.<br />
2. Meet test requirements for FM Class 1A fire and I-60 wind resistance.<br />
B. Membrane: Scrim-reinforced, thermoplastic based sheet, bearing UL label on the packaging.<br />
1. Thickness: 0.40 inch, nominal, when measured in accordance with ASTM D 751.<br />
2. Sheet Length: As required to avoid end seams.<br />
3. Color: White.<br />
4. Breaking Strength: 350 lbf, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 751, Grab Method.<br />
5. Tear strength (ASTM D 751, Procedure B), 8 x 8 inch sample: 100 lbf.<br />
6. Brittleness test (ASTM D 2136, at minus 40 deg C): Pass.<br />
7. Dimensional stability, percent change max. (ASTM D 1204 B: 1 hr at 212 deg F, W: 6 hrs<br />
at 176 deg F): Plus/minus 0.1 percent.<br />
8. Water absorption (ASTM D 471) 158 degrees F for 7 days: Plus 1.0 percent maximum<br />
weight change<br />
9. Ozone resistance of reinforced membrane: No cracking when tested in accordance with<br />
ASTM D 1149, for 70 hr at 100 degrees F.<br />
2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS<br />
A. Flashing: Same membrane as specified above.<br />
B. Bonding Adhesive:<br />
1. Contact cement to adhere membrane and flashings to various substrates e.g., insulation<br />
surfaces, masonry surfaces, plywood, concrete, or metal.<br />
2. It is not acceptable to use bonding adhesive in the seams.<br />
C. Perimeter Sheets: As specified in Part 3.<br />
D. Sealant: Use for water cut-off mastic, pitch-box sealer, and to seal membrane to metal.<br />
E. Cut-Edge Sealant: Use to seal exposed cut edges of reinforced membrane.<br />
F. Seam Cleaner: Use to remove contaminants from the surface of the membrane where hot-air<br />
welding is to occur.<br />
G. Insulation: Polyisocyanurate board that is accepted and warranted in writing by membrane<br />
manufacturer for use in a mechanically attached system. Refer to Section 07212 for<br />
requirements.<br />
1. R-Value: 30.<br />
H. Mechanical Fasteners: Type and spacing as required by roofing manufacturer; supplied by<br />
roofing manufacturer.<br />
I. Two-Way Air Vents: Manufacturer's standard vents.<br />
J. For vent stacks, pipes, drains, and corners: Prefabricated pipe boots and inside and outside<br />
corners provided by manufacturer.<br />
K. Roof Walkway Pads: Duro-Last Roof Trak II Walkway Pad. Heat weld to membrane in<br />
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
1. Color: Gray.<br />
04-27-11 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING<br />
07535 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 GENERAL<br />
A. Do not deviate from this specification without written approval of the manufacturer. Should<br />
deviations or changes occur without the manufacturer's approval, the project will not be eligible<br />
for warranty coverage.<br />
3.02 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that surfaces to be bonded to are dry, clean and free of debris. Suitable surfaces are<br />
smooth, solid masonry, wood, and metal, plus insulation board fastened to the specific<br />
manufacturer's recommendations for receiving mechanically fastened roofing membranes and<br />
accepted by roofing system manufacturer for mechanically fastened application.<br />
B. Verify that positive roof slope exists in all areas.<br />
C. Verify that rooftop mechanical units are to have their condensation lines piped to drains or off<br />
the roof.<br />
D. Verify that rooftop grease units will have approved grease containment systems or a regularly<br />
scheduled maintenance program.<br />
E. Correct unsuitable conditions before proceeding with installation. Commencing installation<br />
signifies acceptance by the installer of the substrate.<br />
3.03 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION<br />
A. Prior to the start of work, make the substrate smooth and free of debris, sharp edges, and other<br />
surface irregularities that will be detrimental to the installation.<br />
B. Correct unevenness and joint gaps greater than 1/4 inch in the membrane substrate as they can<br />
cause inconsistent membrane welds. When such conditions occur fill with appropriate and<br />
properly secured insulation or material approved by manufacturer's technical review<br />
department.<br />
C. Flashing Substrates: Verify that the substrate is smooth and free of sharp edges and other<br />
surface irregularities that will be detrimental to 100-percent adhesion of the flashing membrane.<br />
3.04 FASTENERS - GENERAL<br />
A. Install fasteners with a depth-sensing screw gun to prevent overdriving or underdriving, unless<br />
otherwise approved or required by project conditions.<br />
3.05 INSULATION INSTALLATION<br />
A. Handle and secure insulation boards so as to not damage or rupture the facer and surface. Cut<br />
out damaged areas and replace with structurally sound insulation, properly secured in place.<br />
B. Install boards with the longest dimension perpendicular to the direction of the membrane seams<br />
and with end joints staggered. Butt boards as closely as possible with no gaps over 1/4 inch.<br />
C. Mechanically attach boards:<br />
1. Use fastener pattern and spacing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
2. Provide additional fasteners as necessary to conform to the substrate surface geometry.<br />
D. Tapered Insulation: Install tapered boards under a layer of flat insulation boards; maintain<br />
smooth transition at changes of slope.<br />
1. Provide tapered insulation boards and thicknesses to create tapered areas as indicated on<br />
Roof Plan.<br />
E. Insulation must have and approved nonstyrene facer or provide a slip sheet between insulation<br />
and membrane.<br />
04-27-11 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING<br />
07535 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.06 MEMBRANE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Membrane Attachment: Space fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's standard and<br />
approved submittals.<br />
B. Perimeter Sheets: Install perimeter sheets and full-sheet in accordance with fastener pattern<br />
specified by manufacturer. Install fasteners along the edge of the membrane through the<br />
insulation, and into the roof deck.<br />
C. Field Sheets:<br />
1. Unroll membrane on the area to be covered.<br />
2. Install fasteners along the leading edge of the membrane, as illustrated in membrane<br />
manufacturer's details, through the insulation, and into the roof deck.<br />
3. Lap adjoining rolls of membrane over the fastened edge of the installed membrane by 6<br />
inches in accordance with standard details for fastener location and specific deck type<br />
penetration requirements.<br />
3.07 FASTENING PATTERNS<br />
A. Meet the requirements of the membrane manufacturer for fastener type, spacing and pattern.<br />
3.08 SEALING OF MEMBRANE<br />
A. Lap Splices: Overlap and hot-air weld membrane without any contaminants (adhesive, dirt,<br />
debris, etc.) in the seam.<br />
1. Automatic hot-air welder and hand-held welder.<br />
2. Use hand-held welders for small work and repairs.<br />
3. Use automatic hot-air welders for field seaming.<br />
4. Caulk cut edges by applying Cut-Edge Sealant from a squeeze bottle.<br />
B. Welding of Membrane After Exposure:<br />
1. Remove visible dirt and debris with a clean cloth and water. If necessary, use a detergent<br />
cleaner (e.g. Fantastik or 409) followed by a water rinse.<br />
2. With a clean scrub pad saturated with manufacturer recommended seam cleaner,<br />
aggressively agitate the seaming area.<br />
3. Follow the standard hot-air welding procedure with an approximate 20 percent reduction in<br />
speed.<br />
4. Final weld strength may not be achieved for several days.<br />
3.09 FLASHINGS, EXPANSION JOINTS, DRAINS, AND WALKWAYS<br />
A. Flashing: Flash perimeters as shown in manufacturer standard detail drawings. Do not cover<br />
weep holes or any form of through-wall drainage.<br />
1. Mechanically fasten all flashing at the top, under or through counter flashing, with approved<br />
fasteners and with an approved HT termination detail as shown in detail drawings.<br />
2. Install pipe flashings in accordance with membrane manufacturer's details. Do not flash to<br />
lead.<br />
B. Two-Way Air Vents: Install two-way air vents at a rate of one for every 1,000 square feet of<br />
deck. Install vents centered between rows of fastening tabs.<br />
C. Roof Drains: Install in accordance with membrane manufacturer's details.<br />
1. Properly secure all bolts to provide 100-percent continuous compression of the clamping<br />
ring.<br />
2. Do not run field seams through drains.<br />
3. Clean or replace existing drains as required to achieve manufacturer's recommended<br />
clamping detail; remove old lead and packings.<br />
04-27-11 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING<br />
07535 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
D. Roof Walkway Pads: Install pads in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions.<br />
1. Prepare dirty or weathered membrane:<br />
a. Remove any visible dirt and debris with a clean rag and water.<br />
b. For heavily contaminated surface, scrubbing with a detergent cleaner (i.e. Fantastik or<br />
409) followed by a water rinse may be necessary.<br />
2. Install roof walkway pads forming a direct path, in lines parallel to the building faces, from<br />
the roof access hatch to each piece of rooftop mechanical equipment.<br />
3. Position walkway pad and cut to desired length.<br />
4. Whenever possible, do not cover membrane seams with walkway pad. When installed<br />
adjacent to a seam, keep the pad a minimum of 2 inches from the edge of the seam on the<br />
bottom sheet of the completed lap and a minimum of 6 inches from the edge of the seam<br />
when located on the top sheet of a completed lap.<br />
5. When covering seams is unavoidable, the lap seam should be completed in accordance<br />
with manufacturer's specifications and thoroughly probed with any deficiencies repaired<br />
prior to pad installation.<br />
6. In circumstances where drainage around the walkway pad is a concern, shorter walkway<br />
pad lengths spaced with a 2 inch gap may be desired.<br />
7. Weld perimeter of walkway pad to the membrane following standard welding procedures.<br />
Periodic breaks in the weld of 1 to 2 inches are required on the low slope edge of the pad<br />
to prevent the accumulation of water under the pad.<br />
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Ensure that metal work shall be secured in a manner approved by roofing manufacturer, or in<br />
accordance with SMACNA guidelines, to prevent damage from buckling, or wind exposure. All<br />
metal work that is part of the waterproofing envelope shall be sealed, structurally sound, and<br />
appropriately anchored to prevent leakage.<br />
B. Tests:<br />
1. Seam Tests: Probe the entire lap edge of each seam with an approved seam probing tool<br />
(Sears cotter-pin extractor) after seam has cooled completely to verify seam consistency.<br />
Probing before the seam area has cooled will damage the membrane.<br />
2. Destructive Seam Tests: Test 3 inch wide area of seam weld to verify good peel strength.<br />
A properly welded seam will have membrane delamination from scrim prior to weld failure.<br />
Perform the following destructive tests on welds:<br />
a. First seam of each working day.<br />
b. First seam after the automatic hot-air welder has been allowed to cool down.<br />
c. After any extreme changes in weather conditions.<br />
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Upon completion of the installation, the manufacturer's<br />
representative shall make an inspection to ascertain that the roofing membrane system has<br />
been installed according to manufacturer's approved specifications and details.<br />
D. Warranty Inspection: Provide manufacturer's inspection for acceptance for warranty.<br />
E. Rejection of Defective Work: Areas having excessive patching as a result of damage to the<br />
membrane or faulty installation may be rejected by membrane manufacturer or the Architect;<br />
replace the membrane completely in these areas.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 MECHANICALLY ATTACHED MEMBRANE ROOFING<br />
07535 -5
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including scuppers, flashings, counterflashings, reglets, gutters,<br />
downspouts, and coping caps.<br />
B. Miscellaneous flashing work not specified as work of other sections.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Thru-wall masonry flashing.<br />
B. Section 07535 - Mechanically Attached Membrane Roofing: Roofing system.<br />
C. Section 07720 - Roof Accessories: Roof Hatch.<br />
D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.<br />
E. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings.<br />
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS<br />
A. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for<br />
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.<br />
B. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or<br />
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.<br />
C. ASTM D 4586 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.<br />
D. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning<br />
Contractors' National Association.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and<br />
standard details, except as otherwise indicated.<br />
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope<br />
metal sheets to ensure drainage.<br />
B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.<br />
C. Protect pre-finished surfaces from damage.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 SHEET MATERIALS<br />
A. (SHT MET1) Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc<br />
coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating.<br />
1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA<br />
2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.<br />
2. Color: Color to match Una-Clad “Silver Metallic”.<br />
B. (SHT MET2) Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum<br />
0.02 inch thick base metal.<br />
04-27-11 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
07620 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.02 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.<br />
B. Primer: Zinc chromate type.<br />
C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc alkyd.<br />
D. Sealant: (SLNT6) specified in Section 07900.<br />
E. Bituminous Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I. Verify compatibility with roofing membrane<br />
2.03 REGLETS<br />
A. Reglets: Recessed and surface mounted types for concrete and unit masonry applications; 26<br />
gauge galvanized steel.<br />
1. Recessed Reglet: Type MA reglet with Springlok Flashing.<br />
2. Surface Mounted Reglet: Type SM reglet with Springlok Flashing and 7/8” diameter,<br />
stainless steel washers with neoprene facing.<br />
B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product:<br />
1. Fry Reglet Corporation: Springlok Reglets and Flashing System.<br />
2.04 FABRICATION<br />
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.<br />
B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.<br />
C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.<br />
D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use<br />
sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.<br />
E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with<br />
sealant.<br />
F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form<br />
drip.<br />
G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges.<br />
2.05 SCUPPER FABRICATION<br />
A. Scuppers: Fabricate to dimensions and configurations shown on the Drawings.<br />
B. Seal metal joints.<br />
2.06 MULTI-PIPE ROOF PENETRATIONS<br />
A. Fabricate hooded sheet metal enclosure at multiple roof penetrations. Do not use pitch pockets.<br />
1. Fabricate enclosure of proper size to accommodate pipes, insulation and necessary work<br />
clearances.<br />
2. Pipe penetrations shall be through the side of the exterior of the enclosure and shall occur<br />
a minimum of 8 inches above the roof membrane.<br />
3. Provide sloping sheet metal top on enclosure with hemmed drip edges on all sides and<br />
extended overhang a minimum of 6 inches on the side where pipe penetrations occur.<br />
4. Coordinate with Section 06100 for required curbing.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets<br />
in place, and nailing strips located.<br />
04-27-11 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
07620 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.<br />
B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film<br />
thickness of 15 mil.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where<br />
permitted.<br />
B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.<br />
C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines<br />
accurate to profiles.<br />
D. Seal metal joints watertight.<br />
3.04 SCHEDULE<br />
A. Scuppers and Downspouts: 20 gauge.<br />
B. Coping, Cap, Parapet, Sill and Ledge Flashings: 24 gauge.<br />
C. Counterflashing at Roofing Terminations (over roofing base flashings): 24 gauge.<br />
D. Counterflashing at Curb-Mounted Roof Items: 24 gauge.<br />
E. Hook strips and keepers: 22 gauge.<br />
F. Other sheet metal work: 24 gauge.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
07620 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
SECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Roof hatches, ladder post and safety railing.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 05310 - Steel Deck.<br />
B. Section 07535 – Mechanically Attached Membrane Roofing.<br />
C. Section 09900 – Painting and Coatings.<br />
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.<br />
B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 ROOF HATCHES<br />
A. Manufacturers - Roof Hatches: Bilco Co.: www.bilco.com<br />
1. Product: Bilco Type S Roof Hatch.<br />
B. Roof Hatch: Factory-assembled steel frame and cover complete with operating and release<br />
hardware.<br />
1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting conditions indicated on the<br />
drawings.<br />
3. Size(s):<br />
a. For Ladder Access: Single leaf; 2’-6” x 3’-0”.<br />
C. Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings;<br />
extended bottom flange to suit mounting.<br />
1. Material: Galvanized steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick.<br />
2. Finish: Factory prime paint.<br />
3. Insulation: 1 inch rigid fiber board, located on outside face of curb.<br />
4. Curb Height: 12 inches from finished surface of roof, minimum.<br />
D. Metal Covers: Flush insulated, hollow metal construction.<br />
1. Capable of supporting 40 psf live load.<br />
2. Material: G-90, galvanized steel; outer cover 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick, liner 22 gage,<br />
0.03 inch thick.<br />
3. Finish: Factory prime paint.<br />
4. Insulation: Concealed 1 inch rigid glass fiber.<br />
5. Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter.<br />
E. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by<br />
manufacturer.<br />
1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that<br />
automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load.<br />
2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type.<br />
3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release.<br />
4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release.<br />
5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior.<br />
6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior.<br />
04-27-11 ROOF ACCESSORIES<br />
07720 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
F. Telescoping Safety Post:<br />
1. Bilco, LadderUp telescoping safety post. Bilco Model LU-1, steel with black powder coat<br />
finish.<br />
G. Safety Railing: Bilco Model Bil-Guard Hatch Railing System. OSHA approved, mounted on side<br />
and front of hatch curb.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.<br />
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory<br />
preparation before proceeding.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather<br />
integrity.<br />
B. Finished installation shall meet approval of roofing installer.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 ROOF ACCESSORIES<br />
07720 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Sealants and joint backing.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 07260 - Air Barriers.<br />
B. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.<br />
C. Section 07535 - Mechanically Attached Membrane Roofing: Sealants required in conjunction<br />
with roofing.<br />
D. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.<br />
B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.<br />
C. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.<br />
D. ASTM C 1330 - Standard Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid<br />
Applied Sealants.<br />
E. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; www.aqmd.gov.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in<br />
this section with minimum three years documented experience.<br />
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with<br />
minimum three years experience.<br />
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after<br />
installation.<br />
1.06 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.<br />
1.07 WARRANTY<br />
A. See Section 01700 - Execution Requirements, for additional warranty requirements.<br />
B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.<br />
C. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight<br />
seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.<br />
04-27-11 JOINT SEALERS<br />
07900 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Silicone Sealants:<br />
1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com<br />
2. Dow Corning Corp: www.dowcorning.com<br />
3. GE Plastics: www.geplastics.com<br />
4. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com<br />
5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.<br />
B. Polyurethane Sealants:<br />
1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com<br />
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com<br />
3. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc: www.chemrex.com<br />
4. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com<br />
5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.<br />
C. Butyl Sealants:<br />
1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com<br />
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com<br />
3. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com<br />
4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.<br />
D. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants:<br />
1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com<br />
2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com<br />
3. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc: www.chemrex.com<br />
4. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com<br />
5. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.<br />
2.02 SEALANTS<br />
A. Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound<br />
(VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management<br />
District Rule No.1168.<br />
B. (SLNT1) General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25,<br />
Uses M, G, and A; single component.<br />
1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.<br />
2. Applications: Use for:<br />
a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.<br />
b. Joints between concrete and other materials.<br />
c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.<br />
d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.<br />
C. (SLNT2) General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP,<br />
Grade NF single component, paintable.<br />
1. Applications: Use for:<br />
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.<br />
b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.<br />
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.<br />
04-27-11 JOINT SEALERS<br />
07900 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
D. (SLNT3) Sanitary/Tile Sealant: ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; single component silicone,<br />
mildew resistant.<br />
1. Color: White, Black and Clear.<br />
2. Applications: Use for:<br />
a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces, White.<br />
b. Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces, Clear.<br />
c. Control joints in tile installations in toilet rooms and kitchen, Black.<br />
E. (SLNT4) Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Class 25,<br />
Uses T, I, M and A; single component.<br />
1. Applications: Use for:<br />
a. Joints in concrete sidewalks and vehicular paving.<br />
F. (SLNT5) Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single<br />
component, solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging.<br />
1. Applications: Use for:<br />
a. Seam sealant for masonry flashing.<br />
b. Bedding sealant for thresholds and sills.<br />
G. (SLNT6) Low Modulus Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G,<br />
M, O; single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, nonbleeding.<br />
1. Color: Clear.<br />
2. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent.<br />
3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F.<br />
4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35.<br />
5. Applications: Use for:<br />
a. Air barrier perimeter.<br />
b. Exterior sheet metal joints.<br />
H. (SLNT7) Ultra-Low Modulus Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,<br />
Class 100/50, for Use NT, Silicone rubber based, 1 part neutral cure elastomeric sealant.<br />
1. Color: To match EIFS.<br />
2. Movement Capability: Plus 100 percent to minus 50 percent movement.<br />
3. Accepable Manufacturers and Products:<br />
a. Dow Corning Corporation: 790 Building Sealant.<br />
b. General Electric Company: GE SilPruf<br />
c. Tremco Construction Division: Spectrem 1.<br />
4. Applications: Use for:<br />
a. Perimeter and internal joints in EIFS System.<br />
2.03 JOINT SEALANT BACKING<br />
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint<br />
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated<br />
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.<br />
B. Sealant Backer Rod: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of<br />
size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant<br />
performance.<br />
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant<br />
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint<br />
surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.<br />
04-27-11 JOINT SEALERS<br />
07900 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.03 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.<br />
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;<br />
compatible with joint forming materials.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.<br />
B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.<br />
B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.<br />
D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of<br />
surfaces and material installation instructions.<br />
B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.<br />
C. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck<br />
dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific<br />
dimensions are indicated.<br />
D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.<br />
E. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.<br />
F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when<br />
sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.<br />
G. Tool joints concave.<br />
3.04 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.<br />
3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK<br />
A. Protect sealants until cured.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 JOINT SEALERS<br />
07900 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 08110 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Non-fire rated steel doors and frames.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors.<br />
B. Section 08380 - Traffic Doors.<br />
C. Section 08710 - Door Hardware.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. ANSI A250.6 - Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement--Application).<br />
B. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.<br />
C. ANSI A250.11 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.<br />
D. ASTM A 366/A 366M - Standard Specification for Commercial Steel (CS) Sheet, Carbon, (0.15<br />
Maximum Percent) Cold-Rolled.<br />
E. ASTM A 569/A 569M - Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Hot-<br />
Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial.<br />
F. ASTM A 591/A 591M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light<br />
Coating Weight (Mass) Applications.<br />
G. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or<br />
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.<br />
H. ASTM A 1008/A 1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon,<br />
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.<br />
I. ASTM A 1011/A 1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon,<br />
Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability.<br />
J. ASTM C 1036-01: Specification for Flat Glass.<br />
K. DHI A115.1G - Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute.<br />
L. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association.<br />
M. SDI 105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel frames; Steel Door Institute.<br />
N. SDI 113 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Apparent Thermal Performance of Steel<br />
Door and Frame Assemblies; Steel Door Institute.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Door and Frame Schedule: Prepared by the Door and Frame Supplier, indicating a listing of<br />
each hollow metal door and frame component for each door opening. Schedule includes frame<br />
size, throat dimension, door size and type.<br />
1. Organization: Door and Frame Schedule to be organized to follow the same numbering<br />
order as Door Schedule on Drawings.<br />
2. Door and Frame Schedule to be coordinated with Hardware Schedule for Hollow Metal<br />
Doors and Frames.<br />
04-27-11 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
08110 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide all products from a single manufacturer who is a member<br />
of the Steel Door Institute.<br />
B. Manufacture products only after receipt of approved hardware schedule and templates.<br />
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Upon delivery, inspect all materials for damage; notify shipper and supplier if damage is found.<br />
B. Protect products from moisture, construction traffic, and damage.<br />
C. Store vertically under cover. Do not use non-vented plastic or canvas shelters. Should<br />
wrappers become wet, remove immediately.<br />
D. Place units on 4 inch high wood sills or in a manner that will prevent rust or damage. Provide<br />
1/4 inch space between doors to promote air circulation.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 DOOR AND FRAME SUPPLIER<br />
A. Hollow metal doors and frames are to be furnished by the General Contactor through Twin City<br />
Hardware as part of the current BWW Door and Hardware Package.<br />
2.02 MANUFACTURERS<br />
Twin City Hardware Company<br />
723 Hadley Avenue North<br />
Oakdale, MN 55128<br />
651-735-2200<br />
A. Ingersoll Rand, Steelcraft.<br />
2.03 MATERIALS<br />
A. Steel Sheet for Doors and Frames:<br />
1. Cold rolled steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS.<br />
2. Hot rolled steel: Pickled and oiled, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Designation CS Type B.<br />
3. Galvanized steel: Hot-dipped, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60/Z180 coating, minimum.<br />
B. Steel Sheet for Anchors and Accessories: Electrolytically deposited zinc coated steel; ASTM A<br />
591/A 591M, coating 40Z (12G), minimum.<br />
C. Accessory Materials:<br />
1. Rubber Door Silencers: Furnish three at each single leaf door frames and two at each pairs<br />
of doors.<br />
D. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08800 Glazing.<br />
2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES<br />
A. General: Comply with requirements of ANSI/SDI A250.8.<br />
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricate frames from metallic-coated steel sheet assembled with a<br />
mechanical interlock joint, face miter seam “closed and tight”. Weld face seam and full web of<br />
frame (T-3). Grind and dress smooth weld area. Apply zinc rich primer over grinding area.<br />
1. Sheet Thickness: 14 gauge.<br />
2. Material and Finish: Zinc-alloy-iron coating (galvannealed) to a minimum coating weight of<br />
A60 to comply with ASTM A 653.<br />
3. Galvanize internal members and reinforcements.<br />
04-27-11 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
08110 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
C. Interior Frames: Fabricate from cold rolled steel sheet assembled with a mechanical interlock<br />
joint, face miter seam “closed and tight”. Weld face seam of frame (T-2). Grind and dress<br />
smooth weld area. Apply zinc rich primer over grinding area.<br />
1. Sheet Thickness: 16 gauge.<br />
D. Traffic Doors Frames: Fabricate from cold rolled steel sheet assembled with a mechanical<br />
interlock joint, face miter seam “closed and tight”. Weld face seam of frame (T-2). Grind and<br />
dress smooth weld area. Apply zinc rich primer over grinding area.<br />
1. Sheet Thickness: 14 gauge.<br />
2. Configuration: Fabricate without stop and with added reinforcement for traffic door<br />
hardware.<br />
E. Frame Finish: Shop prime for field painting under Section 09900.<br />
F. Finished work to be smooth and free from warps and buckles.<br />
G. Silencers: Glynn-Johnson, 64 Silencer. Furnish 3 at single door strike jambs, 2 at head of pair<br />
doors.<br />
H. Provide floor clips for frames. Provide jamb anchors spaced not over 30" on center for frames.<br />
Furnish temporary spreader bars and bracing.<br />
2.05 HOLLOW METAL DOORS<br />
A. Exterior Flush Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level III, Model 2,Extra Heavy<br />
Duty, seamless design, Full Flush Door.<br />
1. Face Sheet Thickness: 16 gauge.<br />
2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inch.<br />
3. Core: Polystyrene.<br />
Note: Provide Polystyrene core for exterior doors and Mechanical Room door, (Type 6).<br />
5. Fabricate with watertight top closure and construct to receive weatherstripping as specified<br />
under Section 08700.<br />
6. Material and Finish: Zinc-alloy-iron coating (galvannealed) to a minimum coating weight of<br />
A60 to comply with ASTM A 653. Shop prime for field painting under Section 09900.<br />
B. Interior Flush Steel Doors: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, Level II, Model 2, Heavy Duty,<br />
seamless design, Full Flush Doors.<br />
1. Face Sheet: 16 gauge.<br />
2. Thickness: 1-3/4 inch.<br />
3. Core: Impregnated kraft honeycomb core.<br />
4. Material and Finish: Cold rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008. Shop prime for<br />
field painting under Section 09900.<br />
5. Glazing Stops: Construct removable glazing stops of 16 gauge steel. Factory fit and install<br />
stops. Form neat hairline joints. Install stops using screws not over 16" on center with at<br />
least two screws per piece.<br />
2.06 LOUVERS<br />
A. Metal Louvers: Provide manufacturers standard 12” high by 18” wide metal louver in Office<br />
door, in location as indicated on Drawings.<br />
1. Shop prime louver for field painting under Section 09900.<br />
2.07 GLAZING<br />
A (GL5): One-Way Mirror Glass 1/4 inch thick; ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 2, q3 quality, Style B,<br />
clear tempered glass with a reflective coating one side.<br />
1. Provide glass for Office door in location as indicated on Drawings.<br />
04-27-11 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
08110 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that project conditions are suitable before beginning installation of frames.<br />
B. Correct unsatisfactory condition before preceding with installation.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install frames plumb, level, rigid, and in true alignment as recommended in ANSI A250.11 and<br />
DHI A115.1G.<br />
B. Install doors plumb and in true alignment and fasten to achieve the maximum operational<br />
effectiveness and appearance of the unit. Maintain clearances specified in ANSI A250.8 and<br />
NFPA 80 whichever is more restrictive.<br />
C. Fill welded wrap-around frames in masonry construction with grout as masonry is laid-up.<br />
Brace or fasten frame in such a way to prevent pressure of the grout from deforming frame.<br />
1. Mix grout to provide 4 inch maximum consistency and hand trowel into place.<br />
2. Do not use grout mixed to thin "pumpable" consistency.<br />
D. If additives are used in masonry or plaster work during cold weather, field coat the inside of<br />
steel frames with a bituminous compound to prevent corrosion.<br />
E. Install doors plumb and in true alignment and fasten to achieve the maximum operational<br />
effectiveness and appearance of the unit. Maintain clearances specified. Shim as indicated in<br />
DHI A115.1G and SDI 122.<br />
F. Install hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's recommendations and templates.<br />
Consult DHI A115.1G and ANSI A250.6 as necessary.<br />
G. Install door silencers shortly before substantial completion.<br />
3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN<br />
A. Adjust doors for proper operation, free from binding or other defects.<br />
B. Clean and restore soiled surfaces. Remove scraps and debris, and leave site and a clean<br />
condition.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
08110 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Flush wood doors; non-rated.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry.<br />
B. Section 08110 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.<br />
C. Section 08710 - Door Hardware.<br />
D. Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings: for field finishing of doors.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated; Architectural<br />
Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada.<br />
B. ANSI A208.1: Particleboard.<br />
C. DHI-A115-W: Wood Door Hardware Standards, Hardware Preparation.<br />
D. DHI-WDHS-3: Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and<br />
characteristics.<br />
C. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts<br />
required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory<br />
finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated,<br />
Section 1300, Custom Grade.<br />
B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section<br />
with minimum three years of documented experience.<br />
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.<br />
B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.<br />
C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or<br />
wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with<br />
tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.<br />
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.<br />
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weather<br />
tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining<br />
ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the<br />
construction period.<br />
04-27-11 FLUSH WOOD DOORS<br />
08211 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.08 WARRANTY<br />
A. See Section 01700 - Execution Requirements for additional warranty requirements.<br />
B. Provide warranty for the following term:<br />
1. Interior Doors: Life of installation.<br />
C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,<br />
defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 WOOD DOOR SUPPLIER<br />
A. Wood doors are to be furnished by the General Contactor through Twin City Hardware as part<br />
of the current BWW Door and Hardware Package.<br />
2.02 MANUFACTURERS<br />
Twin City Hardware Company<br />
723 Hadley Avenue North<br />
Oakdale, MN 55128<br />
651-735-2200<br />
A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:<br />
1. Lynden Door Inc: www.lyndendoor.com<br />
2.03 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL<br />
A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty.<br />
B. Particleboard-Core Doors:<br />
1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no ureaformaldehyde<br />
resin.<br />
2.04 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH<br />
A. (Wood Doors): Interior 1-3/4” Solid-Core Doors:<br />
1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces.<br />
2. Species: Select White Maple.<br />
3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).<br />
4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.<br />
5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match.<br />
6. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces.<br />
7. Core: Particleboard.<br />
8. Construction: 5 or 7 ply. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive<br />
planed before veneering.<br />
2.05 DOOR CONSTRUCTION<br />
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.<br />
B. Cores Constructed with Stiles and Rails: Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware<br />
reinforcement.<br />
C. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.<br />
D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with<br />
hardware requirements and dimensions.<br />
E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge<br />
clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. Doors to be field finished.<br />
04-27-11 FLUSH WOOD DOORS<br />
08211 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
F. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1700.<br />
2.06 FIELD FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS<br />
A. Refer to Section 09900 for field finishing of wood doors.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.<br />
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.<br />
C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or<br />
alignment.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.<br />
B. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges a maximum of 3/4 of an inch (19 mm).<br />
C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.<br />
D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES<br />
A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.<br />
B. Conform to specified quality standard for maximum diagonal distortion.<br />
C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, top to<br />
bottom, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area.<br />
D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to<br />
edge, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area.<br />
3.04 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.<br />
B. Adjust closers for full closure.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 FLUSH WOOD DOORS<br />
08211 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 08310 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Access panel and frame units, non-fire-rated, in ceiling and soffit locations.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 07424 - Aluminum Composite Panel System.<br />
B. Section 07240 - Exterior Insulation Finish System: Openings in exterior EIFS surfaces.<br />
C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Openings in drywall ceilings and walls.<br />
D. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Field paint finish.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Access Panel Manufacturers:<br />
1. Milcor Inc: www.milcorinc.com.<br />
2. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com<br />
3. Karp Associates, Inc: www.karpinc.com<br />
4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.<br />
2.02 ACCESS PANEL UNITS<br />
A. (AP) Access Panels:<br />
1. Milcor Style DW with drywall flange.<br />
2. Milcor Style K with plaster type flange for EIFS.<br />
3. Milcor Style ME with exposed flange.<br />
4. Comparable products from the other specified manufacturers.<br />
B. Sizes: As indicated on the drawings.<br />
C. Hardware:<br />
1. Hinge: 175 degree stainless steel piano hinge with removable pin.<br />
2. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock.<br />
D. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard prime coat, to be field painted under Section 09900.<br />
2.03 ACCESS PANEL AT ENTRY CANOPY<br />
A. (AP) Entry Canopy Access Panel: Steel access panel with 1 inch deep recessed door for<br />
installation in ceiling of entry canopy. Door panel infill to be plywood filler and aluminum<br />
composite panel to match finish of canopy.<br />
1. Acudor Model No. AT-5020.<br />
2. Milcor Model No. 3205-030.<br />
B. Sizes: 24 inch x 24 inch.<br />
C. Hardware:<br />
1. Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam lock.<br />
D. Finish:<br />
1. Galvanized, hot dipped finish.<br />
2.04 FABRICATION<br />
A. Weld, fill, and grind joints to ensure flush and square unit.<br />
04-27-11 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS<br />
08310 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.<br />
C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.<br />
D. Provide shimming as necessary so that plaster screed is positioned to match thickness of<br />
surrounding finish system.<br />
E. Installation of surface mounted wall unit through adhered roofing membrane: Set flange in<br />
continuous sealant. Provide weatherstrip on all edges and aluminum rain drip applied to top<br />
edge.<br />
F. Installation of panels in EIFS as applicable: Install prior to finish coat of EIFS.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION OF ENTRY CANOPY ACCESS PANEL<br />
A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
B. Securely fasten access panel in wood frame opening. Set frame at height so that aluminum<br />
composite panel infill will be flush with finished composite panel system of canopy.<br />
C. Adhesively apply backer sheet of plywood and composite panel sheet in door recess.<br />
Composite panel should set flush with canopy finish.<br />
D. Coordinate installation of access panel with installation of composite panel system. Refer to<br />
Section 07424 Aluminum Composite Panel System for specific panel system installed at<br />
canopy.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS<br />
08310 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 08380 - TRAFFIC DOORS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Double-acting, self-closing traffic doors.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 08110 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Traffic door frames.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 TRAFFIC DOOR SUPPLIER<br />
A. Traffic Doors in this section to be furnished by the General Contactor through Twin City<br />
Hardware as part of the current BWW Door and Hardware Package.<br />
2.02 MANUFACTURERS<br />
Twin City Hardware Company<br />
723 Hadley Avenue North<br />
Oakdale, MN 55128<br />
651-735-2200<br />
A. Chase Industries, Inc., 800-543-4455, www.chasedoors.com.<br />
2.03 TRAFFIC DOORS<br />
A. (TD) Traffic Door: Chase Model # SC-3018 solid core traffic door.<br />
1. Core: 3/4” thick, 7-ply plywood.<br />
2. Door Faces: Plastic laminate.<br />
a. Black: Formica Black 909-58, Dining/Public side of door.<br />
b. White: Formica White 949-58, Kitchen side of door.<br />
3. Hardware: Chase “E” series stainless steel adjustable gravity close hardware system.<br />
4. Vision Panel: 9 x 14 inches, clear acrylic glazing with black rubber molding. Center window<br />
at 60” above floor.<br />
5. Impact Plates: 18” high, 18ga stainless steel impact plates both sides of door. Impact<br />
plates to set flush with door edge trim.<br />
6. Edge Trim: 18ga stainless steel channel edge trim, all sides of door.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that door frames are plumb, secured to substrate and ready for installation of door.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install traffic doors with necessary hardware and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's<br />
written installation instructions.<br />
B. Install doors plumb and level and properly aligned in door frame.<br />
3.03 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Lubricate and adjust doors for smooth operation and proper closing.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 TRAFFIC DOORS<br />
08380 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Aluminum storefront framing.<br />
B. Aluminum window framing.<br />
C. Aluminum doors and frames.<br />
SECTION 08410 – METAL FRAMED STOREFRONTS<br />
D. Door hardware for aluminum doors less cylinders.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.<br />
B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: for additional hardware items provided under Owner’s Door<br />
and Hardware Package.<br />
C. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.<br />
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS<br />
A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American<br />
Architectural Manufacturers Association.<br />
B. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.<br />
C. ASTM B 209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate<br />
[Metric].<br />
D. ASTM B 221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,<br />
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.<br />
E. ASTM B 221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,<br />
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric].<br />
F. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior<br />
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the<br />
Specimen.<br />
G. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,<br />
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.<br />
H. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,<br />
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.<br />
I. BHMA A 156 – Standards for Builders Hardware.<br />
J. SSPC-Paint 12: Paint Specification No. 12: Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film).<br />
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General Performance: Design and construct framing systems and associated systems to<br />
comply with performance requirements specified and applicable building code requirements for<br />
this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects<br />
in construction.<br />
B. Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or<br />
permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design<br />
wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.<br />
1. Positive Design Wind Load: 25 lbf/sq ft.<br />
2. Negative Design Wind Load: 25 lbf/sq ft.<br />
04-27-11 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS<br />
08410 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with<br />
full recovery of glazing materials.<br />
C. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection<br />
of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.<br />
D. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,<br />
measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 6.24 psf as measured in<br />
accordance with ASTM E 283.<br />
E. Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure<br />
difference of 2.86 lbf/sq ft.<br />
F. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any<br />
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture<br />
occurring within system.<br />
G. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly,<br />
primarily in line with inside pane of glass and inner sheet of infill panel and heel bead of glazing<br />
compound.<br />
H. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components<br />
caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F. over a 12 hour period without causing<br />
detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.<br />
1. Estimated spacing of vertical mullion movement joints: 20 feet.<br />
1.05 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction,<br />
specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation<br />
procedures.<br />
C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's<br />
name and registered with manufacturer.<br />
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems<br />
with minimum five years of documented experience.<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized installers who are trained and approved for<br />
installation of the following systems required for this Project.<br />
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.<br />
B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed<br />
coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.<br />
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS<br />
A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this<br />
minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.<br />
1.09 WARRANTY<br />
A. See Section 01700 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.<br />
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.<br />
C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.<br />
Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.<br />
04-27-11 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS<br />
08410 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:<br />
1. Vistawall Architectural Products; Series 3000T: www.vistawall.com<br />
2. Kawneer North America; Product Trifab 451/451T: www.kawneer.com<br />
3. United States Aluminum Corp; FT451: www.usalum.com<br />
2.02 MATERIALS<br />
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).<br />
B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B209M).<br />
C. Fasteners: Stainless steel.<br />
D. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members.<br />
E. Perimeter Sealant: Type A specified in Section 07900.<br />
F. Glass: As specified in Section 08800.<br />
G. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration<br />
requirements.<br />
H. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08800.<br />
I. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12<br />
requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.<br />
2.03 ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEM<br />
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded or formed aluminum framing members of<br />
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.<br />
1. Construction: Thermally broken.<br />
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.<br />
3. Glazing Plane: Center glazed to accept 1/4" and 1” insulated glass.<br />
4. Profile: 2” x 4-1/2”.<br />
5. Finish: Clear Anodized Finish; AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I.<br />
2.04 ALUMINUM SWING DOORS<br />
A. Exterior Doors: Nominal 2” deep, medium stile aluminum doors, with 3/16” wall thickness and<br />
nominal 3-1/2" wide stiles, 6" nominal top rail and actual 10" high bottom rail. Door units to be<br />
fabricated complete with hardware as indicated in Hardware Schedule.<br />
1. Doors to be glazed with the following glass units: Refer to Section 08800 for glass units.<br />
a. 1/4 inch clear tempered glass units, (GL1), in interior doors.<br />
b. 1 inch insulated, clear glass units, (GL2), in exterior doors and transom.<br />
2. Glazing Stops: Non-removable from the exterior side, snap-in type, square, extruded<br />
aluminum sections with vinyl or neoprene glazing inserts. Form neat hairline joints.<br />
3. Finish: Same as storefront.<br />
B. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products:<br />
1. Vistawall Architectural Products; MS-375 Rugged Medium Stile Door.<br />
2. Kawneer North America; 350 Heavy Wall Door.<br />
3. United States Aluminum Corp; Durafront Series 800 Medium Stile Door.<br />
2.05 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
A. Refer to Hardware Schedule at the end of this section.<br />
04-27-11 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS<br />
08410 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. Hinges: BHMA 156.1, butt type, ball bearing, non-removable pin on exterior outswinging doors.<br />
1. Hinge Size: 2 inch doors / 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches.<br />
2. Finish: US26D for interior doors and US32D for exterior doors.<br />
C. Exit Devices: BMHA 156.3, Grade 1.<br />
1. Provide on exterior pairs of doors.<br />
2. Keyed lock cylinder on outside of door by Section 08710.<br />
3. Keyed dogging cylinders by Section 08710.<br />
3. Finish: US26D.<br />
4. Manufacturer: Von Duprin 99 Series with concealed vertical rods.<br />
D. Push/Pull Set: BHMA 156.6.<br />
1. Provide on each interior door and provide pull on exterior of exterior pair of doors.<br />
2. Finish: US32D.<br />
3. Note: Coordinate and match Pull design on projects that have existing mall hardware<br />
design and finish.<br />
E. Closers: Universal mounting and multi-sized modern surface type with full cover, sized for<br />
individual door sizes and locations, (unless other types are required by special conditions.<br />
1. Provide 110 degree arm.<br />
2. Provide with cushion stop for exterior doors.<br />
3. Finish: AL.<br />
F. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all exterior doors.<br />
1. Finish: AL.<br />
G. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, of neoprene; provide on all exterior doors.<br />
1. Finish: AL.<br />
H. Threshold: ADA compliant extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface;<br />
provide on all exterior doors.<br />
1. Finish: AL.<br />
2.06 FABRICATION<br />
A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of<br />
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.<br />
B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.<br />
C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.<br />
D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar<br />
metals with bituminous paint.<br />
E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.<br />
F. Reinforce components internally for door hardware.<br />
G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.<br />
H. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.<br />
1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in<br />
completed assemblies, including joint edges.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.<br />
B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of<br />
this section.<br />
04-27-11 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS<br />
08410 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install framing system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and<br />
other irregularities.<br />
C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.<br />
D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional<br />
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.<br />
E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.<br />
F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.<br />
G. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.<br />
H. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal<br />
barrier.<br />
I. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.<br />
J. Install operable door units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust<br />
weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.<br />
K. Install hardware using templates provided.<br />
L. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800, using glazing method required to achieve<br />
performance criteria.<br />
M. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07900.<br />
N. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be<br />
satisfactorily repaired.<br />
O. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact<br />
surfaces with bituminous paint.<br />
3.03 TOLERANCES<br />
A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,<br />
whichever is less.<br />
B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.<br />
3.04 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.<br />
3.05 CLEANING<br />
A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.<br />
B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean<br />
wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.<br />
C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.<br />
04-27-11 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS<br />
08410 -5
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE<br />
GROUP 1: Interior Entry Vestibule Doors – Door No. 02<br />
3 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB or Comparable<br />
2 Pull 535B 8” CTC Hiawatha<br />
2 Push Bar 1081 LBP Hiawatha<br />
2 Closer 1461 x 110 degree LCN<br />
Refer to Section 08710 – Door Hardware for Balance of Hardware for Group 1 provided<br />
by Hardware Supplier. Floor Stops.<br />
GROUP 2: Exterior Entry and Dining “B” (Patio) Doors – Door No.s 01 and 15<br />
3 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP PBB or Comparable<br />
1 Exit Device CD3347NL (Concealed Vertical Rods) Von Duprin<br />
1 Exit Device CD3347EO(Concealed Vertical Rods) Von Duprin<br />
2 Offset Pull 658 8” CTC Hiawatha<br />
2 Closer 1461 x cush arm stop x 110 degree LCN<br />
1 set Weatherstrip Reese<br />
2 Door Sweep 323 x 36” Reese<br />
1 Threshold S245A x 72” Reese<br />
Refer to Section 08710 – Door Hardware for Balance of Hardware for Group 2 provided<br />
by Hardware Supplier. Cylinders and Floor Stops.<br />
GROUP 14: Bar (Patio) Door – Door No. 19<br />
1-1/2 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP PBB or Comparable<br />
1 Exit Device CD33EO Von Duprin<br />
1 Pull 535B 8” CTC Hiawatha<br />
1 Closer 1461 x cush arm stop x 110 degree LCN<br />
1 set Weatherstrip Reese<br />
1 Door Sweep 323 x 36” Reese<br />
1 Threshold S245A x 36” Reese<br />
Refer to Section 08710 – Door Hardware for Balance of Hardware for Group 14 provided<br />
by Hardware Supplier. Cylinder and Floor Stop.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 METAL-FRAMED STOREFRONTS<br />
08410 -6
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Commercial door hardware furnished by General Contractor from Owner’s Door and Hardware<br />
Supplier.<br />
B. Aluminum Door Hardware: Hardware for manual aluminum doors, except cylinders and door<br />
stops, are furnished and installed under Section 08410. Installation of cylinders and door stops<br />
under the work of this Section.<br />
C. Installation of Owner Furnished construction and permanent cores.<br />
D. Installation of hardware components.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Custom Fabricated Gates.<br />
B. Section 08110 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.<br />
C. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors.<br />
D. Section 08410 - Metal-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for aluminum doors.<br />
1.03 OWNER FURNISHED MATERIALS<br />
A. Owner Furnished Cores and Keys: Construction and permanent interchangeable cores and<br />
keys will be provided By Owner for installation by General Contractor.<br />
1. Coordinate delivery of cores to project site with Owner.<br />
B. Padlocks: Owner will provide padlocks for gates, coolers and roof hatch.<br />
1.04 REFERENCES<br />
A. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI) and Builders Hardware Manufacturers<br />
Association:<br />
1. ANSI/BHMA A156, Door Hardware Standards.<br />
2. ICC/ANSI A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.<br />
B. Door and Hardware Institute, (DHI).<br />
C. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA):<br />
1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.<br />
2. NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Fire Windows.<br />
3. NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.<br />
4. NFPA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.<br />
D. Underwriters Laboratories, (UL):<br />
1. UL, "Building Materials Directory".<br />
1.05 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Hardware Schedule: Prepared by the Hardware Supplier, indicating a listing of each hardware<br />
component for each door opening.<br />
1. Organization: Hardware Schedule to be organized to follow the same numbering order as<br />
Door Schedule on Drawings.<br />
2. Hardware schedule to be coordinated with Door and Frame Schedule for Hollow Metal<br />
Doors and Frames and Wood Doors.<br />
09-14-11 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
08710 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door<br />
hardware.<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: Workers trained and approved to install commercial door hardware and<br />
electrified door hardware as required.<br />
C. Regulatory Requirements:<br />
1. Comply with accessibility requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),<br />
"Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)" and ANSI A117.1.<br />
2. Comply with NFPA 101 for means of egress doors.<br />
3. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a<br />
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80<br />
that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having<br />
jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.<br />
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to<br />
match hardware schedule.<br />
1. Include basic installation instructions, mounting diagram and applicable wiring diagrams.<br />
B. Inventory door hardware on receipt at project site and provide secure lock-up for door hardware<br />
delivered to Project site.<br />
1.08 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of<br />
internal reinforcement for door hardware.<br />
B. Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory<br />
prepared for installing door hardware.<br />
C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware<br />
with connections as required.<br />
D. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 HARDWARE SUPPLIER<br />
A. Hardware components in this section are to be furnished by the General Contactor through<br />
Twin City Hardware as part of the current BWW Door and Hardware Package.<br />
Twin City Hardware Company<br />
723 Hadley Avenue North<br />
Oakdale, MN 55128<br />
651-735-2200<br />
2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL<br />
A. Door hardware for each door to comply with requirements of this section and door Hardware<br />
Groups indicated in Part 3, Hardware Schedule.<br />
B. Provide hardware components that are new, free from scratches, mars and other defects.<br />
Furnish hardware complete with accessories of proper size and design required for the purpose<br />
intended, including screws, shields, and other anchorage devices necessary for complete<br />
installation.<br />
09-14-11 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
08710 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.03 DOOR HARDWARE COMPONENTS AND FINISHES<br />
A. Hinges: BHMA 156.1, butt type, ball bearing, non-removable pin on exterior outswinging doors.<br />
1. Manufacturer: PBB.<br />
2. Hinge Size: 1-3/4 inch doors / 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches.<br />
3. Spring Hinge: Self-closing hinges, BHMA 156.17, 4-1/2 inches x 4-1/2 inches.<br />
4. Finish: US26D for interior doors and US32D for exterior doors.<br />
B. Lock and Latch Sets: Cylindrical Locks, BHMA A156.2, Grade 1, prepared to accept “Insta-Key”<br />
interchangeable cores.<br />
1. Manufacturer: Schlage; ND Series.<br />
2. Lever Handle Trim Design: Schlage “Rhodes”.<br />
3. Finish: US26D.<br />
4. Manufacturer: Schlage; AL Series.<br />
5. Lever Handle Trim Design: Schlage “Saturn”.<br />
6. Finish: US26D.<br />
C. Cylinders: BHMA 156.2, Grade 1, prepared to accept “Insta-Key” interchangeable cores.<br />
1. Manufacturer: Schlage.<br />
2. Finish: US26D.<br />
D. Exit Alarm Locks: BMHA 156.3, Grade 1.<br />
1. Manufacturer: Von Duprin; Guard – X, Series 2670.<br />
2. Finish: US28.<br />
E. Panic Exit Devices: BMHA 156.3, Grade 1. Rim exit device with exit alarm, weatherized.<br />
1. Manufacturer: Detex; Value Series, V40.<br />
2. Finish: Black Anodized Aluminum.<br />
F. Push/Pull Sets: BHMA 156.6.<br />
1. Manufacturer: Hiawatha.<br />
2. Finish: US32D.<br />
G. Closers: Universal mounting and multi-sized modern surface type with full cover, sized for<br />
individual door sizes and locations, (unless other types are required by special conditions.<br />
1. Manufacturer: LCN.<br />
2. Provide 110 degree arm.<br />
3. Provide with cushion stop for exterior doors.<br />
4. Finish: AL.<br />
5. Maximum force to operate doors shall not exceed 8.5 pounds for exterior doors and 5<br />
pounds for interior doors. Fire rated doors to be set to minimum operating force to allow<br />
positive latching when closed.<br />
H. Flush Bolts: BHMA 156.16, manual flush bolt, 12 inch long rod length.<br />
1. Manufacturer: Ives.<br />
2. Finish: US26D.<br />
I. Double Coat Hooks: Brushed aluminum double wardrobe hook.<br />
1. Manufacturer: Ives.<br />
2. Finish: US92, aluminum clear coated.<br />
J. Hinge Pin Stops:<br />
1. Manufacturer: Ives.<br />
2. Finish: US15, satin nickel plated.<br />
K. Wall Stops: Concave design, with dry wall anchor.<br />
1. Manufacturer: Don-Jo Manufacturing.<br />
2. Finish: US32D.<br />
09-14-11 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
08710 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
L. Floor Stops:<br />
1. Manufacturer: Ives.<br />
2.. Models:<br />
a. 446PA28, US28, Aluminum.<br />
b. FS18S, no finish.<br />
M. Door Viewers: Solid Brass one way viewers.<br />
1. Manufacturer: Ives.<br />
2. Finish: US26D.<br />
N. Kick Plates/Armor Plates: BHMA 156.6, 0.050" thick, BHMA 630, Type 304 stainless steel<br />
plates.<br />
1. Manufacturer: Hiawatha.<br />
2. Finish: US32D.<br />
O. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors.<br />
1. Manufacturer: Reese.<br />
2. Finish: AL.<br />
P. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, of neoprene; provide on all exterior doors.<br />
1. Manufacturer: Reese.<br />
2. Finish: AL.<br />
Q. Thresholds: ADA compliant extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface;<br />
provide on all exterior doors.<br />
1. Manufacturer: Reese/Hiawatha.<br />
2. Finish: AL.<br />
R. Rain Drips: Mill aluminum drip cap continuous over full width of door frame head with 2-1/2”<br />
projection.<br />
1. Manufacturer: Reese.<br />
2. Finish: AL.<br />
2.04 DOOR SIGNAGE<br />
A. Special Signage: When required, provide vinyl self-adhesive signage reading, "NOT AN EXIT".<br />
Font shall be non-serif, 2 inches minimum in height, red letters on white background. Comply<br />
with the requirements of the local code authority.<br />
2.05 KEYING<br />
A. Door Locks: Master keyed.<br />
1. Include construction keying.<br />
B. Supply keys in the following quantities:<br />
1. Six master keys.<br />
2. Two construction keys.<br />
3. Two change keys for each lock.<br />
4. Two removable core control keys.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on<br />
mounting diagrams.<br />
B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct<br />
characteristics.<br />
09-14-11 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
08710 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.<br />
B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.<br />
C. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As<br />
recommended by the Builders' Hardware Manufacturers Association and DHI.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION OF FINISH HARDWARE<br />
A. Install hardware according to hardware supplier’s written installation instructions, mounting<br />
drawings and wiring diagrams included in hardware packages using experienced personnel.<br />
Maintain fire rating on labeled openings as applicable.<br />
B. Completely fit hardware before final coat of paint or other finish is applied, and then remove until<br />
final finish coat is applied. Perform mortises and cutting neatly, and conceal evidence of cutting<br />
in finished work. Permanently install hardware after finishing operations are complete and dry.<br />
Protect from scratching or other damage.<br />
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper<br />
operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as<br />
intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and<br />
ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.<br />
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.<br />
C. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.<br />
3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK<br />
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without<br />
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.<br />
3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE<br />
GROUP 1: Interior Entry Vestibule Doors – Door No. 02<br />
2 Floor Stops 446FS28 Ives<br />
Refer to Section 08410 – Metal Framed Storefronts for Balance of Hardware for Group 1<br />
provided by Storefront Manufacturer.<br />
GROUP 2: Exterior Entry and Dining “B” (Patio) Doors – Door Nos. 01 and 15<br />
1 Rim Cylinder Schlage<br />
2 Mortise Cylinders for cylinder dogging Schlage<br />
2 Floor Stops 446FS28 Ives<br />
Refer to Section 08410 – Metal Framed Storefronts for Balance of Hardware for Group 2<br />
provided by Storefront Manufacturer.<br />
09-14-11 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
08710 -5
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
GROUP 3: Restroom Doors – Door Nos. 03 and 07<br />
1-1/2 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB<br />
1 Pull/Plate 535B 8” CTC x 200D 3.5” x 15” Hiawatha<br />
1 Push Plate 200F 4” x 16” Hiawatha<br />
1 Closer 1461 x hold open x 110 degree LCN<br />
1 Kick Plate B3E 10” x 34” Hiawatha<br />
1 Wall Stop 1407 DON<br />
GROUP 4: Office – Door No. 10<br />
1-1/2 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB<br />
1 Lockset ND80BD Rhodes x less core Schlage<br />
I/C core by Owner<br />
1 Closer 1461 x 110 degree LCN<br />
1 Kick Plate B3E 10” x 34” Hiawatha<br />
1 Wall Stop 1407 DON<br />
1 Security Window 10” x 10” in door AIR<br />
1 Metal Louver 18” x 12” in door AIR<br />
GROUP 5: Family Restroom – Door No. 20 Family Restroom<br />
3 PBB Hinges BB81 4 1/2" x 4 1/2" NRP US26D<br />
1 SCH Lockset D40 Rhodes X Privacy 626<br />
1 LCN Closer 1461 X Hold Open X 110-Degree AL<br />
1 DON Wall Stop 1407 US32D<br />
3 STL Rubber Door Silencer Q146-2500 GREY<br />
1 HIA Kickplate 10" x 34" x .050" B3E US32D<br />
GROUP 6: Exterior Service Doors - Door Nos. 11 and 14<br />
1-1/2 pair Hinges 4B51 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP PBB<br />
1 Exit Alarm Lock 2670 x less core Von Duprin<br />
1 Rim Cylinder 80-129 Schlage<br />
1 Closer 1461 Cush x 110 degree LCN<br />
1 Viewer 698B Ives<br />
1 Armor Plate KP 36” x 40” Hiawatha<br />
1 set Weatherstrip DS75 x 4070 Reese<br />
1 Door Sweep 377A x 42” Reese<br />
1 Threshold S245A x 42” Reese<br />
1 Rain Drip R201A x 46” Reese<br />
GROUP 7: Restroom Stall Doors – Door Nos. 4, 5, 6, and 8<br />
1 Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB<br />
2 Spring Hinge SP81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB<br />
1 Latchset AL40 Saturn x Privacy Schlage<br />
2 Hinge Pin Stop 69F15 Ives<br />
1 Wall Stop 1407 DON<br />
1 Dbl. Coat Hook 582A92 Ives<br />
GROUP 8: Rear Vestibule (Interior) - Door No. 13<br />
1-1/2 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 PBB<br />
1 Lockset ND80BD Rhodes x less core Schlage<br />
I/C core by Owner<br />
1 Closer 1461 x 110 degree LCN<br />
2 Hinge Pin Stop 69F15 Ives<br />
1 Kick Plate B3E 10” x 34” Hiawatha<br />
09-14-11 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
08710 -6
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
GROUP 9: Mechanical Room – Door No. 18<br />
3 pair Hinges BB81 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP PBB<br />
1 Lockset ND80BD Rhodes x less core Schlage<br />
I/C core by Owner<br />
1 Closer 1461 x 110 degree LCN<br />
1 Flush Bolt FB458 12” Ives<br />
1 Threshold 425S x 72” Hiawatha<br />
GROUP 10: Patio Gates – Door Nos. 16 and 17<br />
1 Panic Device V40xEBxWx36” Detex<br />
1 Mortise Cylinder 80-102 x less core Schlage<br />
Balance of Hardware by Gate Manufacturer<br />
2 Hinges Steel Weld-on Barrel Hinges<br />
GROUP 11: Traffic Doors – Door Nos. 9 and 12<br />
All Mounting Hardware by Door Manufacturer<br />
GROUP 12: Coat Hooks – Bar Stool Area / Women’s Restroom<br />
8 Dbl. Coat Hook 582A92 Bar Stool Area Ives<br />
2 Dbl. Coat Hook 582A92 Women’s Restroom Ives<br />
Note: Coat Hooks in Women’s Restroom are used on the Purse Shelf.<br />
GROUP 13: Padlocks – Keg Storage, Trash & Chemical Enclosure & Roof Hatch<br />
6 Padlocks By Owner Insta-Key<br />
GROUP 14: Bar (Patio) Door – Door No. 19<br />
1 Mortise Cylinder for cylinder dogging Schlage<br />
1 Floor Stop 446FS28 Ives<br />
Refer to Section 08410 – Metal Framed Storefronts for Balance of Hardware for Group 14<br />
provided by Storefront Manufacturer.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
09-14-11 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
08710 -7
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Clear tempered glass.<br />
B. Insulated spandrel glass for windows.<br />
C. Clear insulated glass for entrances storefronts and windows.<br />
D. Un-framed tempered glass mirrors.<br />
E. Tinted window film.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 01700 – Execution Requirements: for final cleaning of glass and mirrors.<br />
B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material.<br />
C. Section 08110 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: for one-way mirror glass provided under<br />
Hardware Package.<br />
D. Section 08410 - Metal-Framed Storefronts.<br />
E. Section 10810 – Toilet Accessories: for framed mirrors.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials.<br />
B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings,<br />
Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.<br />
C. ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,<br />
Setting Blocks, and Spacers.<br />
D. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.<br />
E. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.<br />
F. ASTM C 1048: Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and<br />
Uncoated Glass.<br />
G. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.<br />
H. ASTM C 1503: Specification for Silvered Flat Glass Mirror.<br />
I. ASTM E 2190: Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation<br />
J. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America.<br />
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads<br />
(where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following:<br />
defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain<br />
watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing<br />
with certification label. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and<br />
safety glazing standard with which glass complies.<br />
09-14-11 GLAZING<br />
08800 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Fabricators for Glass:<br />
1. AFG Industries, Inc: www.afgglass.com.<br />
2. Guardian Industries Corporation: www.guardian.com.<br />
3. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppg.com.<br />
4. Oldcastle Glass: www.oldcastle.com<br />
5. Viracon: www.viracon.com.<br />
6. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.<br />
2.02 MONOLIHIC GLASS<br />
A. (GL1): Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Condition A uncoated, Type I, Class 1, q3 quality,<br />
horizontally tempered, clear float glass.<br />
1. 1/4" thick; clear, tempered.<br />
2.03 MIRROR GLASS<br />
A. (GL4): Tempered Mirror Glass: ASTM C1048, Condition A uncoated, Type I, Class 1, q3 quality,<br />
horizontally tempered, clear float glass before silver coating is applied.<br />
1. 1/4" thick; Mirror glazing quality, tempered.<br />
2. Refer to drawings for locations for un-framed mirrors in Women’s Restroom and Back Bar<br />
areas.<br />
B. (GL5): One-way Mirror Glass: Refer to Section 08110 – Steel Doors and frames for one-way<br />
glass installed in steel door provided by Twin City Hardware under current Hardware Package.<br />
2.04 INSULATED GLASS<br />
A. (GL2): Insulated Glass Units: 1 inch thick unit constructed of 1/4 inch clear exterior light, 1/2<br />
inch air space, and 1/4 inch clear interior light. Low-emissivity coating on No. 2 surface. Both<br />
lights heat strengthened (tempered where necessary to comply with safety code requirements).<br />
1. Visible transmittance: 70 percent.<br />
2. Outside reflectance: 10 percent.<br />
3. Nighttime winter U-value: 0.29 BTU/hour/square foot. Maximum.<br />
4. Summer U-value: 0.26 BTU/hour/square foot. Maximum.<br />
5. Shading coefficient: 0.43. Maximum.<br />
6. Relative heat gain: 90 BTU/hour/square foot.<br />
7. Acceptable products:<br />
a. Viracon: VE1-2M.<br />
b. Comparable products of other specified manufacturers that meet or exceed<br />
performance characteristics of specified glass.<br />
B. (GL3): Insulated Spandrel Glass Units: 1 inch thick unit constructed of 1/4 inch clear exterior<br />
light with ceramic frit on No. 2 surface, 1/2 inch air space, and 1/4 inch clear interior light. Both<br />
lights heat strengthened (tempered where necessary to comply with safety code requirements).<br />
1. Ceramic Frit Color: Black.<br />
2.05 TINTED WINDOW FILM<br />
A. Manufacturers and Product:<br />
1. (TF1): 3M Sun Control Window Films.<br />
a. Product: Prestige Series, PR 70.<br />
b. Manufacturer: 3M Corporation; Renewable Energy Division; www.3m.com<br />
09-14-11 GLAZING<br />
08800 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
c. Contact: John Aguzino, 1-800-229-1566.<br />
B. Locations: Interior Entry Aluminum Door # 02, Patio Aluminum Doors # 15 and # 19; applied to<br />
interior surface of glass after signage is installed.<br />
2.06 GLAZING COMPOUNDS<br />
A. Manufacturers:<br />
1. Dow Corning Corp: www.dowcorning.com.<br />
2. GE Plastics: www.geplastics.com.<br />
3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.<br />
4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.<br />
B. Butyl Sealant: Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore<br />
A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning.<br />
C. Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of<br />
properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A,<br />
and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected.<br />
D. Coordinate compatibility of silicone sealants specified in section 07900 with sealants used for<br />
insulated glass edge seals.<br />
2.07 GLAZING ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.<br />
Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet<br />
space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.<br />
B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.<br />
Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application,<br />
self-adhesive on one face.<br />
C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15<br />
Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size as required; black color.<br />
D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM<br />
C 864 Option I; Black color.<br />
E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.<br />
F. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting<br />
mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with<br />
glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.<br />
G. Mirror Clips: Manufacturers standard top and bottom mirror clips fabricated to mechanically<br />
fasten mirrors to wall surface and allow for removal of mirrors.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.<br />
B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may<br />
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.<br />
B. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.<br />
C. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.<br />
09-14-11 GLAZING<br />
08800 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
D. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)<br />
A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.<br />
B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to<br />
attain full contact.<br />
C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous<br />
contact.<br />
3.04 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING)<br />
A. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing<br />
junctions with butyl sealant.<br />
B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.<br />
C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full<br />
contact.<br />
D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous<br />
contact.<br />
E. Trim protruding tape edge.<br />
3.05 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)<br />
A. Install Owner supplied 1/4 inch logo glass as indicated on the Drawings.<br />
B. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm)<br />
above sight line.<br />
C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.<br />
D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.<br />
E. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.<br />
F. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous<br />
contact.<br />
G. Knife trim protruding tape.<br />
3.06 MIRROR INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and with<br />
referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner that avoids<br />
distorting reflected images.<br />
B. Wall-Mounted Mirrors: Install mirrors with mastic and/or mirror clips as applicable. Attach<br />
mirror hardware securely to mounting surfaces with mechanical fasteners installed with anchors<br />
or inserts as applicable. Install fasteners so heads do not impose point loads on backs of<br />
mirrors.<br />
1. Mirror Clips: Place a felt or plastic pad between mirror and each clip to prevent spalling of<br />
mirror edges. Locate clips so they are symmetrically placed and evenly spaced.<br />
2. Install mastic as follows:<br />
a. Apply mastic to comply with mastic manufacturer's written instructions for coverage and<br />
to allow air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.<br />
b. After mastic is applied, align mirrors and press into place while maintaining a minimum<br />
air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting surface.<br />
C. Refer to Drawings for wood trim mirror frames.<br />
09-14-11 GLAZING<br />
08800 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.07 TINTED WINDOW FILM INSTALLATION<br />
A. Application: Apply window film using manufacturer’s trained and certified installers in strict<br />
accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.<br />
B. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel in proper cleaning of window surface after installation in<br />
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.<br />
3.08 CLEANING<br />
A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.<br />
B. Remove labels after Work is complete.<br />
C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
09-14-11 GLAZING<br />
08800 -5
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 09260 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Metal framing.<br />
B. Metal framing components for suspended gypsum board ceilings.<br />
C. Standard gypsum board.<br />
D. Mold resistant gypsum board.<br />
E. Cement backer board.<br />
F. Joint treatment and accessories.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Exterior wall wind-load-bearing metal stud<br />
framing and related soffit framing.<br />
B. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry: Exterior load bearing wood stud framing and sheathing.<br />
C. Section 07212 – Board and Batt Insulation: for fiberglass insulation used as acoustic insulation.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. ANSI A108.11 - American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer<br />
Units.<br />
B. ANSI A118.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units.<br />
C. ASTM A 641 - Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.<br />
D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or<br />
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.<br />
E. ASTM C 36/C 36M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard.<br />
F. ASTM C 475/C 475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing<br />
Gypsum Board.<br />
G. ASTM C 645 - Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members.<br />
H. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive<br />
Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products.<br />
I. ASTM C 840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.<br />
J. ASTM C 1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the<br />
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.<br />
K. ASTM C 1396/C 1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.<br />
L. ASTM D 3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of<br />
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber.<br />
M. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building<br />
Construction.<br />
N. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association.<br />
04-27-11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES<br />
09260 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated<br />
assemblies.<br />
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and<br />
finishing.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS<br />
A. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size<br />
and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum<br />
deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf.<br />
1. Exception: The minimum metal thickness and section properties requirements of ASTM C<br />
645 are waived provided steel of 40 ksi minimum yield strength is used, the metal is<br />
continuously dimpled, the effective thickness is at least twice the base metal thickness, and<br />
maximum stud heights are determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 72 using<br />
assemblies specified by ASTM C 754.<br />
2. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.<br />
3. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.<br />
4. Insulation Furring: Z shaped for use with board insulation, 1 1/2 inch.<br />
B. Partition Head To Structure Connections: Provide track fastened to structure with legs of<br />
sufficient length to accommodate deflection, for friction fit of studs cut short and fastened as<br />
indicated on drawings.<br />
C. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that<br />
accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing<br />
rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition.<br />
1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity<br />
required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American<br />
Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.<br />
2. Material: ASTM A 653/A 653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped<br />
galvanized coating.<br />
2.02 SUSPENDED CEILING COMPONENTS<br />
A. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 12 gauge wire.<br />
B. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch.<br />
C. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 18 gauge wire.<br />
D. Ceiling Channels: 0.0312-inch, (20 Gauge) base metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch wide<br />
flanges.<br />
1. Depth: 2-1/2 inch.<br />
E. Furring Channels: Hat-Shaped, 2-9/16 inch wide with 1-1/4 inch face.<br />
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch, (25 Gauge).<br />
2. Depth: 7/8 inch or 1-1/2 inch, as indicated on Drawings.<br />
2.03 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:<br />
1. G-P Gypsum Corporation: www.gp.com.<br />
2. National Gypsum Company: www.nationalgypsum.com.<br />
3. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.<br />
4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.<br />
04-27-11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES<br />
09260 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. Gypsum Board - All Types: Complying with applicable requirements of ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.<br />
C. (GYB1) Standard Gypsum Board: Not Used<br />
D. (GYB2) Mold and Moisture-Resistant Gypsum Board: With moisture and mold-resistant core<br />
and surfaces to comply with ASTM D 3273.<br />
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.<br />
2. Long Edges: Tapered.<br />
3. Manufacturers and Products:<br />
a. USG Corporation: Sheetrock Brand “Mold Tough” Gypsum Panels.<br />
b. National Gypsum Company: XP Gypsum Board.<br />
c. G-P Gypsum Corporation: “Mold-Guard Gypsum Board.<br />
2.04 CEMENT BACKER BOARD<br />
A. (GYB5) Cement Backer Board: ANSI A118.9, aggregated Portland cement panels with glass<br />
fiber mesh embedded in front and back surfaces.<br />
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.<br />
2. Manufacturers and Products:<br />
a. USG Corporation: Durock.<br />
b. National Gypsum: Permabase.<br />
3. Location: At Kitchen and Toilet walls. Refer to Wall Types.<br />
2.05 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Corner Beads: Galvanized steel.<br />
B. Edge Trim: Vinyl tape style beads and as detailed.<br />
C. Control Joint: Zinc, v-groove with tape flanges.<br />
D. Joint Materials: ASTM C 475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project<br />
conditions.<br />
1. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.<br />
2. Chemical hardening type compound.<br />
E. Joint Tape:<br />
1. Standard Paper Tape: 2 inch wide.<br />
a. Interior Gypsum Wallboard except specific products indicated below that require<br />
fiberglass tape.<br />
2. Fiberglass Tape: self-adhesive, glass-fiber mesh. Sheetrock Brand Fiberglass Drywall<br />
Tape or comparable.<br />
a. Interior Mold and Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board.<br />
b. Cement Backer Board.<br />
F. Screws: ASTM C 1002; self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations.<br />
G. Anchorage to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws, and other metal supports, of type and size to<br />
suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.<br />
3.02 FRAMING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Metal Framing: Comply with ASTM C 754 and manufacturer's instructions.<br />
04-27-11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES<br />
09260 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. Studs: Space studs at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach extended leg top runner to structure, maintain<br />
clearance between top of studs and structure, and brace both flanges of studs with<br />
continuous bridging.<br />
2. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance<br />
between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical<br />
devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud<br />
connections; do not leave studs unattached to track.<br />
C. Openings: Reinforce openings as required for weight of doors or operable panels, using not<br />
less than double 20 gauge studs at jambs.<br />
D. Standard Wall Furring: Install at masonry walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more<br />
than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate<br />
channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center.<br />
E. Blocking: Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet<br />
accessories, and equipment. Comply with Section 06100 and Drawings for wood blocking.<br />
3.03 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION<br />
A. Acoustic Batt Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around<br />
electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.<br />
1. Refer to Section 07212 for batt insulation (INSUL1).<br />
B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
1. Place one bead continuously on substrate before installation of perimeter framing<br />
members.<br />
2. In non-fire-rated construction, seal around all penetrations by conduit, pipe, ducts, and<br />
rough-in boxes.<br />
3. Refer to Section 07900 for (SLNT2) sealant.<br />
C. Install acoustical treatment at interior partitions where indicated on the Drawings.<br />
3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION<br />
A. Comply with ASTM C 840 and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints,<br />
especially in highly visible locations.<br />
B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and<br />
edges occurring over firm bearing.<br />
C. Cement Backing Board: Install over framing members in locations as indicated on drawings,<br />
and in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's instructions.<br />
D. Installation on Framing: Use screws for attachment of all gypsum board.<br />
3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.<br />
1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls over 50 feet long and in accordance with the<br />
Drawings.<br />
B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.<br />
C. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.<br />
04-27-11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES<br />
09260 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.06 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD<br />
A. General: Tape and finish gypsum board surfaces, joints, interior angles, edge trim, control<br />
joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare<br />
gypsum board surfaces for final finish. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent<br />
surfaces.<br />
1. Apply materials strictly according to manufacturer's recommendations.<br />
2. Pre-fill open joints edges, and damaged surface areas.<br />
3. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not<br />
intended for tape.<br />
4. Finish joints to achieve uniformly smooth, true and satisfactory surface to receive paint or<br />
other scheduled finish material.<br />
5. Sand each coat, keeping sanding to a minimum to avoid raising nap on drywall board.<br />
B. Levels Gypsum Board Finish: as specified under ASTM C 840, and as summarized below:<br />
1. Level 0: (No Finish); Taping, finishing, and trim accessories, (cornerbeads, etc.) are not<br />
required.<br />
2. Level 1: (Tape set in compound); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint<br />
compound. Panel surfaces must be free of excess joint compound, but tool marks and<br />
ridges are acceptable.<br />
3. Level 2: (1 coat ); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and<br />
immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply one coat of the joint compound<br />
on fastener heads, and flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces must be free of excess<br />
joint compound, but tool marks and ridges are acceptable.<br />
4. Level 3: (2 coat); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and<br />
immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply one additional coat of the joint<br />
compound over the tape. Apply two separate coats of the joint compound over fastener<br />
heads and flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces and the joint compound must be<br />
smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.<br />
5. Level 4: (3 coat); At joints and interior angles, embed the tape in the joint compound and<br />
immediately apply the joint compound over the tape. Apply two additional separate coats of<br />
the joint compound over flat joints. Apply one additional coat of the joint compound over<br />
interior angles. Apply three separate coats of the joint compound over fastener heads and<br />
flanges of trim accessories. Panel surfaces and the joint compound must be smooth and<br />
free of tool marks and ridges. "Drywall primer" must be applied to surfaces before applying<br />
final decoration.<br />
6. Level 5: (Skim coat); Finish must be equal to Level 4 (embedding coat and three finish<br />
coats) plus a skim coat over the entire gypsum board surface. Surfaces must be smooth<br />
and free of tool marks and ridges.<br />
a. Note: Level 5 is considered a high-quality gypsum board finish and is recommended<br />
for areas that will receive glossy paint or that are subject to severe lighting conditions.<br />
3.07 GYPSUM BOARD FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE<br />
A. Level 1: Above finished ceilings concealed from view.<br />
B. Level 2: Utility areas and areas behind cabinetry.<br />
C. Level 4: Walls and ceilings scheduled to receive paint finish.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES<br />
09260 -5
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Ceramic Wall, Floor and Base Tile.<br />
B. Quarry Tile Floor and Base Tile.<br />
C. Mortar and Grout Materials.<br />
D. Accessory Materials.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.<br />
SECTION 09300 - TILE<br />
B. Section 08710 - Hardware: Thresholds at doors.<br />
C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: for wall substrate materials.<br />
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS<br />
A. ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series/A136.1 - American National Standard Specifications for the<br />
Installation of Ceramic Tile (Compendium).<br />
1. ANSI A108.1a - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile<br />
in the Wet-Set Method, with Portland Cement Mortar.<br />
2. ANSI A108.1b - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile<br />
on a Cured Portland Cement Mortar Setting Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement<br />
Mortar.<br />
3. ANSI A108.1c - Specifications for Contractors Option: Installation of Ceramic Tile in the<br />
Wet-Set Method with Portland Cement Mortar or Installation of Ceramic Tile on a Cured<br />
Portland Cement Mortar Bed with Dry-Set or Latex Portland Cement Mortar.<br />
4. ANSI A108.5 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile<br />
with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.<br />
5. ANSI A108.6 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile<br />
with Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy.<br />
6. ANSI A108.9 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile<br />
with Modified Epoxy Emulsion Mortar/Grout.<br />
7. ANSI A108.10 - American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Grout in<br />
Tilework.<br />
8. ANSI A118.4 - American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement<br />
Mortar.<br />
9. ANSI A118.7 - American National Standard Specifications for Polymer Modified Cement<br />
Grouts for Tile Installation.<br />
10. ANSI A118.8 - American National Standard Specifications for Modified Epoxy Emulsion<br />
Mortar/Grout.<br />
B. TCA (HB) - Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation; Tile Council of North America, Inc.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal<br />
methods, and polishes and waxes.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Maintain one copy of TCA Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site.<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5<br />
years of documented experience.<br />
09-15-11 TILE<br />
09300 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS<br />
A. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar<br />
materials.<br />
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Provide 10 sq. ft of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified.<br />
B. Provide 1 gallon of each floor cleaner.<br />
1. Epoxy grout haze cleaner: Legsolve-it.<br />
2. Heavy grout and stain remover: Texspar and Texspar Plus.<br />
3. Floor cleaner/sealer: Floorshine R20.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 TILE SUPPLIER<br />
2.01 TILE<br />
A. Tile components in this section are to be furnished by the General Contactor through RBC Tile<br />
& Stone.<br />
RBC Tile & Stone<br />
1820 Berkshire Lane North<br />
Plymouth, MN 55441<br />
763-559-5531<br />
A. Ceramic Floor, Wall and Base Tile: (CT)<br />
1. (CT1): 12” x 12” Floor and Wall Tile, Back Bay Iron Range, RBC # EQCP96-1212, Sparta.<br />
2. (CT2): 6” x 12” Cove Base Tile, BWW Super Black Textured, RBC # BW9235-COVE12,<br />
Black.<br />
3. (CT2a): 1” x 6” Cove Base Out Corner, BWW Super Black Textured, RBC # BW9235-<br />
COVE12OC, Black.<br />
1. (CT1): 12” x 12” Floor and Wall Tile, Back Bay Shoreview, RBC # EQLS06-1212, Fog.<br />
2. (CT2): 6” x 12” Cove Base Tile, Back Bay, RBC # 65B1-COVE12, Grain.<br />
3. (CT2a): 1” x 6” Cove Base Out Corner, Back Bay, RBC # 65B1-COVE12OC, Grain.<br />
4. (CT3): 4” x 4” Black Accent Tile, Back Bay “Trend”, RBC # BWTB35-44, Black.<br />
5. (CT4): 4” x 4” Yellow Accent Tile, Back Bay “Trend”, RBC # BWTB34-44, Yellow.<br />
6. (CT5): 6” x 26” Accent Tile, Back Bay “Nuevo Wood”, RBC # BW30- Birch.<br />
6. (CT5): Not Used.<br />
6. (CT5): 6” x 26” Accent Tile, Back Bay “Nuevo Wood”, RBC # BW31- Willow.<br />
8. Grout Joints: 1/8” to 3/16” wide.<br />
B. Quarry Tile Floor and Base Tile: (QT)<br />
1. (QT1): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile with abrasive surface, RBC # OT10A-66, Red.<br />
2. (QT2): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Base, RBC # 10-Q3565, Red.<br />
3. (QT2a): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Right Corner, RBC # 10-QCR3565, Red.<br />
4. (QT2b): 6” x 6” Quarry Tile Cove Left Corner, RBC # 10-QCL3565, Red.<br />
5. Grout Joints: 3/16” wide.<br />
2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS<br />
A. Manufacturers:<br />
1. Bostik USA- Hydroment, 800-726-7845.<br />
B. Mortar Bond Coat Materials:<br />
1. Latex-Portland Cement type: ANSI A118.4.<br />
a. Hydroment – Single Flex Modified Thinset – Gray.<br />
09-15-11 TILE<br />
09300 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.03 GROUT MATERIALS<br />
A. Manufacturers:<br />
1. Bostik USA – Hydroment, 800-726-7845.<br />
B. Standard Grout: Polymer modified cement grout, sanded, as specified in ANSI A118.7.<br />
1. Hydroment Standard Sanded Grout.<br />
2. Color: Char Black, H139S-25.<br />
3. Location: Use for all Ceramic Tile.<br />
C. Epoxy Grout: as specified in ANSI A118.3, water-cleanable, high heat and chemical resistant<br />
modified epoxy emulsion grout; use for floor and base applications in food preparation, bar and<br />
other areas as indicated on drawings.<br />
1. Hydroment Ezpoxy Grout.<br />
2. Color: Char Black, HY9300-404.<br />
3. Location: Use for all Quarry Tile.<br />
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS<br />
A. Waterproof Membrane System: complying with ANSI A118.10 and ANSI A118.12.<br />
1. Laticrete: 9235 Waterproof Membrane System.<br />
2. Bostik USA: Hydroment Black Top 90210.<br />
B. Cement Backer Board: As specified in Section 09260.<br />
C. (T3) Trim: Wall Corner Protection: use with tile in restrooms.<br />
1. Schluter Systems, Rondec RO 80 EB, brushed stainless finish.<br />
D. Cleaning Materials:<br />
1. Legge System: Walter G Legge Company, 444 Central Ave., Peekskill, NY 10566;<br />
800-345-3443; www.leggesystems.com<br />
a. Cementitious grout haze cleaner: Legge Grout Stripper.<br />
b. Epoxy grout haze cleaner: Legsolve-it.<br />
c. Heavy grout and stain remover: Texspar and Texspar Plus.<br />
d. Floor cleaner/sealer: Floorshine R20.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,<br />
are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.<br />
B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of<br />
setting materials to sub-floor surfaces.<br />
C. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Protect surrounding work from damage.<br />
B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.<br />
C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable<br />
flatness tolerances.<br />
D. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's<br />
instructions.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL<br />
A. Install tile and thresholds and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1<br />
through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations.<br />
09-15-11 TILE<br />
09300 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.<br />
C. Place thresholds at exposed tile edges.<br />
D. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases<br />
neatly. Align floor, base, and wall joints.<br />
E. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints<br />
watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.<br />
F. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.<br />
G. Install thresholds where indicated.<br />
H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.<br />
I. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.<br />
J. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.<br />
K. Grout tile joints.<br />
L. Clean tile using Legge system grout haze cleaning materials suitable for the grout type. Mix<br />
cleaning materials and apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using rotary<br />
scrubber and wet/dry vacuum.<br />
M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.<br />
3.04 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS<br />
A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F113, dryset<br />
or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated below.<br />
1. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook<br />
Method F122 with epoxy grout.<br />
2. Where epoxy grout is indicated, but not epoxy bond coat, install in accordance with TCA<br />
Handbook Method F115.<br />
3.05 INSTALLATION - WALL AND BASE TILE<br />
A. Install wall corner protection, (T3) Trim, at outside corners of tiled walls in Restrooms.<br />
B. Over cement backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W244.<br />
1. Where adjacent floors are installed with waterproof membrane, wrap membrane 4 inches<br />
up wall, behind base, and out from wall surface 16” unless noted otherwise. Use same tile<br />
installation method as for the floor.<br />
2. Use epoxy grout for base where adjacent floor installation uses epoxy grout.<br />
3.06 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.<br />
B. Apply floor cleaner/sealer.<br />
3.07 PROTECTION<br />
A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.<br />
B. Provide two layers of kraft paper over all tile and grout on floors. Tape down and stagger seams<br />
by half the width on second layer.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
09-15-11 TILE<br />
09300 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 09511 - SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.<br />
B. Acoustical units.<br />
C. Egg Crate Ceiling Panel.<br />
1.02 REFERENCES<br />
A. ASTM A 641, Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire.<br />
B. ASTM C 635 - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal<br />
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.<br />
C. ASTM C 636 - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for<br />
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels.<br />
D. ASTM E 580 - Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical<br />
Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint.<br />
E. ASTM E 1264 - Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.<br />
1.03 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other<br />
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC<br />
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS<br />
A. Manufacturers:<br />
1. USG Corporation: www.usg.com.<br />
B. Acoustical Units - General: ASTM E 1264, Class A.<br />
C. (ACT1) Acoustical Panels: Vinyl faced gypsum board, with the following characteristics:<br />
1. Manufacturer and Product: USG ClimaPlus Vinyl, Stipple 3270.<br />
2. Size: 24 x 48 inches.<br />
3. Thickness: 1/2 inches.<br />
4. Composition: Vinyl facing bonded to smooth gypsum board.<br />
5. Edge: Square.<br />
6. Surface Color: White.<br />
7. Surface Pattern: Fine textured, non-perforated.<br />
D. (ACT2) Acoustical Panels: Vinyl faced gypsum board, with the following characteristics:<br />
1. Manufacturer and Product: USG ClimaPlus Vinyl, Stipple 3260.<br />
2. Size: 24 x 24 inches.<br />
3. Thickness: 1/2 inches.<br />
4. Composition: Vinyl facing bonded to smooth gypsum board.<br />
5. Edge: Square.<br />
6. Surface Color: White.<br />
7. Surface Pattern: Fine textured, non-perforated.<br />
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS<br />
09511 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
E. (ACT3) Acoustical Panels: Mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III, with the following<br />
characteristics:<br />
1. Manufacturer and Product: USG, Radar ClimaPlus 2210.<br />
2. Size: 24 x 24 inches.<br />
3. Thickness: 5/8 inches.<br />
4. Composition: Wet felted.<br />
5. Edge: Square.<br />
6. Surface Color: White.<br />
7. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured.<br />
F. (ACT4) Acoustical Panels: Mineral fiber, ASTM E 1264 Type III, with the following<br />
characteristics:<br />
1. Manufacturer and Product: USG, Radar ClimaPlus 2210.<br />
2. Size: 24 x 24 inches.<br />
3. Thickness: 5/8 inches.<br />
4. Composition: Wet felted.<br />
5. Edge: Square.<br />
6. Surface Color: Flat Black, No. 205.<br />
7. Surface Pattern: Non-directional fissured.<br />
2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS<br />
A. (GRID1) Ceiling Suspension System: for (ACT1) and (ACT2); Light Duty grid system meeting<br />
requirements of ASTM C 635 when suspended at 4'-0" o.c. Exposed tee-grid, double web,<br />
aluminum system with 15/16" wide bottom flange.<br />
1. Finish on Suspension System: Baked enamel.<br />
a. Colors: White.<br />
2. Edge Molding: Angle type wall molding with nominal 2" mounting flange by 1" face flange<br />
and hemmed edges. Factory match suspension system finish.<br />
3. Hold Down Clips: Manufacturer’s standard.<br />
4. Acceptable Manufacturer’s and Products:<br />
a. USG; Donn AX Suspension System.<br />
B. (GRID2) Ceiling Suspension System: for (ACT3) and (ACT4); Intermediate Duty grid system<br />
meeting requirements of ASTM C 635 when suspended at 4'-0" o.c. Exposed tee-grid, double<br />
web, hot-dipped galvanized, cold rolled steel system with 15/16" wide bottom flange.<br />
1. Finish on Suspension System: Baked enamel.<br />
a. Colors: White and Black No. 205, in locations to match panel color.<br />
2. Edge Molding: Angle type wall molding with 1" mounting flange by 2" face flange and<br />
hemmed edges. Factory match suspension system finish.<br />
3. Hold Down Clips: Manufacturer’s standard.<br />
4. Acceptable Manufacturer’s and Products:<br />
a. USG; Donn DX/DXL Double Web Grid System.<br />
2.03 EGG CRATE CEILING PANEL<br />
A. Egg Crate Ceiling Panel: 1/2” x 1/2" x 3/8” thick, styrene plastic egg crate panel. 24” x 24”<br />
panel, Color Black.<br />
B. Manufacturers and Products:<br />
1. SLP Lighting; Tel. 800-248-0224; www.slplighting.com; TC500 black styrene eggcrate<br />
louver, 2 x 2.<br />
2. Intersource Specialties Company; 888-782-5011; www.intersourceco.com; Thincell TC –<br />
2 x 2 black styrene.<br />
3. Ridout Plastics Co, Inc.; 800-474-3688; www.eplastics.com; # B/EGG - .375 x 2 x 4 sheet,<br />
Black Styrene.<br />
4. Comparable products from other manufactures meeting specified requirements.<br />
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS<br />
09511 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.04 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application and ceiling<br />
system flatness requirement specified.<br />
B. Wire Hangers: Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.<br />
C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match suspension system units.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.<br />
B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEM<br />
A. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C 636, ASTM E 580, and manufacturer's<br />
instructions and as supplemented in this section.<br />
B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum<br />
deflection of 1:360.<br />
C. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.<br />
D. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other<br />
work.<br />
E. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where<br />
carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.<br />
F. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest<br />
affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.<br />
G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load<br />
to exceed deflection capability.<br />
H. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or<br />
support components independently.<br />
I. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.<br />
J. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with<br />
other interruptions.<br />
1. Use longest practical lengths.<br />
2. Overlap and rivet corners.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITS<br />
A. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to<br />
appearance and function.<br />
C. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.<br />
D. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.<br />
E. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.<br />
F. Cutting Acoustical Units:<br />
1. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.<br />
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS<br />
09511 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
G. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.<br />
H. Install hold-down clips on panels within 20 ft of public entrance and exit exterior doors.<br />
3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES<br />
A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.<br />
B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.<br />
3.05 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and<br />
suspension system members.<br />
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish<br />
damage.<br />
B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to<br />
permanently eliminate evidence of damage.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS<br />
09511 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Vinyl base.<br />
B. Vinyl Carpet / Tile Transition Strip – (T2).<br />
1.02 REFERENCES<br />
A. ASTM F 1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MATERIALS<br />
A. (RB) Resilient Base; ASTM F 1861, Type TV, vinyl, thermoplastic; top set Style A, coved<br />
base.<br />
1. Height: 6 inch.<br />
2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.<br />
3. Color: Black.<br />
4. Manufacturers:<br />
a. BurkeMercer Flooring Products: www.burkemercer.com<br />
b. Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com<br />
c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com<br />
d. Armstrong: www.armstrong.com/commflooringna/product_details.jsp?item_id=385<br />
e. VPI: www.vpicorp.com<br />
B. (T2) Transition Strip: Two component system with metal track and vinyl “T” moulding; for use<br />
at carpet / ceramic tile transitions.<br />
1. Track: 1-1/8” long aluminum track to hold “T” moulding; MTC-00-A.<br />
2. “T” Moulding: 1-1/2” wide, vinyl “T” moulding that inserts into aluminum track; CD-XX.<br />
a. Size: 5/16”<br />
b. Color: #40, Black.<br />
4. Manufacturer: Johnsonite, Inc.: www.johnsonite.com<br />
a. Comparable products from the other specified base manufacturers.<br />
2.02 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Resilient Base Adhesive: As recommended by material manufacturer for specific material,<br />
location and intended use.<br />
1. VPI No. 600 Acrylic Copolymer Wall Base Adhesive or comparable product from the other<br />
specified base manufacturers.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat and are ready to receive vinyl base.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION - BASE<br />
A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.<br />
B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use pre-molded units. At exposed ends, use premolded<br />
units.<br />
C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.<br />
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.<br />
09-15-11 RESILIENT FLOORING<br />
09650 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.02 INSTALLATION – TRANSITION STRIP (T2)<br />
A. Cut and fit track and moulding components to fit tightly to wall and other surfaces.<br />
B. Adhesively apply aluminum track to concrete substrate using adhesive as recommended by<br />
manufacturer.<br />
1. Install track so that long flange is under the carpet side of transition and the vertical edge of<br />
track is adjacent to the ceramic tile.<br />
a. Provide a 1/8” space between metal track and edge of ceramic tile. Fill space with<br />
clear silicone sealant.<br />
b. Carpet should butt tightly to other side of track.<br />
C. Install “T” moulding into track, pressing firmly along entire length of moulding.<br />
D. Verify that vinyl moulding covers tile and carpet completely along entire length.<br />
3.03 CLEANING<br />
A. Immediately after installation, remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces<br />
without damage.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
09-15-11 RESILIENT FLOORING<br />
09650 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
SECTION 09666 - SPECIALTY FLOORING<br />
A. Specialty resilient vinyl flooring with heat welded seams and cove base.<br />
1.02 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for watertight<br />
application.<br />
C. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials,<br />
and suggested schedule for cleaning.<br />
D. Manufacturer installation instructions for watertight applications along with required accessories.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. ASTM G-21 Bacteria & Mildew Resistance Excellent<br />
B. ASTM D-751 Breaking Strength (md) 405#<br />
C. ASTM D-751 Breaking Strength (cmd) 723#<br />
D. ASTM D-2407 Coefficient of Friction (avg) Dry.88<br />
E. ASTM D-695 Compressive Strength @ 20% Deformation 641 psi<br />
F. ASTM D-751 Elongation (md) 76.5%<br />
G. ASTM D-751 Elongation (cmd) 88.5%<br />
H. ASTM E-648 Critical Radiant Flux 1.052/cm2<br />
I. ASTM E-648 Burn Distance 12 cm<br />
J. Shore A Hardness 80-85 avg<br />
K. ASTM D-751 Tear Strength (md) 76.5#<br />
L. ASTM D-751 Tear Strength (cmd) 84#<br />
M. NFSI UWT-101A Coefficient of Friction Standard >.06<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Contractor will assure the compliance with 2.03 Job Conditions to allow for proper installation.<br />
B. Comply with governing codes and regulations.<br />
C. Use installers experienced in heat welding Protect-All flooring and approved by manufacturer.<br />
D. Manufacturer's product warranty shall be for a minimum of 10 years coverage.<br />
04-27-11 SPECIALTY FLOORING<br />
09666 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURER<br />
A. Oscoda Plastics: 5585 N. Huron Ave. P.O. Box 189 Oscoda, MI 48750<br />
Phone 800.544.9538<br />
Fax 989.739.1494<br />
e-mail: sales@oscodaplastics.com<br />
www.oscodaplastics.com<br />
2.02 MATERIALS<br />
A. (SPFL): Specialty Flooring: Protect-All® Specialty Flooring as Manufactured by Oscoda<br />
Plastics®, Inc.<br />
1. Protect-All® Specialty Flooring by Oscoda Plastics®, Inc. Sheets 5' x 5' or 5' x 8' x 1/4”<br />
thick in color chosen from manufacturer's samples.<br />
a. Finish: Matte finish.<br />
b. Color: Light Gray.<br />
2. Accessories:<br />
a. Protect-All® # 127 / # 139 Epoxy Adhesive.<br />
b. Protect-All Seam Welding Rod.<br />
c. Protect-All® 6” Cove Base and Preformed Corners.<br />
d. Protect-All® Aluminum Cove Base Cap.<br />
e. Stainless Steel Drain Rings As Provided By Protect-All®.<br />
f. Sealant provided by Protect-All®.<br />
g. Other installation materials as required and supplied by Oscoda Plastics®, Inc.<br />
2.03 VERIFICATION OF JOB CONDITIONS<br />
A. Proper substrate.<br />
1. Assure that the substrate material / system is suitable for installation of flooring as<br />
indicated by manufacturer.<br />
2. Follow recommendations for the use of curing compounds in concrete sub floors.<br />
3. If required, the installer will verify complete removal of existing finishes to the extent that<br />
proper adhesion will occur.<br />
4. Verify a clean and dry surface to accept adhesive.<br />
5. Use only Portland based patching / filling compounds.<br />
6. Assure that the levelness and smoothness of surface is in compliance with manufacturer<br />
guidelines.<br />
7. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing<br />
for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain<br />
instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring<br />
manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. Reference ASTM F 710 - Standard<br />
Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.<br />
B. Environmental Conditions.<br />
1. The contractor and installer of product shall be responsible for providing and maintaining a<br />
proper installation environment.<br />
2. Installation area must be enclosed and watertight with all walls, wall finishes, doors and<br />
floor penetrations in place.<br />
3. Proper acclimation of flooring material is required prior to installation. Minimum of 48 hours.<br />
4. Assure confinement of space during installation and curing of adhesives to prevent other<br />
trades from damaging the product or compromising the adhesion.<br />
5. Maintain a constant temperature during installation and throughout the curing of adhesives.<br />
6. Provide a secure area to store materials for installation.<br />
04-27-11 SPECIALTY FLOORING<br />
09666 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
C. Proper Drain and Other Floor Penetration Elevations.<br />
1. All drains to be installed level and 1/8” above surface of sub-floor.<br />
2. When “dishing” of drain area is specified, the “dish” should not be less than 12” in diameter<br />
and more than 1” in depth. Drain to be 1/8” above floor surface.<br />
3. All other penetrations should be installed 1/8” above surface and provide accommodation<br />
for proper sealant.<br />
4. Penetrations not terminating at floor surface shall be a minimum of 6” above the surface of<br />
floor and be installed in such a way as to not interfere with the installation of the flooring or<br />
the base material and allow adequate space for sealant to be applied to the entire<br />
perimeter.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install specialty flooring per manufacturer's installation requirements and recommendations.<br />
Assure proper conditions for successful performance and installation.<br />
B. Follow manufacturer recommendations for laying out sheets.<br />
C. Flooring shall be cut to within 1/8” of penetrations.<br />
D. Adhere the floor material using manufacturer's recommended adhesive for the particular<br />
substrate type / job conditions and in compliance with spread rate and proper trowel size. Roll<br />
floor into adhesive with 100# roller per manufacturer directions.<br />
E. Install stainless steel drain rings around all drains and other surface penetrations. Rings are to<br />
be routed into floor surface and mounted flush with top of flooring. Secure drain rings using<br />
stainless steel fasteners and lead anchors that will properly anchor the ring to the substrate.<br />
F. Install cove base as recommended by manufacturer with proper adhesive and top sealant.<br />
Heat-weld all seams.<br />
G. Install aluminum cove base cap fastening to wall a minimum of 8” on center using non -<br />
corrosive fasteners that are compatible to secure to wall type.<br />
H. Heat-weld all field material seams using manufacturer's welding rod using proper tools and<br />
installation methods as approved by manufacturer.<br />
I. Transitions in doorways will have stainless steel transitions as provided by manufacturer and<br />
will be routed flush with surface of sheet and fastened 6” on center using stainless steel<br />
fasteners and lead anchors.<br />
J. All exposed edges are to be sealed with manufacturer's recommended sealant to assure a<br />
water tight seal.<br />
3.02 CLEANING<br />
A. Sweep-clean the floor after installation and clear area of scrap materials. Installer shall provide<br />
two copies of manufacturer cleaning recommendations for contractor and owner use.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 SPECIALTY FLOORING<br />
09666 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 09680 - CARPET<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Carpet, direct-glued.<br />
B. Carpet base.<br />
C. Accessories.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 09300 - Tile: for metal floor transitions from carpet to tile.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials; Carpet and<br />
Rug Institute.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years<br />
experience.<br />
1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.<br />
B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during and 24 hours<br />
after installation.<br />
C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 CARPET MATERIALS<br />
A. (CPT1): Carpet: Custom Carpet for <strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong>.<br />
1. Mohawk, Broadloom, BWW 50545-37907.<br />
B. (Carpet Base): 6” high carpet base with hemmed top edges. Provide lengths required to carpet<br />
vendor.<br />
1. Mohawk, Broadloom, Spectrum V, BC246; Color: XJ7234, Black.<br />
2.02 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer.<br />
B. Adhesives:<br />
1. Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer.<br />
2. Contact Adhesive: For concrete substrate as recommended by carpet manufacturer.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify carpet backing and installation method used in the existing areas to be patched and<br />
matched. Notify Architect if installation method varies from that specified.<br />
B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding<br />
of adhesives to sub floor surfaces.<br />
04-27-11 CARPET<br />
09680 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Concrete substrate:<br />
1. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps.<br />
2. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler<br />
is cured.<br />
3. Clean substrate.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION - GENERAL<br />
A. Install carpet in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104.<br />
B. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.<br />
C. Lay out carpet:<br />
1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main<br />
traffic.<br />
2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings.<br />
3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent<br />
pieces.<br />
4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline.<br />
5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.<br />
D. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance.<br />
E. Coordinate with installation of metal floor Transition Strip, (T2), as specified under Section<br />
09300 – Tile.<br />
3.04 DIRECT-GLUED CARPET<br />
A. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed.<br />
Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately.<br />
B. Apply adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient open<br />
time, press carpet into adhesive.<br />
C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seam<br />
straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.<br />
D. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing.<br />
E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions.<br />
F. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges.<br />
3.05 CARPET BASE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Adhesively apply carpet base with hemmed edges up, to wall surface after floor carpet is<br />
installed. Fit joints tightly together.<br />
3.06 CLEANING<br />
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.<br />
B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 CARPET<br />
09680 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 09720 - WALL COVERING<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Installation of sheet linoleum wall covering in prefabricated panels.<br />
B. Panels prefabricated furnished by Owner's vendor.<br />
1.02 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature<br />
ranges required by the adhesive or wall covering product manufacturer.<br />
B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive and wall<br />
covering.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURER<br />
A. Forbo Flooring.<br />
2.02 MATERIALS<br />
A. (WC1): Forbo Marmoleum, Linoleum Wall Covering, conforming to the following:<br />
1. Pattern: Marmoleum Real.<br />
2. Color: #2939, Black.<br />
3. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to<br />
substrate.<br />
4. Substrate: 1/4 inch thick hardboard. Wall covering sheet mounted to substrate by Owner’s<br />
Millwork Vendor, installation by GC.<br />
A. (T4) Trim: Corner Guard; 1-1/2” x 1-1/2” x length as required, PVC corner guard.<br />
1. Color: Black.<br />
2. Locations: Outside corners of WC1 panels.<br />
3. Furnished by Owner’s Millwork Vendor, installation by GC.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and conform to<br />
requirements of the wall covering manufacturer.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install wallcovering panels with adhesive and hidden mechanical fasteners.<br />
B. Horizontal seams are not acceptable.<br />
C. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners.<br />
3.03 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants.<br />
B. Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 WALL COVERING<br />
09720 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Surface preparation.<br />
B. Field application exterior and interior painting systems.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 04810 - Face Brick (FBR) for paint color match.<br />
B. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Shop-primed items.<br />
C. Section 05210 - Metal Joists: Shop-primed items.<br />
D. Section 05310 - Metal Deck: Shop-primed items.<br />
E. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Shop-primed items.<br />
F. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Factory primed Fiber Cement Siding and Trim.<br />
G. Section 07240 - (EIFS1) for paint color match.<br />
H. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors: Field finished wood doors.<br />
I. Section 09900 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):<br />
40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for<br />
Architectural Coatings.<br />
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):<br />
1. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and<br />
Applications.<br />
2. ASTM D523: Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss.<br />
C. Master Painters Institute (MPI): www.paintinfo.com<br />
D. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA):<br />
1. PDCA P4: Responsibilities for Inspection and Acceptance of Surfaces Prior to Painting and<br />
Decorating.<br />
1.04 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Paint: Paint system materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers,<br />
and other applied materials whether used as primer, intermediate or finish coats, and of various<br />
degrees of opacity or sheen.<br />
B. Sheen: Specular gloss of paint finish as determined in accordance with The Master Painters<br />
Institute (MPI), Guide for use in Defining Gloss and Sheen Levels.<br />
1. Flat: refers to a lusterless or matte finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 1”.<br />
a. Gloss range below 5 units when measured at an 60-degree meter.<br />
b. Gloss range below 10 units when measured at an 85-degree meter.<br />
2. Eggshell: refers to low-sheen finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 2”.<br />
a. Gloss range below 10 units when measured at an 60-degree meter.<br />
b. Gloss range between 10 and 35 when measured at a 85-degree meter.<br />
3. Satin: refers to low-sheen finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 4”.<br />
a. Gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter.<br />
b. Gloss range 35 units minimum when measured at an 85-degree meter.<br />
PAINTS AND COATINGS<br />
09900 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
4. Semigloss: refers to medium-sheen finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 5”.<br />
a. Gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter.<br />
5. Full Gloss: refers to high-sheen finish; MPI Classification “Gloss Level 6”.<br />
a. Gloss range between 70 and 85 when measured at a 60-degree meter.<br />
C. Paint System (PS#): Two or more coats of paint, generally consisting of a prime coat and one<br />
or more coats of finish paint.<br />
1. Paint system includes surface preparation and required pre-treatment.<br />
D. Color (C#): Identified by a number after an abbreviation "C".<br />
1.05 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Color Samples: Submit for approval (2) two paper-backed samples, standard draw-down type,<br />
of each color and sheen combination indicated. Samples will be reviewed for sheen as well as<br />
for color.<br />
1. Clear or semi-transparent wood finishes if specified: Submit on wood specified, as a<br />
complete system with stain if any.<br />
C. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include primers and miscellaneous materials.<br />
1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials.<br />
a. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and<br />
application.<br />
b. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification<br />
and color number.<br />
2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis<br />
and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material.<br />
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Applicator's Qualifications: Firm experienced in application or installation of systems similar in<br />
complexity to those required for this Project.<br />
B. Regulatory Requirements: Products must meet current local and federal VOC requirements.<br />
C. Product Identification: Provide manufacturer's product identification on product containers same<br />
as that on final material list. In addition, provide color identification, analysis of contents,<br />
instructions for application and for reducing (if applicable) on containers.<br />
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.<br />
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand<br />
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and<br />
instructions for mixing and reducing.<br />
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90<br />
degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.<br />
1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Requirements: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for conditions<br />
under which paint systems can be applied, and the following:<br />
1. Maintain ambient temperature above 50 degrees F. during and 72 hours after installation.<br />
2. Apply water-borne paints when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding<br />
air temperature is between 50 degrees F. and 90 degrees F.<br />
3. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and the<br />
surrounding air temperature is between 45 degrees F. and 95 degrees F.<br />
PAINTS AND COATINGS<br />
09900 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
4. Do not apply paint in precipitation, fog or mist, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent,<br />
or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F. above dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.<br />
B. Do not apply paint systems in areas where dust is being generated.<br />
C. Do not apply coatings until moisture content of surface is within limitations recommended by<br />
paint manufacturer. Test with a moisture meter.<br />
D. Provide minimum lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.<br />
1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. See Section 01600 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.<br />
B. Extra Materials: Furnish (1) one gallon of each color for all major substrates for use by Owner.<br />
1. Label each container with substrate and color in addition to the manufacturer's label.<br />
2. Before Substantial Completion of Work, deliver extra materials to Project and store where<br />
directed.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Primers and Paints: Sherwin Williams Co. www.sherwin-williams.com<br />
B. Transparent Finishes: Minwax Co. www.minwax.com<br />
2.02 COLORS<br />
A. All color numbers are from Sherwin Williams unless noted otherwise.<br />
1. (C1): Color to match Ralph Lauren NA-36, “Steeple Chase”, Satin,<br />
SW: Color Accents Custom Formula:<br />
(B1)2Y41, (W1)10/32, (N1)2Y13+1, (R2)9/32, (Y3)41+01<br />
2. (C2): SW #6328, “Fireweed”, Satin.<br />
3. (C3): SW #6683, “Bee”, Satin.<br />
4. (C4): SW #6991, “Black”, Flat.<br />
5. (C5): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Satin.<br />
6. (C6): SW #7006, “Extra White”, Satin.<br />
7. (C7): SW #6683, “Bee”, Gloss.<br />
8. (C8): SW #6991, “Black Magic”, Semi-Gloss.<br />
9. (C9): SW #7055, “Enduring Bronze”, Semi-Gloss.<br />
Color to match Face Brick (FBR1) color, refer to Section 04810.<br />
10. (C10): SW #6117, “Smoky Topaz”, Semi-Gloss.<br />
Color to match (EIFS1) color, refer to Section 07240.<br />
11. (C11): SW #7055, “Enduring Bronze”, Semi-Gloss Epoxy.<br />
12. (C12): SW #7006, “Extra White”, Semi-Gloss Epoxy.<br />
13. (C13): SW #6898, “Social Butterfly”, Satin, Color match for (EIFS2).<br />
14. (C14): Clear Finish, Polyurethane Satin, Wood Doors.<br />
15. (C15): SW #6375, “Honeycomb”, Satin.<br />
2.03 MATERIALS<br />
A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one<br />
another, with factory-applied primers and with the substrates indicated under conditions of<br />
service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.<br />
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's specified paint material of the various coating types<br />
that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint<br />
material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification are not acceptable.<br />
PAINTS AND COATINGS<br />
09900 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:<br />
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the<br />
following:<br />
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for<br />
Architectural Coatings.<br />
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,<br />
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added<br />
at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
2.04 MIXING<br />
A. Mix and thin materials according to manufacturer's instructions without modification. Use<br />
premixed paints insofar as possible. Thin only as permitted by manufacturer's label instructions,<br />
and avoid unnecessary thinning.<br />
B. Primer Tint: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when<br />
multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish<br />
coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.<br />
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS<br />
A. Accessory Materials: Sealers, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically<br />
indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality.<br />
B. Patching Material: Latex filler.<br />
C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present,<br />
for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in<br />
PDCA P4.<br />
1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and<br />
surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly clean and dry.<br />
2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions<br />
within a particular area.<br />
B. Coordination of Work: Examine factory finished and primed surfaces to be painted, and verify<br />
compatibility of existing material with paint to be applied.<br />
1. Report incompatible or unsuitable materials immediately that may potentially affect proper<br />
application.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Protection: Protect surfaces not being painted concurrently, or surfaces not to be painted,<br />
property of Owner, and finished Work of other trades.<br />
1. Remove device plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and similar removable<br />
items before painting. Reinstall items after final coat of paint has dried.<br />
2. Apply masking over UL labels and other items that cannot be removed before painting<br />
surface.<br />
3. Cover floors and fixed equipment with drop cloths.<br />
4. Remove protective coverings and masking when painting of surfaces is complete.<br />
3.03 PREPARATION OF NEW SURFACES<br />
A. General:<br />
1. Clean and prepare surfaces according to paint manufacturer's written instructions for<br />
specific substrate.<br />
PAINTS AND COATINGS<br />
09900 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2. Mildew Removal: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate<br />
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.<br />
3. Apply paint only to surfaces which are thoroughly dry, clean, and free of dust and properly<br />
prepared to receive intended finish.<br />
B. Concrete: Remove dirt, scale, powder, laitance, parting compounds, oil and grease. For cast-inplace<br />
work, allow at least 14 days (after forms are removed) before starting work.<br />
1. Removal of stains caused by weathering or corroding metals: Wash with sodium<br />
metasilicate solution after thoroughly wetting with potable water and allow to dry. Remove<br />
oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry.<br />
2. Filling surface pock marks and air holes: Fill with an approved exterior latex base prime<br />
and fill material. Thoroughly brush or rub over surface. Let dry for not less than 24 hours<br />
before painting.<br />
3. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds<br />
that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
C. Concrete Masonry Units: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, efflorescence or powder.<br />
1. Removal of stains caused by weathering or corroding metals: Wash with sodium<br />
metasilicate solution after thoroughly wetting with potable water and allow to dry.<br />
2. Thoroughly brush or rub specified block filler over concrete masonry units to fill all pock<br />
marks, air holes and other surface imperfections. Rub excess filler off surfaces and allow<br />
filler to dry for not less than 24 hours before painting.<br />
3. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds<br />
that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
D. Unprimed Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, rust, and other<br />
foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's<br />
recommendations. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or<br />
sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Immediately apply prime coat.<br />
E. Shop Primed Steel and Iron Surfaces: Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that<br />
have been damaged. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make<br />
touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.<br />
F. Galvanized Surfaces: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated<br />
from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote<br />
adhesion of subsequently applied paints.<br />
G. Aluminum: Remove surface contamination by steam, high pressure water, or solvent washing.<br />
Apply specified primer.<br />
H. Fiber Cement Siding and Trim: Sand factory primed surfaces, as necessary to remove surface<br />
defects. Wipe off surfaces to remove dust and dirt.<br />
1. Fill voids and nail holes with putty after installation. Sand filler smooth, level with surface.<br />
2. Prime cut edges and cutouts with specified primer. Touch-up bare spots in factory primer<br />
as necessary.<br />
I. Wood Products to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and minor grit prior to prime and<br />
subsequent coats. Spot coat knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Prior to its<br />
installation, apply backprime to exterior and interior woodwork as specified. Fill nail holes and<br />
fine cracks after primer has dried, sand filler smooth, level with surface.<br />
J. Wood Products to Receive Clear Finish: Sand, as necessary to remove surface defects, and<br />
remove dust.<br />
1. After stain is applied, set and fill exposed fastener heads with matching color filler. Sand<br />
smooth and level with surface, when dry.<br />
2. Back-prime non-exposed surfaces with sealer.<br />
3. Note: Seal top and bottom edges of wood doors with 2 coats of sealer.<br />
PAINTS AND COATINGS<br />
09900 -5
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
K. Gypsum Wallboard: Fill minor irregularities in gypsum board surface with joint compound. Sand<br />
smooth, level with surface, when dry. Avoid raising nap of paper. Remove dust prior to painting.<br />
L. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Prepare metal surfaces as specified for steel, galvanized<br />
metal, aluminum, as applicable to type of material scheduled to be painted.<br />
3.04 APPLICATION<br />
A. Apply materials according to manufacturer's instructions. Apply each coat at rate recommended<br />
by manufacturer for the type of surface and with a dry film thickness not less than that<br />
recommended.<br />
B. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. If undercoats or other conditions show through<br />
topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.<br />
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is<br />
applied.<br />
D. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior<br />
to applying next coat.<br />
3.05 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK<br />
A. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished.<br />
1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts,<br />
hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment<br />
occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas.<br />
3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from<br />
Project site.<br />
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by<br />
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.<br />
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of<br />
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, and leave in an undamaged<br />
condition.<br />
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or<br />
defaced painted surfaces.<br />
3.07 PAINTING SCHEDULES - GENERAL<br />
A. Painting schedules outline the primary paint systems required. For substrates and conditions<br />
not scheduled, provide paint systems recommended by paint manufacturers. Submit proposed<br />
paint material product data for approval.<br />
B. Location and colors related to paint systems specified herein are indicated on Drawings.<br />
C. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:<br />
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted.<br />
2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels.<br />
PAINTS AND COATINGS<br />
09900 -6
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.08 PAINT SYSTEMS SCHEDULE Indicated as (PS#)<br />
EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS<br />
PS-1: Concrete and Concrete Block; Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish.<br />
Primer: 1 coat, SW: “Loxon” Block Surfacer, A24W200.<br />
Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial High-Bild Catalyzed Epoxy, Semi-Gloss, B71 Series.<br />
PS-2: Fiber Cement Siding; Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish.<br />
Primer: 1 coat, SW: “Loxon” Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24W8300.<br />
Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial High-Bild Catalyzed Epoxy, Semi-Gloss, B71 Series.<br />
PS-3: Fiber Cement Siding; Satin Finish.<br />
Primer: 1 coat, SW: “Loxon” Concrete & Masonry Primer, A24W8300.<br />
Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic, Eg-Shel, B66-660.<br />
PS-4: Steel / Galvanized Steel; Semi-Gloss Finish.<br />
Primer: 1 coat, SW: Pro Industrial “Pro-Cryl” Universal Primer, B66-310.<br />
Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic, Semi-Gloss, B66-650.<br />
PS-5: Steel / Galvanized Steel; Gloss Finish.<br />
Primer: 1 coat, SW: Pro Industrial “Pro-Cryl” Universal Primer, B66-310.<br />
Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial Zero VOC Acrylic, Gloss, B66-600.<br />
PS-6: Steel / Galvanized Steel; Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish.<br />
Primer: 1 coat, Pro Industrial “Pro-Cryl” Universal Primer, B66-310.<br />
Finish: 2 coats, SW: Pro Industrial High-Bild Catalyzed Epoxy, Semi-Gloss, B71 Series.<br />
PS-7: Exterior Wood Sheathing; Epoxy Semi-Gloss Finish.<br />
Primer: 1 coat, SW: Multi-Purpose Latex Primer, B51-8000.<br />
Finish: 2 coat, SW: Pro Industrial High-Bild Catalyzed Epoxy, Semi-Gloss, B71 Series.<br />
Exterior Paint System Notes:<br />
1. Gas Piping: Paint exterior gas piping that runs on face of walls or exposed to view, the<br />
color of the surrounding substrate. Paint gas piping on roof, (C7) “Bee” unless local<br />
code requires another color.<br />
INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS<br />
PS-15: Gypsum Board; Satin Finish.<br />
Primer: 1 coat, ProMar 200 Interior Latex Primer, B28W8200.<br />
Finish: 2 coats, SW: ColorAccents Interior Latex Satin, Y38T-154.<br />
PS-16: HM Frames and Doors; Satin Finish.<br />
Primer: 1 coat, Pro Industrial “Pro-Cryl” Universal Primer, B66-310.<br />
Finish: 2 coats, SW: ColorAccents Interior Latex Satin, Y38T-154.<br />
PS-17: Steel, Dry Fall, Flat Finish.<br />
Primer: 1 coat, SW: Pro Industrial “Pro-Cryl” Universal Primer, B66-310.<br />
Finish: 2 coats, SW: Low VOC Waterborne Acrylic Dry Fall, Flat Back, B42B00081.<br />
PS-18: Wood, Paint, Satin Finish.<br />
Primer: 1 coat, SW: Multi-Purpose Latex Primer, B51-8000.<br />
Finish: 2 coats, SW: ColorAccents Interior Latex Satin, Y38T-154.<br />
PS-19: Wood, Clear, Satin Finish.<br />
Finish: 3 coats, Minwax: “Polycrylic” Water-Based Protective Finish, Satin.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
PAINTS AND COATINGS<br />
09900 -7
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Fire Department Lock Box.<br />
B. Pre-cast Concrete Splash Blocks.<br />
C. Anti-Graffiti Film.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
SECTION 10010 – MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Product Data: Submit product data for each product specified.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 RECESSED FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCK BOX<br />
A. Fire Department Lock Box: Recessed mounted, heavy duty key box and recessed mounting kit.<br />
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Knox Company; Phoenix, AZ; www.knoxbox.com<br />
2. Model: 3200 Series with, recessed mounting kit (RMK).<br />
3. Color: Dark Bronze.<br />
2.01 SURFACE MOUNTED FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCK BOX<br />
A. Fire Department Lock Box: Surface mounted, heavy duty key box.<br />
1. Acceptable Manufacturer: Knox Company; Phoenix, AZ; www.knoxbox.com<br />
2. Model: 3200 Series.<br />
3. Color: Dark Bronze.<br />
2.02 PRECAST CONCRETE SPLASH BLOCKS<br />
A. Provide precast concrete splash blocks at downspout locations as indicated on Drawings or as<br />
directed by Owner’s Site Representative.<br />
1. Provide splash blocks comparable to the following units: Standard concrete color.<br />
a. Aristone Designs; Splash Block SB37. 37” x 18-1/2” x 5”. Tel: 800-369-8118.<br />
www.aristonedesigns.com/watercat/scuppers.htm<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSTALLATION GENERAL<br />
A. Install specialties according to manufacturer's instructions. Locate as indicated on Drawings.<br />
B. Install specialties plumb, true and square, in a neat, rigid, and substantial manner.<br />
C. After installation, clean surfaces.<br />
3.02 FIRE DEPARTMENT LOCK BOX<br />
A. Recessed Mounting Kit: Install recessed mounting kit shell in masonry wall where indicated on<br />
Drawing according to manufacturer's recommended installation instructions.<br />
B. Fire Department Lock Box: Install Lock Box inside RMK shell according to manufacturer's<br />
installation instructions.<br />
A. Surface mount fire department lock box where indicated on Drawings according to<br />
manufacturer's installation instructions and at height above grade according to local Fire<br />
Marshal.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
09-20-11 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES<br />
10010 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 10210 - WALL LOUVERS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Exterior Wall Louvers and accessories.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 05400 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Prepared exterior wall opening.<br />
B. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry: Prepared exterior wall opening.<br />
C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. AMCA 511 - Certified Ratings Program for Air Control Devices; Air Movement and Control<br />
Association International, Inc.<br />
B. ASTM B 209 - .Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Product Data: Provide data describing design characteristics, maximum recommended air<br />
velocity, design free area, materials and finishes.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products of the type<br />
specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.<br />
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Coordinate work of this section with installation of mechanical ductwork.<br />
1.07 WARRANTY<br />
A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.<br />
B. Provide twenty year manufacturer warranty against distortion, metal degradation, and failure of<br />
connections.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Wall Louvers:<br />
1. Airline Louvers, Nystrom Building Products; Product LSA4W38: www.nystrom.com.<br />
B. Comparable products from the following manufacturers:<br />
1. The Airolite Company: www.airolite.com.<br />
2. Construction Specialties, Inc: www.c-sgroup.com.<br />
3. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.<br />
04-27-11 WALL LOUVERS<br />
10210 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.02 LOUVERS<br />
A. Louvers: Factory fabricated and assembled, complete with frame, mullions, and accessories;<br />
AMCA Certified under AMCA 511.<br />
1. Wind Load Resistance: Design to resist positive and negative wind load of 25 psf without<br />
damage or permanent deformation.<br />
B. Stationary Louvers: Horizontal blade, extruded aluminum construction.<br />
1. Free Area: 54 percent, minimum.<br />
2. Blades: Straight.<br />
3. Frame: 4 inches deep, channel profile; corner joints mitered and mechanically fastened,<br />
with continuous recessed caulking channel each side.<br />
4. Metal Thickness: Frame 0.081 inch; blades 0.081 inch.<br />
5. Finish: Manufacturer’s standard prime coat finish for field painting under Section 09900.<br />
6. Types: Verify with Mechanical Drawings.<br />
a. (LVR1): Intake Louvers<br />
b. (LVR2): Exhaust Louvers<br />
7. Screens: Provide insect screens at intake louvers and bird screens at exhaust louvers.<br />
2.03 MATERIALS<br />
A. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209.<br />
B. Bird Screen: Interwoven wire mesh of steel, 0.063 inch diameter wire, 1/2 inch open weave,<br />
diagonal design.<br />
C. Insect Screen: 18 x 16 size aluminum mesh.<br />
2.04 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Screen Frame: Frame of same material as louver, with reinforced corners; removable, screw<br />
attached; installed on inside face of louver frame.<br />
B. Fasteners and Anchors: Stainless steel.<br />
C. Flashings: Of same material as louver frame, formed to required shape, single length in one<br />
piece per location.<br />
D. Sealant: A type, as specified in Section 07900.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that prepared openings and flashings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions<br />
are as instructed by the louver manufacturer.<br />
B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install louver assembly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
B. Install louvers level and plumb.<br />
C. Install flashings and align louver assembly to ensure moisture shed from flashings and diversion<br />
of moisture to exterior.<br />
D. Secure louver frames in openings with concealed fasteners.<br />
E. Install perimeter sealant and backing rod in accordance with Section 07900.<br />
04-27-11 WALL LOUVERS<br />
10210 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.04 CLEANING<br />
A. Strip protective finish coverings.<br />
B. Clean surfaces and components.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 WALL LOUVERS<br />
10210 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 10263 - CORNER GUARDS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Surface-mounted wall corner guards.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.<br />
B. Section 09720 - Wall Covering.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 SURFACE MOUNTED CORNER GUARDS<br />
A. (WCG1) Wall Corner Guard: 2” x 2” x 48” long, 16 gauge, 304 stainless steel with radiused top<br />
edge.<br />
1. Locations and configuration as indicated on the Drawings.<br />
2.02 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Provide appropriate adhesive and accessories as required to properly complete corner guard<br />
installation.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that walls are in proper condition to receive installation of corner guards.<br />
1. Surface mounted corner guards must be installed after wall finishes have been completed.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install corner guards in compliance with manufacturer's written installation instructions.<br />
B. Surface Mounted Corner Guards: Fasten directly to finished wall surfaces using adhesive.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 CORNER GUARDS<br />
10263 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 10445 – DOOR AND ROOM SIGNS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Wall mounted handicap restroom signs.<br />
B. Door mounted restroom signs.<br />
1.02 REFERENCES<br />
A. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and<br />
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 SIGN SUPPLIER<br />
A. Door and Room Signs in this section to be furnished by the General Contactor through Twin<br />
City Hardware as part of the current BWW Door and Hardware Package.<br />
2.02 SIGN UNITS<br />
Twin City Hardware Company<br />
723 Hadley Avenue North<br />
Oakdale, MN 55128<br />
651-735-2200<br />
A. Handicap Restroom Wall Signs:<br />
1. (SIGN1): 6” x 9”, Handicap Wall Sign, black sign with engraved white letters and<br />
symbols and Braille coding. Product # SG 2521B, Women.<br />
2. (SIGN2): 6” x 9”, Handicap Wall Sign, black sign with engraved white letters and<br />
symbols and Braille coding. Product # SG 2511B, Men.<br />
3. Provide international and accessible symbols for men and women on toilet room signage.<br />
4. Mount center line of sign 60 inches above finished floor adjacent to the latch side of the<br />
restroom doors.<br />
B. Restroom Door Signs:<br />
1. (SIGN3): 4” x 16”, Door Sign, black sign with engraved white letters. Product # SG 2025B,<br />
“Women”.<br />
2. (SIGN4): 4” x 16”, Door Sign, black sign with engraved white letters. Product # SG 2015B,<br />
“Men”.<br />
3. Mount on restroom doors in location as indicated on Drawings.<br />
C. Mounting Tape: Double sided foam mounting tape.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that surfaces to receive signs have been finished, and that finishes are dry and correctly<br />
cured.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install room and door signs in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.<br />
B. Install signs with double sided mounting tape in locations as indicated on Drawings.<br />
C. Locate signs in accordance with approved ADAAG requirements.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 SIGNS<br />
10445 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Locker units with hinged doors.<br />
1. Indicated on Drawings as: (Lockers).<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
SECTION 10500 - LOCKERS<br />
A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers.<br />
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS<br />
A. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or<br />
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.<br />
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Protect locker finish and adjacent surfaces from damage.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Lockers:<br />
1. ASI Storage Solutions Inc; Product Specialty Traditional Wall Mount: www.asilockers.com<br />
2. Substitutions: See Section 01600 and equipment cutsheets.<br />
2.02 MATERIALS<br />
A. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M SS Grade 33/230, with G60/Z180 coating, stretcher leveled;<br />
to the following minimum thicknesses:<br />
1. Body and Shelf: 24 gage, 0.024 inch.<br />
2. Door Frame: 16 gage, 0.060 inch.<br />
3. Hinges: 16 gage.<br />
B. Accessories for Locker: 45" coat rod mounted under lockers.<br />
2.03 LOCKER UNITS<br />
A. Width: 12 inches.<br />
B. Depth: 18 inches.<br />
C. Height: 12 inches.<br />
D. Configuration: Double tier. 2 units high, 4 units wide.<br />
E. Mounting: Surface mounted.<br />
F. Ventilation Method: Door louvers.<br />
G. Frames: Formed channel shape, welded and ground flush, welded to body, resilient gaskets<br />
and latching for quiet operation.<br />
H. Number Plates: Provide rectangular shaped aluminum plates. Form numbers 1/2 inch high of<br />
block font style, in contrasting color.<br />
I. Form recess for operating handle and locking device.<br />
J. Finish edges smooth without burrs.<br />
04-27-11 LOCKERS<br />
10500 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.04 FINISHING<br />
A. Clean, degrease, and neutralize metal; prime and finish with one coat of baked enamel paint.<br />
1. Color: Gray #25.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
B. Install lockers plumb and square.<br />
C. Mount bottom of lockers at 60 inches a.f.f.<br />
C. Secure lockers with anchor devices to suit substrate materials. Minimum Pullout Force: 100 lb.<br />
D. Install accessories.<br />
3.02 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean locker interiors and exterior surfaces.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 LOCKERS<br />
10500 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Fire Extinguishers.<br />
B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets.<br />
C. Mounting Brackets.<br />
1.02 REFERENCES<br />
A. NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; National Fire Protection Association.<br />
B. UL (FPED) - Fire Protection Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc..<br />
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Conform to NFPA 10.<br />
B. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose<br />
specified and indicated.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Product Data: Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing<br />
mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware,<br />
cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.<br />
C. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.<br />
1.05 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate size and locations of fire extinguisher cabinets with wall depths.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories:<br />
1. JL Industries, Inc. www.jlindustries.com.<br />
2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. www.larsensmfg.com.<br />
3. Amerex Corporation. www.amerex-fire.com.<br />
4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.<br />
2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS<br />
A<br />
Wall Mounted Portable Fire Extinguishers: UL listed and bearing a UL label for type, rating, and<br />
classification and pressure indicating gauge as follows:<br />
B. (FE1): Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical<br />
1. UL Rating: 4A-80B:C.<br />
2. Capacity: 10 lbs.<br />
3. Manufacturer’s standard steel container. Red powder coat finish.<br />
C. (FE2): Class K Wet Chemical<br />
1. UL Rating: 2A:K.<br />
2. Capacity: 1.8 gallon/ 6 Liter.<br />
3. Manufacturer’s standard stainless steel container.<br />
04-27-11 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS<br />
10523 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS<br />
A. (FE1 CAB): Cabinet Mounted Portable Fire Extinguishers: Type (FE1) extinguisher.<br />
B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed.<br />
1. Trim: Returned to wall surface, with 2-1/2 inch projection, 1-3/4 inch wide rolled face.<br />
2. Form cabinet enclosure with right angle inside corners and seams. Form perimeter trim<br />
and door stiles. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth.<br />
3. Metal: Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch thick base metal.<br />
4. Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180<br />
degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon catch.<br />
5. Door Glazing: Full glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick heat strengthened. Set in resilient channel<br />
gasket glazing.<br />
6. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors.<br />
7. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Manufacturer’s standard finish to accept field<br />
painting under Section 09900.<br />
8. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel.<br />
2.04 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Wall Brackets: Provide metal wall brackets with strap and fasteners, of proper size for type and<br />
capacity of extinguishers, and as required for installation conditions. Extinguisher hooks are not<br />
acceptable to hang extinguishers.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install fire extinguishers, cabinets and mounting brackets in accordance with manufacturer’s<br />
written instructions, in locations indicated on the drawings and in compliance with requirements<br />
of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
B. Cabinets: Install fire extinguisher cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated.<br />
1. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.<br />
2. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films and clean interior and exterior<br />
surfaces.<br />
C. Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to structure, square and plumb. Hang fire extinguishers on<br />
brackets and use straps to prevent free swinging.<br />
1. Mounting Height: Typically mount bracket at 48” A.F.F. If mounted unit projects greater<br />
than 4” out from face of wall, mount bottom of unit no greater than 27” A.F.F.<br />
3.02 SCHEDULES<br />
A. Field locate extinguishers: Maximum travel distance to extinguisher from any point in the<br />
building of 75 feet.<br />
B. Check, recharge and reuse existing extinguishers that are functional. Furnish new extinguishers<br />
as required.<br />
C. Add extinguishers as required by local fire authority.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
04-27-11 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS<br />
10523 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 10536 - AWNINGS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Awnings furnished as part of the overall exterior signage package.<br />
1. Aluminum framing and fittings.<br />
2. Indicated on Drawings as: (Metal Awnings).<br />
1.02 REFERENCES<br />
A. ASTM B 210 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless<br />
Tubes.<br />
B. ASTM B 210M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless<br />
Tubes (Metric).<br />
C. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials<br />
D. NFPA 701 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Propagation of Textiles and Films.<br />
E. UL - Underwriters Laboratories Inc.<br />
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Awning materials, assembly and attachments to resist snow loads, positive and negative wind<br />
design loads of 40 lb/sq ft at any point without damage or permanent set.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Awnings:<br />
1. Lawrence Sign<br />
945 Pierce Butler Route, St. Paul, MN 55104: 651-488-6711, 800-998-8901.<br />
2. Federal Heath<br />
1128 Beville Road, Suite E, Daytona Beach, FL 32114: 386-255-1901, ext. 225.<br />
3. Philadelphia Sign<br />
707 West Spring Garden Street, Palmyra, NJ 08065: 800-355-1460.<br />
2.02 ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEM<br />
A. Framing: Rectangular and square, tubing, conforming to ASTM B 210 (ASTM B 210M).<br />
B. Frame Finish: Mill Finish.<br />
C. Fittings: Elbows, T-shapes, wall brackets; cast aluminum.<br />
D. Mounting: Brackets and flanges, with aluminum inserts for embedding into masonry.<br />
E. Splice Connectors: Concealed spigot; cast aluminum.<br />
F. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk stainless steel screws or bolts; consistent with design<br />
of system.<br />
2.03 COVERING MATERIALS<br />
Window awning material for this project has been changed from the <strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
prototype per comments from the Salt River Pima-Maricopa Indian Community Design<br />
Committee. Fabric awning to be replaced with Metal Panels similar to the Standing Seal Patio<br />
Roofing material. Color to be black. Yellow Checkers not permitted.<br />
Refer to the exterior elevations for additional specifications.<br />
AWNINGS<br />
10536 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
A. Manufacturer: Cooley Sign & Awning Products; 50 Esten Avenue, Pawtucket; RI, 02860.<br />
Tel: 800-992-0072. www.cooleygroup.com.<br />
B. Awning Fabric: Cooley “Weathertyte Lite” Acrylic Awning Fabric, Part # WTL-74DSBLK.<br />
www.weathertyte.com<br />
NOT USED – Reference exterior elevations for additional specifications<br />
C. Awning Paint: Awnings to be painted with 8” x 8” yellow squares, in configuration as indicated<br />
on Drawings and Exterior Sign Manual.<br />
NOT USED – Reference exterior elevations for additional specifications<br />
2.04 FABRICATION - FRAMING<br />
A. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes, for delivery to site.<br />
B. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured.<br />
C. Exposed Fastenings: Unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except<br />
where specifically noted otherwise.<br />
D. Supply components required for anchorage of framing. Fabricate anchors and related<br />
components of same material and finish as framing, except where specifically noted otherwise.<br />
2.05 FABRICATION - COVERING<br />
A. Manufacture covering in one piece wherever possible, sized and configured to suit framing.<br />
B. Seams, as required, to be heat sealed not sewn in accordance with fabricators requirements.<br />
C. Fabric Pattern Painting: 8” x 8” yellow squares.<br />
1. Clean Weathertyte Lite awning fabric with Speed Prep Cleaner.<br />
2. Apply base coat of 202 White with Flex Additive.<br />
3. Apply 2 coats of PMS #116C Yellow topcoat with Flex Additive.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that wall substrate anchors are acceptable and are ready to receive work.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Supply items required to be embedded in masonry with setting templates, to appropriate<br />
Sections.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION - FRAMING<br />
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.<br />
3.04 INSTALLATION - COVERING<br />
A. Install covering over framing members, stretched taut without creases or folds.<br />
B. Attach covering and fasten securely using fabricators staple-in system.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
AWNINGS<br />
10536 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 10810 - TOILET ACCESSORIES<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Toilet Accessories.<br />
B. Installation of Owner Furnished accessories.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 06100 – Rough Carpentry for wood blocking.<br />
B. Section 07900 – Joint Sealers.<br />
C. Section 08800 – Glazing for un-framed glass mirrors.<br />
D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.<br />
E. Section 09300 - Tile.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and<br />
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board.<br />
B. ASTM A 240/A 240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless<br />
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications.<br />
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Factory-apply strippable protective vinyl coating to sight-exposed surfaces after finishing of<br />
products; ship products in manufacturer's standard protective packaging.<br />
B. Storage and Protection: Store products in manufacturer's protective packaging until installation.<br />
1.05 WARRANTY<br />
A. See Section 01700 - Execution Requirements, for additional warranty requirements.<br />
B. Manufacturer's standard warranty against defects in product workmanship and materials.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 TOILET ACCESSORY SUPPLIER<br />
A. Toilet accessories in this section that are not indicated as Owner Furnished to be furnished by<br />
the General Contactor through Twin City Hardware as part of the current BWW Door and<br />
Hardware Package.<br />
2.02 MANUFACTURERS<br />
Twin City Hardware Company<br />
723 Hadley Avenue North<br />
Oakdale, MN 55128<br />
651-735-2200<br />
A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. www.bobrick.com<br />
B. Brey-Krause Manufacturing, 1209 West Lehigh Street, Bethlehem, PA.<br />
C. Koala Care Products, a Division of Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. www.koalabear.com<br />
09-20-11 TOILET ACCESSORIES<br />
10810 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.03 MATERIALS<br />
A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 18-8 alloy.<br />
2.04 TOILET ACCESSORIES<br />
The following toilet accessories are to be furnished by the General Contactor through Twin City<br />
Hardware as part of the current Hardware Package.<br />
A. (MIR1) Framed Mirrors: 1/2” x 1/2" x 1/2", 20 gauge, stainless steel channel framed mirror with<br />
1/4" thick tempered mirror glass.<br />
1. Brey-Krause Model T-1024-36-SS.<br />
2. Sizes: 24” w. x 36” h.<br />
B. (MIR2) Framed Mirrors: 1/2” x 1/2" x 1/2", 20 gauge, stainless steel channel framed laminated<br />
mirror fabricated with an interlayer of 1/32′′ thick vinyl bonded between two 1/8′′ thick sheets of<br />
No 1 quality polished plate glass with back silver coated and hermetically sealed with a uniform<br />
coating of electrolytic copper plating.<br />
1. Bobrick Model B1659, laminated glass.<br />
2. Size: 24” w. x 60” h.<br />
C. (SND) Sanitary Napkin Disposal: Surface mounted, 22 gauge, 304 stainless steel cabinet<br />
with access door and removable waste liner.<br />
1. Bobrick Model B270.<br />
D. (GB) Grab Bars: Brey-Krause Manufacturing.<br />
1. (GB1): D-7812-05-SS 18” long.<br />
2. (GB2): D-7816-05-SS 36” long.<br />
3. (GB3): D-7815-05-SS 42” long.<br />
E. (DCS) Diaper Changing Station: Koala, Model KD-200, wall mounted, horizontal.<br />
2.05 OWNER FURNISHED TOILET ACCESSORIES<br />
The following items are furnished by the Owner for Contractor installation:<br />
A. (SDISP) Soap Dispensers: Ecolab, Digitizer Handsoap Dispenser.<br />
B. (PTD) Paper Towel Cabinet:<br />
1. Tork, Intuition Hand Towel Roll Dispenser.<br />
OR<br />
2. Tork, Elevation H1 Matic Towel Dispenser.<br />
C. (TPD) Toilet Paper Holder: Tork, Bath Tissue Jumbo Roll Twin Dispenser.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verification of Conditions:<br />
1. Prepared openings are sized and located in accordance with shop drawings.<br />
2. Reinforcement and anchoring devices are correct type and are located in accordance with<br />
shop drawings.<br />
B. Installer's Examination:<br />
1. Beginning construction activities of this section before unacceptable conditions have been<br />
corrected is prohibited.<br />
2. Beginning construction activities of this section indicates installer's acceptance of<br />
conditions.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install toilet accessories in locations as indicated on Drawings.<br />
09-20-11 TOILET ACCESSORIES<br />
10810 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
B. Install toilet accessories plumb and level in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's<br />
written installation instructions.<br />
C. Locate toilet accessories at heights as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with<br />
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).<br />
3.03 CLEANING<br />
A. Remove manufacturer's protective vinyl coating from sight-exposed surfaces 24 hours before<br />
final inspection.<br />
B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
09-20-11 TOILET ACCESSORIES<br />
10810 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
SECTION 12493 - WINDOW SHADES<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Manually operated roller shades, furnished and installed by Owner.<br />
1. Indicated on Drawings as: (Window Shades).<br />
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION<br />
A. Manually operated, roller shade system designed, developed and manufactured as a totally<br />
integrated unit complete with supports, operating system, fascia components, and fabric shade<br />
cloth.<br />
1. Mounting: Inside mount, between gypsum board jambs. Regular roll with fascia.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES<br />
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):<br />
1. ASTM E84, "Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials".<br />
B. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA):<br />
1. NFPA 701 – Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Flame Resistant Textiles and Films.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Product Data: Submit the following.<br />
1. Manufacturer's written installation instructions.<br />
C. Warranty: Copy of twenty-five year fit-for-use warranty on shade cloth and mechanical<br />
components.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's qualified installers experienced in the installation of<br />
specified components similar in complexity to those required for this Project.<br />
B. Shade Cloth: Shade cloth must be FR rated under NFPA-701 Vertical Burn Test and be Class<br />
rated in accordance with ASTM E-84.<br />
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING<br />
A. Delivery: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's<br />
identification.<br />
B. Storage: Store materials in a cool dry place. Protect from damage and from the elements.<br />
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Requirements:<br />
1. Maintain ambient temperature above 60 degrees F during and at all times after installation.<br />
1.08 WARRANTY<br />
A. If any component of the hardware or shade cloth system fails in normal operation, it shall be<br />
repaired or replaced under the terms of a factory return warranty for a period of twenty-five (25)<br />
years. Operating chain is not included in this warranty.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. MechoShade Systems, Inc.; as distributed by Tegan Marketing, Inc. 763-475-1340 or 800-510-<br />
5836.<br />
10-24-11 WINDOW SHADES<br />
12493 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.02 MATERIALS<br />
A. Manually Operated Roller Shade System: MechoShade 5 consisting of the following<br />
components:<br />
1. Brackets and operating assembly consisting of 1/8" steel and molded Delrin. Bead chain<br />
drive operated Delrin drive bracket.<br />
2. Stainless Steel Chain: 90 lb. test, and hold-down brackets.<br />
3. Provide upper and lower stop limits.<br />
4. Shade Mounting System: extruded 6063T6 aluminum tube with a wall thickness of .100"<br />
with asymmetrically shaped channels in which a matching snap-on vinyl spline can be<br />
mounted.<br />
a. Spline and shade to be easily removable and replaceable without disassembling the<br />
hardware.<br />
b. Attachment of the shade band shall not be with adhesives or staples.<br />
5. Shades to be full width of windows as indicated. Splitting shades within one window will not<br />
be allowed.<br />
a. Provide lift assist mechanism for shades in excess of 5 pounds.<br />
b. Provide shade cloth clearance of 1/4" on idle end and 9/16" on the drive end.<br />
B. Shade Fabric: EuroTwill Shade Cloth; Series 6000.<br />
1. Fabric Color: No. 6012, “Charcoal”.<br />
2. Fabric to pass Class I Flame Spread per ASTM E-84 and large or small Vertical Burn<br />
Requirements of NFPA 701.<br />
2.03 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Aluminum Fascia Units: Manufacturer's standard “L” shaped, snap-on, extruded aluminum<br />
fascia units as follows:<br />
1. MechoShade SnapLoc Fascia, for regular roll installation mounted on front of shade roll.<br />
2. End Caps: Provide pre-finished end caps where mounting conditions expose outside of<br />
roller shade brackets.<br />
3. Fascia Finish: Both fascia units and end caps as applicable to be factory finished.<br />
a. Color: Clear anodized to match window frames.<br />
B. Chain Tension Pulley: Manufacturer's standard chain tension pulley.<br />
1. Color: Clear anodized.<br />
C. Provide mounting brackets and other components required for complete installation.<br />
2.04 FABRICATION<br />
A. Fabricate shades square with a snap-on spline for mechanical fastening directly to mounting<br />
tube. Staples and tape are not allowed.<br />
B. Provide a weighted hembar, heat sealed within the shade. No loose hembar will be allowed.<br />
C. Cut shade cloth by means of an edge-sealing hot-knife.<br />
D. Fabricate shade system with set stop positions at upper and lower limit points.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed<br />
and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion.<br />
1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable<br />
to installer.<br />
2. Beginning the installation indicates the installer accepts the substrate.<br />
10-24-11 WINDOW SHADES<br />
12493 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.02 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Coordinate with General Contractor for access to site and installation of window shades.<br />
A. Install shade units in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions.<br />
B. Install shades regular roll, with shade and fascia level and square on front and back of shade.<br />
C. Place lower shade limit so the shade stops 1 inch above window sill. Place upper limit at the<br />
point the hem bar meets the roll.<br />
D. Shade fabric to hang flat without buckling or distortion. The edges, when trimmed, should hang<br />
straight without curling or raveling.<br />
D. Mount chain tension pulley on window sill.<br />
3.03 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Adjust and balance system for smooth operation.<br />
B. Instruct the Owner’s personnel on the proper operating procedures and maintenance of the<br />
system.<br />
3.04 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean all visible surfaces and repair or replace any damaged items.<br />
B. Remove all debris caused by this installation.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
10-24-11 WINDOW SHADES<br />
12493 -3
SECTION 15010 – MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. General and Supplementary conditions within Division 0 and 1 are hereby incorporated<br />
and become part of these Specifications, covering all work in Division 15000, Mechanical.<br />
B. Before submitting a proposal on the project, the Contractor shall visit the site and<br />
familiarize themselves with the conditions and limitations affecting Division 15000 work.<br />
No additional costs to the Owner shall be allowed for items verifiable during site visits.<br />
C. Contractor shall provide sufficient workers and materials to keep pace with the<br />
construction schedule. Contractor shall place orders for equipment such that job progress<br />
is not slowed due to late delivery and shall confirm delivery dates with suppliers.<br />
D. The Contractor shall provide office space and storage for materials and equipment<br />
supplied as required. Location shall be as directed by the General Contractor or the<br />
Architect.<br />
E. Upon completion of the work shown and specified under Division 15000 and prior to final<br />
close out of the Project, the Contractor shall verify in writing that all systems are 100%<br />
complete and operating properly. This notification shall include copies of all<br />
Subcontractor notifications. Any system not operating properly at final inspection shall be<br />
immediately repaired and demonstrated to the Engineer.<br />
F. Rebates or credits provided by utility companies or equipment manufacturers shall be<br />
directly credited to the Owner.<br />
1.2 MECHANICAL PLANS<br />
A. The Mechanical Drawings and Specifications shall form a set of Plans for the mechanical<br />
work. Neither the Drawings nor the Specifications shall be complete without the other.<br />
Any item shown on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications shall be considered as<br />
shown and specified on both.<br />
B. Any questions regarding the intent of the Drawings or Specifications shall be brought to<br />
the Engineer’s attention as soon as possible. If direction from the Engineer cannot be<br />
obtained due to time or communication limitations, the greater quantity, higher quality or<br />
condition most favorable to the Owner shall be assumed. Contractor shall provide all<br />
labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for a complete and<br />
operational mechanical installation, as shown on the Drawings and called for in these<br />
Specifications.<br />
C. Drawings:<br />
1. Contractor shall become familiar with Architectural, Structural and Electrical<br />
Drawings and Specifications. Coordinate all shafts, chases, furred spaces,<br />
suspended ceilings, locations of equipment, etc.<br />
2. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate routing of all piping and ductwork within<br />
soffits provided by the General Contractor. The Mechanical Contractor shall<br />
provide all soffiting required to cover installations not coordinated or specifically<br />
approved by the Architect and Engineer.<br />
06/25/09 MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
15010-1
3. Mechanical Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show approximate<br />
location only. Placement of mechanical equipment and devices shall not interfere<br />
with locations or clearances of other trades’ materials or equipment.<br />
4. Dimensions given on the Drawings shall take precedence over scaled<br />
dimensions. Dimensions, whether given in figures or scaled, shall be verified in<br />
the field.<br />
5. Contractor shall verify that the equipment to be furnished under Contract will fit<br />
within the available space.<br />
6. Notify the Architect and Engineer of any discrepancies between Electrical,<br />
Architectural and Mechanical Drawings.<br />
7. Verify items such as door swings, window locations, casework, etc., before<br />
installing any mechanical equipment or devices. All devices conflicting with other<br />
trade’s work due to lack of coordination shall be relocated at no additional cost to<br />
the Owner.<br />
D. The following terms used in the Drawings and Specifications shall be defined as follows:<br />
1. Contractor: Shall mean Mechanical Contractor or any of their Subcontractors.<br />
2. Work: Shall mean labor and/or materials of the Mechanical Contractor or any of<br />
their Subcontractors.<br />
3. Furnish: Shall mean purchase, submit for Engineer approval, coordinate with<br />
Contract Documents and deliver to site in new, undamaged condition.<br />
4. Install: Shall mean to schedule for delivery, deliver or have delivered to the site,<br />
store as directed, protect from damage, set in place, make all necessary final<br />
connections, test as required and turn over to the Owner in full operating<br />
condition.<br />
5. Provide: Shall mean furnish and install.<br />
6. Connect: Shall mean to bring mechanical service and/or low voltage control<br />
wiring to equipment, make all final connections, provide all necessary<br />
miscellaneous materials required and do final check out to ensure proper<br />
equipment connections.<br />
E. CAD and Drawing Files:<br />
1. Mechanical CAD drawings by Engineer of Record for this Project are instruments<br />
of Engineer of Record for use solely with respect to this Project. During the<br />
course of the implementation of the Project, and with Engineer of Record<br />
approval, copies may be obtained of CAD drawings for the preparation of Shop<br />
Drawings. These CAD drawings shall not be used on other projects, for additions<br />
to this Project, or for completion of this Project by others. Any revisions,<br />
additions and/or deletions to these CAD drawings, either intentional or<br />
unintentional, shall be made at the full risk of the person(s) making such<br />
revisions, additions and/or deletions. Such person(s) shall hold harmless and<br />
indemnify Engineer of Record of any and all responsibilities and liabilities.<br />
2. CAD drawings files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc, shall be<br />
requested directly from the Architect.<br />
06/25/09 MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
15010-2
3. The cost for mechanical CAD drawing files, provided in AutoCAD, will be $50.00<br />
per sheet payable directly to Engineer of Record CAD files will be sent via email<br />
only.<br />
1.3 COORDINATION OF DRAWINGS<br />
A. Contractor shall submit a ¼-inch scale drawing to the Engineer indicating placement of all<br />
mechanical and electrical systems and equipment. Indicate proposed locations of all<br />
major equipment and materials, including but not limited to service equipment, exterior<br />
wall and foundation penetrations, fire-rated wall and floor penetrations, sizes and location<br />
of required concrete pads and bases, and mechanical/electrical equipment room layouts.<br />
This effort will require each trade to closely work together to produce a ¼=1’-0” set of<br />
coordination drawings for each area of the building.<br />
B. Coordinate scheduling and sequencing required for movement and positioning of large<br />
equipment into the building with all other Contractors to minimize impact on their work.<br />
C. This Contractor shall provide any and all input required to complete these drawings.<br />
1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT<br />
A. Materials:<br />
1. All materials shall be new and of the type and quality specified herein.<br />
2. Specific materials and equipment specified is intended to establish a minimum<br />
standard of required quality. Where specified materials and equipment fail to<br />
meet minimum standards of existing federal, state and local codes and<br />
ordinances, the governing codes and ordinances shall prevail.<br />
3. The Contractor shall provide all minor miscellaneous materials necessary for the<br />
complete mechanical installation.<br />
4. For materials and equipment specified by description only, the Contractor shall<br />
provide materials or equipment suitable for the purpose intended. These shall be<br />
in conformance with all governing codes, these Specifications and normal trade<br />
practice.<br />
5. For materials or equipment specified by manufacturer’s name and catalog<br />
number, the Contractor shall provide the item specified. The Contractor may<br />
submit materials and equipment for prior approval to the Engineer.<br />
6. Supply materials and equipment to the site in original packages, containers or<br />
crates insofar as is practical. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to schedule<br />
deliveries in accordance with the overall Project schedule. The Contractor shall<br />
closely coordinate all deliveries with other Contractors.<br />
7. Provide for proper receipt, handling, storage, and protection from the elements<br />
for all materials and equipment to be used on this Project so as to effectively<br />
prevent damage or deterioration. Materials or equipment sustaining damage or<br />
undue deterioration from any cause whatsoever shall be replaced or repaired by<br />
Contractor as required by the Engineer.<br />
06/25/09 MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
15010-3
8. The Contractor shall properly protect all equipment from damage during<br />
construction. Thoroughly clean all fixtures, equipment and other supplied<br />
materials. Make all necessary repairs and apply touch up paint as required prior<br />
to final inspection and contract close out.<br />
9. All materials and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.<br />
(UL). Materials and Equipment shall meet the UL requirements of each standard<br />
in every case where such a standard has been established for that particular type<br />
of material. Equipment shall be UL listed as an entire assembly or system.<br />
B. Prior Approvals<br />
1. All requests for prior approvals must be received by the Engineer at least seven<br />
working days prior to bid date. Applications for prior approval shall be considered<br />
only from Contractors submitting bids on the Project. Contractors shall determine<br />
whether materials receiving prior approval are actually in accordance with details<br />
of the Specifications.<br />
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all deficiencies that may exist from the<br />
use of substituted products or equipment, including all additional labor and<br />
materials required to complete the work. All dimensions and characteristics of<br />
substituted products shall be verified and coordinated with all affected trades and<br />
Subcontractors. Any required changes or modifications to the work of any other<br />
trade or Subcontractor incurred due to using accepted substituted products shall<br />
be coordinated and performed by this Contractor at no additional cost to the<br />
Owner.<br />
1.5 WORKMANSHIP AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES<br />
A. Installation of all materials specified herein shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike<br />
manner by workers experienced and skilled in the trade. Only the best quality<br />
workmanship will be accepted.<br />
B. The Contractor shall regularly clean their work area of debris. Removal of all Contractor<br />
generated debris and rubbish caused by their work shall be at the Contractor’s expense.<br />
C. Coordination:<br />
1. Contractor shall give careful consideration to work of other Contractors on the<br />
Project and shall organize work as detailed in the Contractor’s ¼=1’-0”<br />
coordination drawings so as to not interfere with or delay the work of other<br />
trades.<br />
2. Contractor shall consult all Architectural, Structural and Electrical Drawings and<br />
Specifications that apply for correlating information.<br />
3. Conflicts or interference with work of other trades shall be brought to the<br />
attention of the Engineer, in writing, before installation.<br />
4. Should the Contractor not follow above procedures and install work that<br />
interferes with work of other trades, the Contractor shall make all necessary<br />
changes as directed by Engineer to eliminate the interference or conflict at the<br />
Contractor’s expense.<br />
06/25/09 MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
15010-4
1.6 LICENSES, CODES AND FEES<br />
A. The Contractor shall be a licensed Contractor in the State of which project is being<br />
constructed. The Contractor shall employ all Licensed Professional Tradesmen required<br />
for each type of work covered under these Drawings and Specifications.<br />
B. The Contractor shall procure all necessary certificates and permits and pay all required<br />
fees. The Contractor shall pay all fees and installation charges by the utility company for<br />
the permanent services.<br />
C. Codes and Ordinances: All work and materials shall meet the requirements of national,<br />
state and local codes and ordinances, in every respect. This requirement shall not relieve<br />
the Contractor from meeting the requirements of Drawings and Specifications that may<br />
be in excess of all codes and ordinances and not contrary to them. Following is a partial<br />
list of governing codes and/or standards.<br />
1. WBC: Wisconsin Building Code<br />
2. WMC: Wisconsin Mechanical Code<br />
3. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code<br />
4. UPC: Uniform Plumbing Code<br />
5. NFPA NEC: National Electric Code<br />
6. UFC: Uniform Fire Code<br />
7. Building Facility Association, ANSI: Handicapped Code<br />
8. Applicable Federal Regulations<br />
9. International Building Code<br />
10. International Plumbing Code<br />
11. International Mechanical Code<br />
12. International Fire Code<br />
13. Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA)<br />
14. American Standards Association<br />
15. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)<br />
16. Contractor’s National Association<br />
D. Inspections: Regular inspections shall be requested by the Contractor to meet all state<br />
and local requirements. Contractor shall furnish a certificate of final inspection and<br />
approval from all enforcement agencies to the Owner.<br />
1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS<br />
A. The Contractor shall deliver two sets of Operation and Maintenance (O&M) manuals to<br />
the Engineer prior to final close out. O&M manuals shall consist of approved shop<br />
drawings, manufacturer’s bulletins, equipment manuals, a list of manufacturers with<br />
telephone numbers for all equipment that contains replaceable parts and all other data<br />
covering the care, maintenance and operation of each piece of furnished equipment.<br />
O&M manuals shall be neatly bound in 3-ring binders, contain an index and section tabs<br />
and be labeled with the Project name.<br />
B. Name, address, and telephone number of each Contractor and subcontractor installing<br />
equipment and systems, local representative for each item of equipment and each<br />
system. Table of contents shall correspond to the Specifications with the Section tab<br />
sheets placed before the respective Shop Drawings and operation and maintenance<br />
instructions.<br />
1. Warranties for more than 1 year shall be included in appropriate section.<br />
06/25/09 MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
15010-5
2. A maintenance and lubrication schedule shall include each motor, function,<br />
control location, fuse location, belt sizes type of lubricant, and rate of lubrication<br />
in accordance with manufacturer.<br />
3. A filter maintenance schedule shall include filter size and quantity for each unit,<br />
located by room number.<br />
1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TESTING<br />
A. The Contractor shall fully instruct the Owner in the operation of mechanical equipment<br />
prior to final close out. Contractor shall provide, without additional expense Owner,<br />
services of competent instructors who will give full instruction in the care, adjustment,<br />
operation and maintenance of all mechanical systems provided by this Contractor to<br />
Owner’s permanent employees. Instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the<br />
installation that they are to give instructions and shall be trained in operating theory, as<br />
well as in practical operation and maintenance work. Factory trained instructors shall be<br />
employed wherever they are available. Instruction shall be given during regular work<br />
week and at a time just prior to the time the equipment is accepted and turned over to<br />
Owner for regular operation.<br />
B. The Contractor or his representative shall provide a minimum of two (2) days instruction<br />
period for Owner’s personnel.<br />
C. Contractor shall test all equipment installed under this Specification and shall<br />
demonstrate its proper operation to the Engineer. No equipment shall be tested or<br />
operated for any purpose until it has been fully prepared, connected and made ready for<br />
normal operation. Damage to equipment due to improper or ill-timed operation or testing<br />
shall be repaired, at Contractor’s expense, before final inspection and acceptance.<br />
1.9 WARRANTY<br />
A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and equipment to be free of defects that may<br />
develop in any part of their work, caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment<br />
failures, for a minimum of one year from the date of final acceptance of the work or for as<br />
long as normal equipment manufacturer warranties are in effect from the date of final<br />
acceptance of the work.<br />
B. During the guarantee period, notification by letter, personal contact or telephone<br />
conversation of a problem with any mechanical system, shall cause the Contractor to<br />
respond within one week, making repairs or corrections as necessary. After all repairs<br />
and corrections are complete, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer.<br />
C. The Contractor shall agree to provide 24 hour service on call for emergency.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
Not Used<br />
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
Not Used<br />
END OF SECTION 15010<br />
06/25/09 MECHANICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
15010-6
SECTION 15050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Work included under this division shall consist of furnishing labor and materials<br />
necessary for the installation of the work called for under the Mechanical, Fire Sprinkler<br />
Protection, Temperature Control and Mechanical Test & Balance contracts as listed in<br />
the Instruction to Bidders, as specified, and as shown on Drawings to provide a complete,<br />
operable and approved system.<br />
1.2 REFERENCES<br />
A. The following is a partial list of related standards:<br />
1. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARt).<br />
2. American National Standard Institute (ANSI).<br />
3. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.<br />
(ASHRAE).<br />
4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).<br />
5. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE).<br />
6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).<br />
7. American Water Works Association (AWWA).<br />
8. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA).<br />
9. Cast Iron Soil pipe institute (CISPI).<br />
10. Manufacturer’s Standardization Society (MSS of the Valve and Fittings Industry,<br />
Inc.).<br />
11. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).<br />
12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).<br />
13. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI).<br />
14. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).<br />
15. Steel Tank Institute (STI).<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Where equipment is specified by manufacturer, brand name or catalog number, this shall<br />
establish the standard of quality and style of the product to be provided under the<br />
Contract.<br />
B. Where two or more units of the same kind of equipment are required, they shall be<br />
products of a single manufacturer. Mixing and matching of various manufacturer’s like or<br />
similar components shall not be permitted.<br />
C. The Contractor shall field verify and inspect existing buildings for connections to existing<br />
systems, equipment, and materials designated, on Drawings or in Specifications, to be<br />
used.<br />
D. The Contractor shall have full responsibility of component parts of the mechanical system<br />
to ensure that new equipment, integrated with existing equipment and systems, will<br />
perform and operate in accordance with requirements of the Specifications without<br />
excessive or unusual service or maintenance requirements.<br />
E. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying locations of such things as piping,<br />
ductwork, equipment, door swings, heights of cabinets and counters, etc., prior to the<br />
installation of any mechanical equipment. Installed mechanical work that interferes with<br />
06/25/09 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15050-1
the work of other trades shall be relocated by the Mechanical Contractor at no additional<br />
cost to the Owner.<br />
F. Contractors shall coordinate with all other trades and install their systems in the space<br />
provided/coordinated within the structure. Install systems and materials for ease of<br />
maintenance. Equipment arrangements shall provide at least the minimum clearances as<br />
recommended by equipment manufacturer to facilitate proper maintenance and servicing<br />
of system. Deviations in minimum clearance requirements shall be permitted only upon<br />
prior written authorization from the Architect/Engineer.<br />
PART 2.- PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 FIRE BARRIER PENETRATION SEALING SYSTEMS:<br />
A. Approved Supplier: Specialty Building Products or prior approved equivalent.<br />
B. Approved Manufacturers: 3M, Transco Products, Nelson Flameseal Systems, Tremco,<br />
Inc. or prior approved equivalent.<br />
C. Fire stopping materials shall conform to local building code requirements and shall be<br />
tested according to UL 1479 and ASTME-814 for through-penetration fire stop systems.<br />
D. Fire stopping materials shall be furnished by a supplier who specializes in the selection<br />
and furnishing of fire stopping materials for building systems.<br />
E. Contractor shall submit all fire stopping methods to Local Authorities for approval.<br />
Provide copies of all approved fire stopping methods to the Engineer. Seal all<br />
penetrations and sleeves through floors and fire walls with high temperature, fire rated<br />
sealant. Fire stop material shall be equal to 3M brand Fire Barrier Penetration System. In<br />
lieu of type system described above, modular component system equal to ProSet System<br />
Inc. or approved equal may be utilized. Install the appropriate concrete or wood<br />
penetration system as required by code.<br />
2.2 WALL, FLOOR, AND CEILING OPENINGS<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Contractor shall be responsible for exact sizes and locations of any chases<br />
and/or openings required for mechanical work.<br />
B. Chases and Openings:<br />
2.3 SLEEVES<br />
1. General Contractor shall leave chases and openings in walls, floors, ceilings, and<br />
partitions where shown on Drawings or otherwise necessary to receive<br />
mechanical work. It is this contractor’s responsibility to coordinate sizes and<br />
locations prior to framing or pouring.<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Provide sleeves in conjunction with water tight piping passing through concrete<br />
or masonry walls, partitions, and slabs.<br />
06/25/09 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15050-2
2. Sleeves shall extend 3” beyond the full thickness of walls and slabs and shall be<br />
at least 2 pipe diameters larger than or 2” larger than ducts piping passing<br />
through. Where piping with covering is installed, a minimum of I” shall be<br />
provided between outside of pipe covering and inside surface of the sleeve.<br />
B. Duct Sleeves:<br />
1. Material: Except as otherwise indicated, duct sleeves shall be constructed of<br />
minimum 22 gauge galvanized iron.<br />
2. Vertical Sleeves: Vertical duct sleeves through floors shall have space between<br />
duct and sleeve packed with an approved fire stop material flush with top of<br />
sleeve to make a fire rated and watertight joint. Insulated duct shall have foamed<br />
rubber insulation full length within sleeves.<br />
3. Placement: Set sheet metal sleeves for ductwork passing through floors above<br />
grade. Sleeve shall extend 3-inch above finished floor elevation. Sleeve shall be<br />
supported in place before floor is poured and shall be caulked to make a<br />
waterproof joint between floor and sleeve. Where more than one duct is passing<br />
through a floor slab above grade and one floor opening for all ducts is provided,<br />
sleeve shall be same size as the overall opening.<br />
4. Interior Sleeves: Ductwork through walls shall have soundproof packing in nonrated<br />
wall sleeves and an approved fire stop material in fire rated wall sleeves.<br />
Ducts passing through corridor walls not containing fire dampers shall be<br />
sleeved.<br />
5. Exterior Sleeves: Ductwork passing through exterior walls shall be sleeved and<br />
caulked watertight. Exterior ductwork shall be so installed as to pitch away from<br />
wall penetration a minimum of ¼-inch per foot.<br />
6. Fire Rated Wall and Floor Openings: Ductwork passing through fire rated walls<br />
and floors shall be provided with an Underwriters’ Laboratories listed duct and<br />
sleeve assembly. Duct and sleeve assembly shall meet or exceed fire rating of<br />
wall and floor through which the duct passes.<br />
C. Pipe sleeves<br />
1. Exterior Walls: Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe. Install sleeves in<br />
exterior walls and floors below grade with approved caulking between sleeves<br />
and piping to make it waterproof. Plastic sleeves shall not be used.<br />
2. Floors: Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe Vertical pipe sleeves through<br />
floors shall have space between pipe and sleeve packed with an approved fire<br />
stop material flush with top of sleeve to make a watertight and fire rated joint.<br />
3. Interior Sleeves: Sleeves shall be standard weight steel pipe. Piping through<br />
walls of adjacent rooms shall have soundproof packing in non-rated walls and an<br />
approved fire stop material in fire rated walls.<br />
4. Fire Rated Wall and Floor Openings: Piping passing through fire rated walls and<br />
floors shall be provided with an Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. listed pipe and<br />
pipe sleeve assembly. Pipe and pipe sleeve assembly shall meet or exceed fire<br />
rating of wall and floor which the pipe passes through.<br />
06/25/09 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15050-3
2.4 ACCESS PANELS<br />
A. The Contractor shall provide means of access for all equipment, smoke/fire dampers, fire<br />
damper, valves and fittings specified. Furnish wall and ceiling access panels as required<br />
to the General Contractor for installation. Access doors and panels required within rated<br />
separations shall carry the appropriate rating. Conform to Division 8 access panel<br />
specifications.<br />
PART 3. – EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verification of Conditions:<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
1. On-Site Review: Contractor shall visit site to become thoroughly acquainted with<br />
existing conditions of site and services.<br />
2. Existing Active Services: When encountered during construction, Contractor shall<br />
protect, brace or support pneumatic tubing, existing active sewers, water, gas,<br />
ductwork, or other services, where required, for proper execution of Work.<br />
3. Inactive Services: If encountered during construction, Contractor, as appropriate,<br />
shall cap or plug inactive pipes, ducts, and temperature control tubing or wiring at<br />
no additional cost to Owner.<br />
4. Responsibility: Liability for repairs or replacement of damaged or defective<br />
materials, including, but not limited to, property damage resulting from<br />
negligence or other causes, shall be the Contractor’s sole responsibility until<br />
work has been accepted by Architect/Engineer and Owner.<br />
A. Protection: After delivery, and before and after installation, equipment shall be protected<br />
against theft or damage.<br />
1. Contractor shall protect plumbing fixtures, metal heating enclosures and other<br />
equipment and all baked enamel or glazed surfaces from damage by covering or<br />
coating as recommended in Bulletin, “Handling and Care of Enameled Cast Iron<br />
Plumbing Fixtures”, issued by Plumbing Fixture Manufacturers Association or by<br />
other methods approved by Architect/Engineer.<br />
2. Coat polished or plate metal parts with Vaseline immediately after installation.<br />
Protect equipment outlets, pipe and conduit openings with temporary plugs, caps<br />
or burlap as required to prevent filling with construction dirt.<br />
3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL<br />
A. Excavation: Contractor shall perform excavation boring, drilling, back filling and<br />
compaction at required depth for installation of work indicated or specified.<br />
1. Excavated material not required or not suitable for backfilling shall be removed<br />
from site.<br />
2. Protect excavation by grading and pumping to keep space clear of water during<br />
construction.<br />
06/25/09 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15050-4
3. Provide shoring and sheeting as necessary for protection of work and safety of<br />
personnel. Protect bottom of excavation from frost.<br />
4. Excavation in rock shall be 8-inch below invert of pipe to be installed and shall be<br />
backfilled to a depth of 8-inch with clean, washed sand before pipe installation.<br />
5. Excavation terminating in unstable or organic material at pipe invert elevation<br />
shall be continued to 30-inch below pipe invert elevation and backfilled with pit<br />
run gravel to pipe invert. Soil boring reports are available for inspection at<br />
Architect’s office.<br />
6. Pipe installation in backfilled areas shall not occur until backfill is 2 feet above<br />
pipe invert, at which time backfill shall be excavated to proper depth, pipe<br />
installed, and backfill replaced as specified.<br />
7. All lines are to be properly capped to prevent the entrance of dirt or any other<br />
foreign matter. All debris and water shall be removed from the trench prior to final<br />
installation. Properly protect piping or ductwork until backfilling can be performed.<br />
Inspection of all installations by Local Inspection Authorities shall be completed<br />
prior to backfilling.<br />
B. Backfilling Under Floors and Slabs: Backfill areas below concrete slabs on grade in<br />
horizontal layers not to exceed 8-inch in depth and compact with approved equipment<br />
until dry density is not less than 95 percent of Standard Proctor Density.<br />
1. Backfill material shall be pit run gravel or coarse sand free of rubbish, compacted<br />
and leveled to receive slab. If natural earth is of similar structure with same<br />
material as specified above, no additional material will be required. Fill to raise<br />
sub-grades to required elevation shall be accomplished as specified above.<br />
2. Areas not below concrete or asphalt slabs and footings shall be backfilled with<br />
suitable excavated material, free of debris and rubbish.<br />
3. Carefully backfill to a point 6” above piping or ductwork and thoroughly tamp.<br />
Complete backfilling in 8” lifts and compact each layer to 98% standard proctor<br />
density. Restore surface to its original condition, i.e. grass, concrete, blacktop,<br />
etc.<br />
4. Contractor shall pay costs for testing of compacted backfill by an approved<br />
testing laboratory when tests are requested by Architect/Engineer.<br />
C. Back filling Outside: Backfill excavations below finished grades with materials similar to<br />
that removed in excavation, free from rubbish or other unsuitable material. Place backfill<br />
and compact as required to prevent settling.<br />
1. Backfilling shall be done to finished grades indicated on Drawings. If no finished<br />
grading is done in excavated areas, Contractor shall backfill to existing grades<br />
and restore surface to original condition.<br />
2. Compaction over ditches less than 3 feet in width and around walls and columns<br />
shall be done by the use of mechanical hand compactors.<br />
3. Contractor shall pay costs for testing of compacted backfill by an approved<br />
testing laboratory when tests are requested by Architect/Engineer.<br />
06/25/09 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15050-5
D. Pavement, Curb, and Sidewalk Replacement:<br />
1. Contractor shall be responsible for the replacement of existing Street pavement,<br />
curbs and sidewalks removed or damaged by Contractor or related<br />
subcontractors.<br />
2. Make necessary arrangements to perform such repairs and pay incurred costs in<br />
connection with said repairs, including amount in Bid.<br />
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING<br />
A. Cutting and patching shall be held to practical minimum consistent with good construction<br />
practice by properly locating and leaving sleeves and boxes, or notifying General<br />
Contractor of openings, where required, as construction progresses. All cutting and<br />
patching shall be done with the prior approval of the Architect/Engineer.<br />
1. Necessary cutting and patching of walls, floors, partitions and ceilings, as<br />
required for the proper installation of work under this Contract, shall be the sole<br />
responsibility of this Contractor. Perform cutting and patching in such a manner<br />
as to leave no visible trace and to return the part affected to the condition of<br />
undisturbed work. Cutting and patching shall be performed by individuals<br />
experienced, skilled, and licensed for the particular type of work involved. Inferior<br />
work will not be accepted.<br />
B. Pavements: Cutting of pavements shall be accomplished by saw cutting a minimum of<br />
½-inch deep prior to jack hammering. Contractor shall bore below pavement where<br />
indicated on Drawings or where required by Architect/Engineer.<br />
C. Existing Conditions: Patch pavements to match existing conditions. Labor and materials<br />
required to replace and rebuild parts cut or injured shall be furnished and installed by this<br />
Contractor.<br />
3.5 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Connection to Equipment Specified: Provide material and labor required to connect to the<br />
mechanical system of fixtures and equipment having mechanical connections and which<br />
are specified in other Sections or Divisions of the Specifications or furnished by<br />
Owner/Vendor.<br />
1. Provide piping supply connections with shut-off valves.<br />
2. Ductwork connections to equipment, diffusers, and appurtenances shall be made<br />
with flexible ductwork unless a solid connection is indicated.<br />
3. Drainage connections shall be properly trapped and vented.<br />
B. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide concrete pads for all floor mounted equipment.<br />
Pads shall be 4” thick and extend a minimum of 2” beyond equipment.<br />
C. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates:<br />
1. Where uncovered exposed pipes pass through floors, walls or ceilings in finished<br />
rooms and inside casework, fit with approved type chrome plated metal plate.<br />
2. Plastic escutcheon plates shall not be permitted.<br />
06/25/09 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15050-6
D. Mechanical Systems Painting: Exposed supporting iron and steel work, bare pipe, fittings,<br />
hangers, and supports shall be wire brushed, washed with mineral spirits to remove dirt<br />
and grease, and painted with one coat of metal primer followed by two finish coats of<br />
battleship gray paint.<br />
E. Concealed Equipment location: Location of motor operated equipment, furnished under<br />
this Contract, installed above ceiling shall be identified by placing a color coded thumb<br />
tack (or adhesive applied dot) in the ceiling directly below item noted. Identification colors<br />
shall be as follows:<br />
1. Exhaust Fans: Green<br />
2. Air Handling Units: Blue<br />
3. Control Valves: Yellow<br />
4. Shut-off Valves: Orange<br />
F. Chlorination of Domestic Water Lines: Contractor shall clean entire domestic water<br />
system in building, shall disinfect system in strict accordance with governing codes and<br />
State Health Department Requirements, and shall flush entire system clean with potable<br />
water.<br />
1. The piping system shall be flushed with clean, potable water until no dirty water<br />
appears at the points of outlet.<br />
2. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water-chlorine solution containing<br />
at least 50 parts per million of chlorine, and the system or part thereof shall be<br />
valved off and allowed to stand for 24 hours.<br />
3. The system or part thereof shall be filled with a water-chlorine solution containing<br />
at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and allowed to stand for 3 hours.<br />
4. Following the allowed standing time, the system shall be flushed with clean<br />
potable water until no chlorine remains in the water coming from the system.<br />
5. Contractor shall provide written certification to Architect/Engineer that<br />
chlorination and flushing of domestic water system has been completed.<br />
G. Filtration: At time of substantial completion, and prior to turning equipment over to Owner,<br />
Contractor shall install a complete set of unused, clean filters in each type of unit<br />
supplying filtered air to the building.<br />
3.6 PIPE IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. Exposed Piping: Bare and insulated, exposed new piping in Mechanical Rooms, and<br />
unfinished rooms shall be identified with labels, painted on using metal stencils. Stencils<br />
shall have 1-inch high letters and shall include a directional arrow 3-inch long by 1/2-inch<br />
wide, indication direction of flow. Color of stenciling shall be black lettering on a yellow<br />
background.<br />
1. Labels shall be located at each change in direction of pipe runs and at intervals<br />
not to exceed 20 feet.<br />
2. Setmark snap-on pipe markers by Seton Nameplate Corporation or snap-on pipe<br />
markers by W. H. Brady Company, which are similar to above stencil description<br />
shall be acceptable.<br />
06/25/09 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15050-7
B. Concealed Piping: Bare and insulated new piping running in ceilings and soffits shall be<br />
identified with labels painted on using metal stencils. Each stencil shall have 1-inch high<br />
letters and shall include a directional arrow 3-inch long by 1/2-inch wide. indicating<br />
direction of flow. Color of stenciling shall be black lettering on a yellow background.<br />
1. Labels shall be located at each change in direction of pipe runs and at intervals<br />
not to exceed 20 feet.<br />
2. Labels shall be located on each side of wall, partition and floor penetrations.<br />
3. Setmark snap-on pipe markers by Seton Nameplate Corporation or snap-on pipe<br />
markers by W. H. Brady Company, which are similar to above stencil description<br />
shall be acceptable.<br />
C. Pipe Markers: Contractor shall label the piping as follows:<br />
1. Condensate Drain CD<br />
2. Domestic Cold Water CW<br />
3. Domestic Hot Water HW<br />
4. Natural Gas G<br />
5. Fire Sprinkler FIRE<br />
D. Mechanical Room Piping Paint Schedule: Mechanical Contractor shall paint piping in<br />
mechanical rooms to match the following schedule (based on Devoe Paint Protective<br />
Color Guide):<br />
3.7 CLEANING<br />
System Color Devoe<br />
Fire Equipment Safety Red R-1,3 06<br />
Natural Gas Safety Blue R-1 08<br />
Domestic Hot Water Dark Green R-1,3 Custom Mixed<br />
Domestic Cold Water Dark Green C-i ,3ii<br />
1. Piping shall also have labels and flow directional arrows.<br />
2. Color Chart: Mechanical Contractor shall prepare and submit a minimum of 3<br />
color charts for approval prior to beginning painting of boiler room piping. Paint<br />
color selection numbers listed are Devoe and are listed for reference.<br />
3. Mechanical Room Piping: Paint in accordance with Specification Section 09900,<br />
Painting.<br />
A. Housekeeping, Cleaning and Storage: Remove from the building and site, scrap material,<br />
temporary building, packaging material, miscellaneous debris, and dirt on a regular<br />
schedule, or as required, and in accordance with Architect direction, to maintain building<br />
in a reasonably clean, workable condition during construction.<br />
1. Cutting oil and steel shavings shall be caught in a suitable container to ensure<br />
final finish material in building will not be marred or damaged.<br />
2. Upon completion of work and before final inspection, Contractor shall remove<br />
plaster, paint, rust, stickers, and shipping tags from installed equipment.<br />
3. Clean foreign matter from installed equipment and remove dirt and debris, in<br />
connection with work, from building.<br />
06/25/09 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15050-8
3.8 PRE-OPERATIONAL SYSTEM CLEANOUT<br />
A. Pre-Cleaning Chemicals: New piping systems and appurtenances shall be cleaned with a<br />
one percent solution of Ferrosol 345, neutral pH cleaner, or approved equal, to remove<br />
any iron deposits, oil-based coatings, mill scale and construction residues.<br />
1. Follow manufacturers’ directions regarding equipment.<br />
END OF SECTION 15050<br />
06/25/09 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15050-9
SECTION 15150 - PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. All piping materials and methods of construction and workmanship shall be provided as<br />
per the requirements of local codes and regulations.<br />
B. Lead pipes solders, flux, etc., are not allowed.<br />
C. The contractor is responsible for verifying all invert elevations with respect to building<br />
finished floor elevations and site provisions.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PIPING<br />
A. Below Grade Sanitary, Vent and Waste<br />
1. Bell and spigot cast iron piping and fittings ASTM A-74 with neoprene<br />
compression joints.<br />
2. Hub less cast iron pipe and joint system, with stainless steel bands or MG cast<br />
iron couplings, CISPI 301 -69T.<br />
B. Above Grade Sanitary, Vent and Waste<br />
1. Bell and spigot cast iron piping and fittings ASTM A-74 with neoprene<br />
compression joints.<br />
2. Hub less cast iron pipe and joint system, with stainless steel bands or MG cast<br />
iron couplings, CISPI 301-69T.<br />
3. ABS Schedule 40, ASTM D2661. Pipe and corresponding fitting installed per<br />
code limitations.<br />
C. Above Grade Domestic Water Piping (3” and smaller)<br />
1. Type “L” seamless hard temper copper tubing with wrought copper fittings, using<br />
95/5 solder or brazing.<br />
D. Natural Gas Piping<br />
1. Inside Building:<br />
a. Schedule 40 black steel with threaded fittings, ASTM A 53.<br />
b. Type L seamless soft copper, ASTM B 88 and copper fittings. Copper<br />
piping shall not be used if the gas contains more than an average of 0.3<br />
grains of hydrogen sulfide per 100 standard cubic of gas.<br />
c. Flexible Gas Piping System: Gastite System by TiteFlex (or Wardflex,<br />
approved equal) Plastic coated, 304 stainless steel flexible tubing.<br />
Installation of flexible gas piping must be performed by qualified installer<br />
06/25/09 PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15150-1
2.2 VALVES<br />
2. In Ceiling Air Plenum:<br />
who has successfully completed the manufacturer’s training. System<br />
must be installed with all of the flexible gas piping manufacturer’s valves,<br />
regulators, fittings, etc. The contractor must obtain specific local<br />
inspectors approval prior to installing the system.<br />
a. Schedule 40 black steel with standard weld butt fittings.<br />
b. Type L seamless soft copper and copper fittings. Copper piping shall not<br />
be used if the gas contains more than an average of 0.3 grains of<br />
hydrogen sulfide per 100 standard cubic of gas.<br />
c. All welded or brazed connections in air plenum ceilings and concealed<br />
spaces. Use no valves, threads, unions or connectors in these locations.<br />
Concealed gas piping in solid partitions shall be inside a Schedule 40<br />
black steel pipe sleeve capped at both ends and vented outside the<br />
building.<br />
3. Exterior Underground:<br />
a. PE (polyethylene) plastic and shall be marked “gas” and “ASTM D 2513”<br />
and shall be used with factory assembled steel riser.<br />
b. Type L seamless soft copper, ASTM B 88 shall be used with factory<br />
assembled steel riser. Copper piping shall not be used if the gas<br />
contains more than an average of 0.3 grains of hydrogen sulfide per 100<br />
standard cubic of gas.<br />
4. Exterior Aboveground:<br />
a. Schedule 40 black steel with threaded fittings, ASTM A 53.<br />
A. Acceptable Valve Manufacturers:<br />
1. Apollo, Powell, or approved equal, Crane, Jenkins, Watts, Mueller, (Powell)<br />
numbers shown).<br />
B. Gate Valves —Domestic Water Piping<br />
2 inches and Smaller: All bronze; #1 842, solder end.<br />
1. 4” and Larger: I .B.B.T; #1793, flanged.<br />
C. Check Valves —Domestic Water Piping<br />
1. 2-1/2 inches and Smaller: All bronze; #1 825, solder end.<br />
D. Ball Valves —Domestic Water Piping (use in lieu of gate valves only)<br />
1. All bronze, Watts #B-6000.<br />
E. Globe Valves —Domestic Water Piping<br />
1. 2-1/2 inches and Smaller—All Bronze; #1873, solder end.<br />
06/25/09 PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15150-2
2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS<br />
A. Acceptable backflow pre-venter Manufacturers:<br />
1. Clayton “CIa-Va Series “RP” or approved equal.<br />
B. Provide strainer with blow off valve immediately upstream from backflow.<br />
C. Extend drain piping to safe-waste over floor drain.<br />
2.4 GAS VALVES<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:<br />
1. DeZurik or approved equal.<br />
B. 2” and Smaller: No. 955 or DeZurik No. 425.<br />
C. 2-1/2” and Larger: Lubricated plug cock or DeZurick No. 425 Provide extended stems to<br />
accommodate insulation on insulated piping.<br />
D. Provide a natural gas pressure regulator equal to Maxitrol to reduce gas pressure to an<br />
acceptable limit at gas fired equipment. See plans for gas company meter outlet<br />
pressure. See mechanical equipment schedule for required capacities and operational<br />
manuals for pressure limits. Provide with code approved pressure limiting device or pipe<br />
pressure regulating valve relief vent individually to the outside. Verify with the local code<br />
authorities.<br />
E. Gas Solenoid Valves: Asco #K3A415, approved UL rated automatic gas shutoff valves.<br />
Normally closed, 24 volt with manual reset, sized to match gas piping service to<br />
equipment.<br />
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS VALVES:<br />
A. Solenoid Valve for Domestic Cold Water:<br />
1. Acceptable Manufactures: Gold, Jefferson, Burkert, Honeywell, W.E. Anderson.<br />
2. Gould Valve CD, or approved equal. Type M-3V, NPT, Full Port, 24 Volt,<br />
Normally open, UL listed.<br />
B. Drain Valves- Domestic Water Piping<br />
1. ¾“ hose bib, Chicago #151, rough brass.<br />
2. Equal to Apollo Series 78-1 00 ball valve, 600 pound, bronze body, chrome<br />
plated brass ball and blow-out proff brass stem, reinforced Teflon seals and<br />
seats and %“ hose thread outlet with cap.<br />
3. Domestic water drains shall be equipped with vacuum breakers.<br />
C. Thermostatic Mixing Valve: Leonard Model No. TM-186-8015-PRV, 1” inlets, 1¼” outlet.<br />
High-low manifold temperature control thermostatic controller with inlet checkstops. Wall<br />
support, outlet ball valve adjustable high temperature limit stop, removable cartridge with<br />
strainer, stainless steel piston and liquid fill thermal motor with bellows element mounted<br />
06/25/09 PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15150-3
out of water. Provide volume control shutoff valve, bimetal dial thermometer, brass pipe,<br />
fittings, and unions mounted to exposed cabinet panel; bottom supplies; top outlet. ½”<br />
bypass; minimum 1.0” gpm @ 10 psi drop and set at 40 gpm @ 10 psi drop; 120°F<br />
discharge temperature. Other acceptable manufacturers: Lawler, Bradley.<br />
PART 3. – EXECUTION<br />
3.1 A. Slope water piping 1” per 40’ and arrange to drain at all low points.<br />
B. All storm and sanitary piping sloped 1/8” per foot unless noted otherwise or if required to<br />
meet inverts. Notify engineer of any changes.<br />
C. All underground sewer pipe within 10 feet of buried water supply piping shall be<br />
constructed in accordance with State and/or Local Code.<br />
D. Provide all appropriate sanitary piping fittings, wyes and bends. No double-wye fittings for<br />
sanitary drainage in horizontal position shall be used.<br />
E. Vent pipes passing through roofs shall terminate at least 12” above the roof line.<br />
F. Above grade plastic drain and vent piping horizontal and vertical runs cannot exceed 35<br />
feet. Solvent welds shall be done with a contrasting primer to the color of the pipe and<br />
cement. Plastic piping shall not be installed in air plenum spaces including parking<br />
garage area.<br />
G. Contractor shall provide all sleeves required through footings, foundation walls and floors.<br />
Underground services shall be sleeved with schedule 40 PVC sleeving. Sleeve to be (1)<br />
size larger than the pipe it serves. Extend sleeves 0-3” beyond penetration. Coordinate<br />
with Structural Engineer.<br />
H. Provide shut-off valves as required by Code and good installation practice for the proper<br />
isolation of equipment. All branch take offs shall have isolation shut off valves. Provide<br />
extended stem valves where required for insulation. Except as otherwise specified or<br />
shown on plans, valves 2-1/2 inch and smaller shall have screwed end connections and<br />
valves 3 inch and larger shall have flange end construction. Install manual drain valves at<br />
every low point of each water piping system.<br />
I. Mechanical formed tees connections as created by T-Drill or approved equal shall be<br />
formed in a continuous operation consisting of drilling a pilot hole and drawing out the<br />
surface to form a collar having a height of not less than three times the thickness of the<br />
tube wall. Branch tube shall not obstruct the flow in the main line tube. All joints shall be<br />
brazed in accordance with the Copper Development Association. Soft soldered joints will<br />
not be permitted. Mechanical formed connections shall be listed by the International<br />
Plumbing Code, B.O.C.A., l.A.M.P.O., S.B.C.C., ASME Code for Pressure Piping and<br />
shall be acceptable to governing authorities.<br />
J. All threaded nozzle fixtures to have atmospheric vacuum breakers.<br />
K. Installation of cross connection control devices and related valves shall maintain 1 ‘-6”<br />
clear from wall or other obstructions, no more than 5’-O” above floor or closer than 2’-O”<br />
from floor.<br />
06/25/09 PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15150-4
L. Pipe Supports:<br />
1. Hangers shall adequately support the piping system and shall be installed to<br />
allow for expansion and contraction. Insulation shall be continuous and jackets<br />
shall be sealed tight at hangers. Provide neoprene rubber or rubber coated pad<br />
where un-insulated pipes rest on hangers.<br />
2. For multi-level wood floor construction allow for wood shrinkage and movement.<br />
Provide clearance for piping near wood construction. Provide expansion joints on<br />
vertical sanitary and storm stacks equal to Josam model #26200. For horizontal<br />
take-offs from stacks use no-hub connections and on the inlet side and seal of<br />
traps provide slip joints. All mechanical joints shall be accessible.<br />
M. Provide escutcheon plates at all wall, floor, or ceiling piping penetrations. This includes all<br />
mechanical piping systems. Escutcheon plates shall match the finish of the surrounding<br />
area.<br />
N. Exposed PVC venting through roof shall be painted at the discretion of the Architect.<br />
O. Provide a dielectric coupling at all connections of dissimilar metals. Provide adequate<br />
clearance for insulation and for access to valves. All piping shall be concealed and shall<br />
maintain proper clearances for ceilings, ducts, walls, lighting, etc. except that piping may<br />
be exposed in mechanical areas. At all fixture and equipment connections where nipples<br />
are necessary between copper fixtures and tubing, such nipples shall be full size brass<br />
nipples with brass or copper adapters.<br />
P. Provide shut-off valve for all gas fired equipment. Locate valve in an easily accessible<br />
location.<br />
Q. Gas Piping on Roof:<br />
1. Piping on roof shall be supported on polyethylene, high U.V. resistant Quick<br />
“Pipe” Blocks manufactured by Nelson-Olsen Inc. (Erico, E-Z Sleeper Block) or<br />
approved equal. Piping and blocking shall be installed to allow for expansion and<br />
contraction.<br />
2. Exposed steel gas piping shall be properly cleaned and shall be painted with one<br />
coat of red primer and two (2) coats of oil paint “Silver Gray” color. This painting<br />
is not necessary on galvanized surfaces.<br />
R. Viega Pro-Press system maybe used for copper piping, sizes 1/2”- 4” diameter, up to 200<br />
psi operating pressure and 250°F for joining copper tubing.<br />
S. Provide 1/2” ethafoam on all above grade vertical piping to all pipes and slab movement<br />
at wood floor penetrations.<br />
END OF SECTION 15150<br />
06/25/09 PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15150-5
SECTION 15200 – INSULATION<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Insulation shall be applied to clean dry piping and ductwork.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 A. Materials.<br />
1. All insulation shall have composite (insulation, jacket, and/or facing and adhesive<br />
used to adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation), fire and smoke hazard<br />
ratings as tested by Procedure ASTM E-84, NFPA 225 and U/LI 723 not<br />
exceeding Flame Spread 25 and Smoke Developed 50.<br />
2. Jacket and Facing Descriptions.<br />
B. Ductwork.<br />
C. Piping.<br />
a. All purpose vapor barrier jackets.<br />
b. VB vapor barrier, white kraft bonded to 1 mil aluminum foil, reinforced<br />
with glass yarn. Water vapor permeability 0.02 perms.<br />
c. FSK reinforced foil and paper (Foil Scrim Kraft). Aluminum foil (minimum<br />
0.75 mu thick) reinforced with fiberglass yard mesh and laminated to 40<br />
lbs. chemically treated fire resistant Kraft UL rated.<br />
1. External rigid board insulation shall be equal to Owens Corning 703 Series with<br />
FRK or ASJ (All Service Jacket) vapor barrier facing, 3 pound density fiberglass<br />
complete with non-combustible foil faced vapor barrier. Entire system shall be UL<br />
listed.<br />
a. 0.030 thick PVC preformed jackets with seams made for welding.<br />
b. 0.024 thick stucco embossed, smooth or corrugated pattern equal to<br />
Childers Products Company.<br />
2. Fiberglass blanket shall be 1 pound density, with factory applied type FSK jacket.<br />
Conductivity shall be 0.26 average maximum at mean temperature of 75°F.<br />
3. Provide galvanized steel shields at all pipe hangers on insulated piping except<br />
hot water heating piping where pipes bear directly on the clevis. Shields shall be<br />
16 gauge for pipes 4” and larger diameter and 20 gauge for smaller pipes.<br />
1. Piping shall be insulated with Manville (IMCOA, Owens-Corning, Knauf) “FLAME<br />
SAFE” fiber glass insulation, or approved equal. The insulation shall have an<br />
average thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.22 BTU in. per sq. ft. per °F. hour<br />
at mean temperature of 75°F.<br />
06/25/09 INSULATION<br />
15200-1
2. Exposed areas shall be furnished with factory applied “FLAME SAFE” All-<br />
Purpose Vapor barrier jacket.<br />
3. Concealed areas with factory applied “FLAME SAFE” VB (Vapor Barrier Jacket<br />
or All-Purpose Jacket).<br />
4. Fittings, valve bodies and flanges for pipe size 4” and smaller shall be provided<br />
with PVC jackets over fiberglass inserts.<br />
5. Armstrong (Rubatex, Halstead) Armaflex II flame retardant elastomeric thermal<br />
insulation, installed according to manufacturer’s recommendations and as<br />
allowed by Local Codes, shall be suitable for pipe temperatures between -40°<br />
and 2200.<br />
PART 3. – EXECUTION<br />
3.1 GENERAL<br />
A. Provide continuous vapor barrier over all seams.<br />
B. Apply insulation in thickness and type as follows or per applicable state energy code,<br />
whichever is greater:<br />
1. No external insulation for ductwork installed in areas open to the structure.<br />
2. Return Air Ducts: 3/4“ acoustical lining for all return ductwork within 10’-0” of any<br />
fan.<br />
3. Supply air ducts: 1” thickness glass fiberboards extended ten feet from handling<br />
unit discharge. 1” thickness glass fiber blanket may be used in lieu of board in<br />
concealed locations.<br />
4. Exhaust air ducts within 10 feet of exterior wall penetration: 1½” inch thickness<br />
glass fiberboards. 1½” thickness glass fiber blanket may be used in lieu of board<br />
in concealed locations.<br />
5. All ductwork in concealed plenum areas shall be insulated with 2” foil faced rigid<br />
board or wrap fiberglass insulation for ducts less than 1 square foot, larger that I<br />
square foot shall be insulated with 1½”.<br />
6. All individual room exhaust run outs shall be insulated with 1” wrapped insulation.<br />
C. Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork.<br />
D. Piping.<br />
1. See drawings for kitchen exhaust ductwork insulation requirements.<br />
1. On cold water piping all seam edges shall be additionally sealed with vapor<br />
barrier adhesive and ends wrapped with vapor barrier tape overlapped the<br />
adjacent jacket<br />
06/25/09 INSULATION<br />
15200-2
2. Underground Piping, Direct Buried Outside Domestic and Fire Sprinkler Water<br />
Service, Sanitary and Storm Sewer:<br />
a. Styrofoam Brand as manufactured by Dow Chemical Company or<br />
approved equal. Product shall consist 1” extruded polystyrene closed<br />
cells, high moisture resistant, rigid foam. Insulation shall be two half<br />
sections for installation purposes. Insulated pipe shall be encased and<br />
sleeved with PVC Schedule 40 jacket at least 2” larger than the insulated<br />
pipe.<br />
b. Flat Styrofoam rigid board installed over piping. See detail on plan.<br />
3. Domestic Water Piping:<br />
a. Domestic re-circulating shall be insulated with 1” fiberglass.<br />
b. Apply fiberglass insulation in thickness as follows or per applicable State<br />
Energy Code, whichever is greater:<br />
(1) 1/2” thru 1” ½”<br />
(2) 11/4” thru 2” 1”<br />
(3) 2 1/2” and larger 1½”<br />
c. Pipe insulation not required for vertical risers located within insulated<br />
interior wall.<br />
4. All existing piping that may be exposed as a result of new work shall be re<br />
insulated to match existing.<br />
END OF SECTION 15200<br />
06/25/09 INSULATION<br />
15200-3
SECTION 15300 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (PERFORMANCE BASED)<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. The Contractor for the fire protection installation must be a qualified Fire Protection<br />
Contractor regularly engaged in the installation of automatic fire sprinkler systems.<br />
Provide a fire protection technician certified with the National Institute of Certified<br />
Engineering Technicians (NICET level IV), to certify direct and supervise the work or if<br />
required by governing authorities, a registered professional engineer.<br />
B. Codes and Standards:<br />
1. NFPA compliance: Install fire protection systems in accordance with the latest<br />
edition of NFPA 13 “Standard for the installation of Sprinkler Systems.”<br />
2. UL Compliance: Provide fire protection products in accordance with pre approval<br />
guide UL standards; provide UL label on each product.<br />
3. Fire Department/Marshal Compliance: Install fire protection systems in<br />
accordance with local and/or state regulations of fire department or fire marshal.<br />
4. Latest applicable State and Local Codes.<br />
5. City Water Department Compliance: The water service connection and sprinkler<br />
system valve assembly shall comply with all City Water Department<br />
Requirements.<br />
6. Obtain all required approvals and permits. Permits shall be obtained from the city<br />
or municipality in which the system will be installed. If permits are not issued by<br />
the city or municipality, a permit shall be obtained from the State Fire Marshal.<br />
C. Description of Work<br />
1. The Contractor is responsible for verifying with State, City and Local<br />
municipalities any and all code requirements related to the fire sprinkler system.<br />
2. Verify need, if applicable, to provide fire sprinkler protection in wood construction<br />
ceiling space with local inspectors. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to<br />
review all construction documents and verify with local inspectors the need for<br />
any special coverage, dry fire sprinkler protection for unheated spaces, pressure<br />
and flow requirements prior to submitting a bid. VERIFY EXISTING SITE<br />
CONDITIONS INCLUDING SERVICE SIZE AVAILABLE AND PRESSURE.<br />
PROVIDE FIRE PUMP INCLUDING ALL ELECTRICAL AS REQUIRED. AN<br />
ALTERNATE PRICE FOR THIS ITEM SHALL BE PROVIDED. IF UPON FINAL<br />
CALCULATIONS THE PUMP IS NOT NECESSARY, THE ALTERNATE PRICE<br />
WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. Additional compensation will not be allowed for<br />
modification to the bid documents to meet any additional code requirements.<br />
3. Provide all labor and materials and perform all operations required in connection<br />
with the installation of the fire extinguishing systems.<br />
4. For fire alarm system, provide audio/visual devices and connect to local and offsite<br />
alarms. Provide all wiring and make all connections. Provide auto-dialer and<br />
make connection to outgoing telephone point-of-connection. Coordinate with<br />
06/25/09 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (PERFORMANCE BASED)<br />
15300-1
Division 16 to determine if a Fire Alarm and Detection system is specified. If so,<br />
coordinate system connections.<br />
5. If applicable, Contractor shall verify kitchen exhaust hood fire suppression<br />
requirements with general contractor and kitchen design consultant. Contractor<br />
shall provide all water supply piping, sprinkler heads if required, valves, backflow<br />
protection, supervisory switches and related wiring.<br />
D. Submittal and Approvals<br />
1. Prepare drawings of fire protection systems indicating pipe sizes, pipe locations, head<br />
layouts and type, fittings, shutoff values, equipment, fire department connections, etc.<br />
The design, hydraulic calculations and subsequent drawings shall reflect all modifications<br />
and extensions to existing piping equipment and head layout. Indicate elevations, slopes,<br />
floor and wall penetrations, drains, etc.<br />
2. Submit to all Agencies having jurisdiction for approval. Submit to Owner insurance carrier<br />
for approval if required. AFTER THE DOCUMENTS HAVE BEEN APPROVED BY ALL<br />
REVIEWING AGENCIES, SUBMIT THE APPROVED COPIES BEARING STAMPS<br />
AND/OR SIGNATURES OF FIRE MARSHAL OR AGENCY HAVING JURISDICTION<br />
TO THE ARCHITECT FOR THEIR USE, BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH<br />
INSTALLATION.<br />
3. Submit pipe and sprinkler head layout, (shop drawings), to the Architect for their approval<br />
prior to installing any material. Allow ten (10) working days for review by the Architect.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 A. The following is a general guideline on types of sprinkler heads and their recommended<br />
usage. Final design will need to be approved by local inspector and coordinated with<br />
Architect and Owner.<br />
1. Decorative lobbies: Fully concealed sprinkler heads with only ceiling plate visible.<br />
Cover plate shall be factory finished in white.<br />
2. In all spaces with finished ceilings: Recessed chrome plated sprinkler.<br />
3. All areas where piping will be exposed without finished ceilings: Exposed<br />
sprinklers, brass finish.<br />
4. High areas with/finished ceilings: Exposed sprinklers, chrome finish with<br />
matching escutcheon.<br />
5. Areas exposed to high humidity or weather: Corrosion-proof (polyester coated)<br />
sprinklers with matching escutcheon.<br />
6. Extended coverage where possible, on concealed piping in areas with finished<br />
ceilings. Concealed type in decorative lobbies. Recessed in all other areas with<br />
finished ceilings, on concealed piping: Extended coverage sprinklers to be<br />
concealed with white cover plates in finished areas. Sidewall, recessed, white<br />
with white escutcheon for concealed piping and upright or pendent sprinklers with<br />
brass finish in areas with exposed piping.<br />
7. Decks, canopies, small unheated interior spaces and attics: Dry type sprinklers<br />
pendent, recessed concealed or horizontal sidewall, or fast response.<br />
06/25/09 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (PERFORMANCE BASED)<br />
15300-2
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 A. The design of the sprinkler system shall be dictated by the building construction and<br />
usage and as specified herein. Piping shall be concealed above suspended ceilings.<br />
1. The design and method of installation of the fire protection work shall be in<br />
accordance with Uniform Fire Code, UBC, International Building Code<br />
Standards, National Fire Protection Association Standards and National Fire<br />
Protection Association Standards that contain reference to or supplementary<br />
material on sprinkler systems along with the requirements of the Owner’s<br />
insurance authority, the State, and the Fire Department.<br />
2. The sprinkler systems shall be hydraulically calculated. Calculations shall<br />
conform to NFPA and UBCS 9-1.<br />
B. Coordination:<br />
1. The Contractor shall coordinate with the existing conditions, all other, building<br />
components, all new construction, and make all necessary modifications to the<br />
pipe routing before submitting for approval. Provide hydraulic calculations for all<br />
areas of the building including supplemental hydraulic calculations for all<br />
modification.<br />
a. Additional compensation will not be allowed for modifications to the bid<br />
documents for additional sprinklers, coordination, or for additional<br />
hydraulic calculations.<br />
b. Sprinkler head locations and all pipe routing shall be coordinated with all<br />
mechanical and electrical equipment and all structural and architectural<br />
components to avoid obstructions. All head locations shall be<br />
coordinated with architectural reflective ceiling plan.<br />
c. The Contractor shall carefully review all of the bid documents from all<br />
disciplines (architectural, structural, kitchen equipment, electrical and<br />
mechanical) and design the sprinkler systems to properly protect all<br />
areas of the facility.<br />
d. The sprinkler system shall be installed in a manner that is aesthetically<br />
unobtrusive, with all sprinkler heads symmetrically aligned and centered<br />
in lay-in ceiling tile. System shall not interfere with existing equipment<br />
and building components (clocks, speakers, lights, etc.), and is not to be<br />
subject to damage by the building occupants.<br />
END OF SECTION 15300<br />
06/25/09 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM (PERFORMANCE BASED)<br />
15300-3
SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Contractor shall provide all labor and materials to provide a complete plumbing and fuel<br />
system for all fixtures and equipment shown on drawings. Contractor shall rough-in and<br />
make final connections to all fixtures and appliances supplied by others.<br />
B. Contractor shall thoroughly review the manufacturer’s installation instructions prior to<br />
installing any piece of equipment or its associated service, (domestic drains, water piping,<br />
etc.). Any conflicts between the manufacturer’s installation instructions and the plans or<br />
specification shall be brought to the engineer at once for clarification. Contractor will not<br />
receive additional money for installations requiring modifications due to these conflicts.<br />
C. All plumbing systems shall meet State and Local codes as well as ADA requirements<br />
regardless of information shown within the documents.<br />
D. Gas Service: Make arrangements with the local gas company and pay all costs and fees<br />
for firm gas service including gas meter with shut off valve on each side of the meter.<br />
Verify exact location of gas meter and provide a gas shut off valve at the first accessible<br />
point within the building. Provide a gas pressure regulator and shut off valve in an easily<br />
accessible location at each appliance or unit of equipment as required and identify valve.<br />
Vent gas pressure regulators per code. Coordinate with all gas firing equipment including<br />
equipment supplied by others for gas pressure compatibility with the gas company.<br />
Contractor to provide gas company with a list of gas fired equipment and requirements.<br />
Coordinate gas pipe locations with all other trades.<br />
E. Water Service:<br />
1. Connect to Landlord provided 2” domestic water connection as shown on the<br />
plans. Provide backflow prevention at the Landlord connection. Provide shutoff<br />
valves at the connection point if not provided, (existing), by the Landlord. Verify<br />
the exact location of the Landlord connection in the field.<br />
F. Sanitary Service:<br />
1. Sanitary: Provide sanitary piping to Landlord provided sanitary main as shown<br />
on plans. Verify the exact location of the Landlord main prior to installing any<br />
piping.<br />
G. Grease Waste Connection:<br />
1. Provide grease waste connection to the grease interceptor located outside of the<br />
building. Provide piping back from the grease interceptor to the Landlord<br />
provided waste connection. Provide all vent piping for grease interceptor. Refer<br />
to plans for the location of the grease interceptor.<br />
10/28/11 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES<br />
15400-1
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 A. Miscellaneous Plumbing Equipment:<br />
1. Cleanouts:<br />
a. Floor cleanouts in finished areas shall be equal to Josam (Sioux Chief,<br />
Wade, Smith, Watts, Ancon, Zurn) Series 56000, with Nikaloy top.<br />
Provide carpet marker for carpeted floors. In unfinished areas, use<br />
Series 56000 floor cleanout with cast iron top. Install cleanouts at the<br />
bottom of all stacks, as indicated on drawings and as required by code.<br />
b. Bottom of stacks in unfinished areas shall be provided with a cleanout<br />
that has a plug with a seating flange, lead gasket and four square lugs<br />
for plug removal.<br />
c. Access cover for wall cleanouts in finished rooms shall be equal to<br />
Josam Series 58600 stainless steel round cover with screw.<br />
d. Clean-out plug or cover plates in walls shall not face public corridors or<br />
public areas.<br />
2. Roof Jacks:<br />
a. Terminate all vents stacks 12” above roof in a frost-proof galvanized roof<br />
jack. Use lead top on cast iron and vinyl top on PVC vent pipe.<br />
b. All vents thru roof shall be 3” unless otherwise noted.<br />
3. Floor Drains:<br />
a. Approved Manufacturers: Zurn, Josam, Wade, J.R. Smith.<br />
b. Floor drains located at ground level, utility rooms, etc. shall be Zurn<br />
ZN415M Dura-coated cast iron, adjustable, clamping collar, seepage<br />
openings with type-M polished nickel bronze strainer with extended rim<br />
for safe waste application.<br />
c. Floor drains: Safe waste use at non-traffic areas shall be Zurn ZN415E<br />
Dura-coated cast iron, adjustable, clamping collar, seepage openings<br />
with type-E polished nickel bronze strainer with extended rim for safe<br />
waste application.<br />
d. Floor drains used with trap primer shall be same as FD only drain casting<br />
tapped for trap primer.<br />
e. Floor drains in finished concrete shall be Zurn ZN415M Dura-coated cast<br />
iron, adjustable with flange, clamping collar, seepage openings and 5<br />
inch diameter nickel bronze strainer.<br />
4. Trench drain:<br />
a. Approved Manufacturers: AcoPolymer Products, Josam, Zurn, Jay R.<br />
Smith.<br />
10/28/11 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES<br />
15400-2
. Smith/Aco Polymer Products 9930 Series Enviro-Flo Drain system with a<br />
9870-430-ssm, class C, locking, heavy duty stainless steel grate. Provide<br />
pre-cast, pre-sloped and interlocking trench drain channels made from<br />
polyester resins and formulated aggregate with recesses for grating lockdowns<br />
molded into the channel walls to keep the grates from moving.<br />
c. Provide heavy cast iron, rectangular bar pattern grates in a steel frame<br />
with flat bar anchors and nailing clips. Provide the number of grating<br />
sections shown on the Drawings. Provide the steel frames to the General<br />
Contractor for setting in the poured concrete trench. Provide a non traffic<br />
area drain in the bottom of the poured concrete trench as shown and<br />
schedules on the Drawings.<br />
d. Trench drain and grates are provided by the General Contractor. Provide<br />
a no traffic area drain in the bottom of the poured concrete trench as<br />
shown on the drawings.<br />
5. Floor Sinks:<br />
a. Approved Manufacturers: Zurn Z538 Dura-coated cast iron deep sump<br />
body floor drain with 1/2” primer tap, square top and square loose set<br />
ductile iron gate with anti-tilt lugs.<br />
6. Shock Arrestors:<br />
a. Approved Manufacturers: Josam, Zurn, Sioux Chief.<br />
b. Josam Absorbatron II 75000-S with wrought copper shell. Provide where<br />
required by Code, on flush valve systems and on the piping to any<br />
laundry unit or dishwasher. Size as required.<br />
7. Trap Primers: (Provide as called out on plans)<br />
a. Approved Manufacturers: J.R. Smith, PPP, MIFAB, Sioux Chief or<br />
approved equal, Zurn, Wade, J.R. Smith, Josam.<br />
b. Zurn automatic trap primer Z-1022 all bronze body with integral vacuum<br />
breaker, non-liming internal operating assembly, strainer and gasketed<br />
bronze cover.<br />
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 GENERAL<br />
A. Provide shut off valve on all branch piping take offs. Locate as close as possible to main<br />
in an accessible location.<br />
B. Rough-in and make final connections for kitchen food service equipment furnished under<br />
another division of the specifications. Refer to schedule on drawings for specific<br />
requirements. Furnish cast brass “P’ traps with cleanouts and water supplies with loose<br />
key stops for all equipment. All exposed water piping shall be chrome plated brass.<br />
Where vent piping must be run exposed, install it within stainless steel sleeves.<br />
10/28/11 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES<br />
15400-3
C. Rough-in and make final connections for all equipment in addition to equipment specified<br />
in this section. Coordinate with supplier to obtain correct location and sizes prior to roughin.<br />
D. Avoid installing sanitary waste piping over any food preparation equipment and food<br />
storage area or provide protection from drips with a functional water-tight safe pan.<br />
E. Contractor shall coordinate all floor joist headers required for piping installation. Headers<br />
shall be done at contractor’s expense.<br />
END OF SECTION 15400<br />
10/28/11 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES<br />
15400-4
SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Contractor shall provide all labor and materials to provide a complete plumbing and fuel<br />
system for all fixtures and equipment shown on drawings. Contractor shall rough-in and<br />
make final connections to all fixtures and appliances supplied by others.<br />
B. Contractor shall thoroughly review the manufacturer’s installation instructions prior to<br />
installing any piece of equipment or its associated services, (domestic drains, water<br />
piping, etc.). Any conflicts between the manufacturer’s installation instructions and the<br />
plans or specification shall be brought to the engineer at once for clarification. Contractor<br />
will not receive additional money for installations requiring modifications due to these<br />
conflicts.<br />
C. All plumbing systems shall meet State and Local codes as well as ADA requirements<br />
regardless of information shown within the documents.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 A. Miscellaneous Plumbing Equipment:<br />
1. Carriers for wall hung water closets, urinals and lavatories:<br />
a. Provide commercial grade carrier of approved style. Verify with General<br />
Contractor for type of wall construction and space prior to ordering<br />
carriers.<br />
2. Fittings, Trim and Accessories:<br />
a. Install stop and escutcheon for each supply pipe, trap and escutcheon<br />
for each waste pipe and vacuum breaker supplied with hose attachments<br />
or integral with flush valve, or where water connection is below spill line<br />
of fixture.<br />
b. Install laminar flow, non splash on discharge of each faucet except<br />
where hose connection is specified.<br />
3. Water Closet Seats:<br />
a. Public: Church seat, #295C elongated seat, solid plastic, open front,<br />
external stainless steel check hinges, molded-in bumpers and without<br />
cover.<br />
B. Plumbing Fixture General Requirements: In addition to the drawing fixture specification<br />
the following is to be used as a guide and to list equal manufacturers.<br />
1. Plumbing fixtures American Standard or Kohler white fixtures. All fixtures shall be<br />
of same manufacturer.<br />
2. Water closet seats all white Beneke, Olsonite or Church combination self<br />
sustaining and check hinge of stainless steel.<br />
06/25/09 PLUMBING FIXTURES<br />
15440-1
3. Janitors Receptors, Sterns-Williams or Fiat. Supply fitting: Speakman, T & S<br />
Brass or Chicago.<br />
4. Faucets (Non-metering) Speakman, American Standard, Chicago, or T & S<br />
Brass or Kohler.<br />
5. Lavatory Drains to be Speakman S-3440, open type 1-1/4” tailpiece, P.O. with<br />
flat strainers, or approved equal T & S Brass or Chicago.<br />
6. Stops to be Frost, Chicago or T & S Brass flexible riser, 3/8” IPS angle type,<br />
loose key, chrome plated cast brass with escutcheons with set screws.<br />
7. Chrome plated, cast brass “P’ traps with cleanout, 17 gauge outlet tube, and<br />
escutcheon tube with set screw to be Frost, Chicago or T & S Brass.<br />
8. Trim of proper configuration to allow wheelchair accessibility shall be provided on<br />
all lavatories designated for handicapped use. Provide ADA drain and supply<br />
protection.<br />
9. Flush valves shall be Zurn Exposed Z6000 Model for 1” water closets and<br />
Exposed 26003 Model for ¾” urinals with flow options WS-1 low consumption.<br />
ADA compliant with non-hold open and no leak handle fixture, high back<br />
pressure vacuum breaker, one piece hex couple nut, adjustable tailpiece, spud<br />
coupling and flange for top spud connection, or approved equal Sloan Royal.<br />
10. WaIl mounted fixtures to be supported by suitable adjustable carriers having<br />
vandal proof trim, short foot bolted to concrete floor slab with 5/16” machine bolts<br />
and Phillips concrete fasteners in a rigid manner.<br />
a. Lavatories: Wade W-520 or equal.<br />
b. Urinals: Wade W-400 or equal.<br />
c. Sinks - Laundry Tubs: Wade W-520 or equal.<br />
d. Verify carrier type with fixture manufacturer.<br />
11. Zurn, Wade, Smith or Josam carriers as above described shall be acceptable for<br />
wall hung lavatories and sinks.<br />
12. Zurn carriers with neo-seal gaskets made from expanded, close-celled neoprene,<br />
shall be provided for water closets and urinals, or approved equal Wade, Smith<br />
or Josam.<br />
13. All exposed metal for fixtures in finished areas, exposed to view, shall be heavy<br />
chromium plated red brass, pipe, fittings and valves.<br />
14. All fixture valves shall have bronze stems, renewable bronze seats and<br />
renewable discs. Supplies to all fixtures provided with stop valves. All traps<br />
equipped with cleanout plugs. Install vacuum breakers or approved back<br />
siphonage, back flow prevention to prevent back flow as required.<br />
06/25/09 PLUMBING FIXTURES<br />
15440-2
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 A. All exposed piping and valves shall be chrome plated brass. Traps shall include chrome<br />
plated cast brass with clean-outs. Standard PVC traps for non-food service plumbing<br />
fixtures may be installed in non-rated walls. All water supplies to each fixture shall have<br />
chrome stop valves. Floor mounted water closets shall be connected using a cast iron<br />
floor flange and ring putty or gaskets. Wax gaskets are not acceptable for wall hung<br />
fixtures. Provide adequate supports and reinforcing for all wall hung fixtures, valves and<br />
shower heads. Install all fixtures rigid, plumb and true.<br />
B. Grout and caulk all fixtures with water and mildew resistant white epoxy silicone equal to<br />
Hydroment or Dow Corning No. 786. Grout shall not exceed 1/4” width and shall be<br />
installed flush with finished wall or floor.<br />
C. All fixture installation dimensions shall be determined from the Architectural documents.<br />
Plumbing fixture colors to be selected by Architect.<br />
D. P-Traps and water supplies insulate per ADA, and ANSI.<br />
E. Controls for flushing water closets shall be mounted on the wide or most accessible side<br />
of the water closet.<br />
F. Provide locking style valves in any lines serving an emergency eyewash or shower.<br />
END OF SECTION 15440<br />
06/25/09 PLUMBING FIXTURES<br />
15440-3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. High pressure patio misting system.<br />
B. Design and system layout.<br />
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
SECTION 15495 - PATIO MISTING SYSTEM<br />
A. Section 09900 – Paints and Coatings; for field painting of spray lines after installation.<br />
B. Division 15 – Mechanical; for domestic water supply to pump unit, hose bib and conduit.<br />
C. Division 16 - Electrical; for 120 volt electric power, outlet and remote switch.<br />
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION<br />
A. Misting System: High pressure patio misting system consisting of a remotely located pump unit<br />
controlled by a remote switch, nylon water feed line, stainless steel misting lines and anti-drip<br />
spray nozzles.<br />
B. Pump Unit Location: Locate pump unit in Mechanical Room with-in Trash Enclosure Area.<br />
1.04 REFERENCES<br />
A. UL, Underwriters Laboratories Inc.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Qualified installers shall have installed acceptable misting systems on at<br />
least three projects of comparable complexity and shall be knowledgeable in local conditions<br />
and procedures required for work.<br />
1.06 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.<br />
B. Product Data:<br />
1. Submit installation instructions, including start-up procedures.<br />
2. Submit manufacturer’s catalog of replacement parts including water filters, pump oil, and<br />
spray nozzles.<br />
C. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit maintenance and operation instructions for<br />
pump unit and other components.<br />
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING<br />
A. Delivery: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's<br />
identification.<br />
B. Storage: Store materials in a cool dry place. Protect from damage and from the elements prior<br />
to installation.<br />
1.08 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate misting system with mechanical and electrical work that directly effects the work of<br />
this section.<br />
1.09 WARRANTY<br />
A. Manufacturer’s shall warrant misting system components to be free of defects in workmanship<br />
for a period of one (1) year from date of installation.<br />
PATIO MISTING SYSTEM<br />
15495 -1
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Provide the following extra materials for maintenance purposes. Extra materials to be exactly<br />
the same materials as initially installed in the project.<br />
1. Pump Oil: Provide extra pump oil in quantity equal to one maintenance cycle replacement.<br />
2. Water Filter: One (1), 5-micron water filter element.<br />
3. Spray Nozzles: Six (6), anti-drip spray nozzles.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - EQUIPMENT<br />
A. AeroMist, Inc.; Phoenix, AZ; Tel: 1-866-799-5122; www.aeromist.com<br />
B. Rapid Cool; Valencia, CA; Tel: 1-855-359-6478; www.rapidcool.com<br />
2.02 MISTING PUMP<br />
A. Pump Unit: 1000 psi capacity, 120 VAC, direct drive pump with UL rated electric motor,<br />
replaceable 5-micron water filter, pressure gauge, drain valve, and adjustable pressure<br />
regulator.<br />
1. Design and size pump units for specific patio configurations if different then the prototype<br />
designs indicated below.<br />
2. The following are <strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong> standard prototype patio layouts with pump sizes.<br />
B. Small Patio Design: approximately 15 feet x 50 feet.<br />
1. Pump Unit: AeroMist # 60140K.<br />
a. Flow Rate: 1.4 GPM.<br />
b. Volts: 120 volt @ 60 Hz.<br />
c. Horsepower: 1.5.<br />
d. Amps: 14 Amps.<br />
e. Physical Size: L 24" W 10" H 12".<br />
2. Pump Unit: Rapid Cool # M101000A.<br />
a. Flow Rate: 1.0 GPM.<br />
b. Volts: 120 volt @ 60 Hz.<br />
c. Horsepower: 0.75.<br />
d. Amps: 11 Amps.<br />
e. Physical Size: L 21" W 11" H 18.5".<br />
C. Large Patio Design: approximately 15 feet x 87 feet.<br />
1. Pump Unit: AeroMist # 60200K.<br />
a. Flow Rate: 2.2 GPM.<br />
b. Volts: 120 volt @ 60 Hz.<br />
c. Horsepower: 1.5.<br />
d. Amps: 15 Amps.<br />
e. Physical Size: L 24" W 15" H 13".<br />
2. Pump Unit: Rapid Cool # M201000A.<br />
a. Flow Rate: 2.0 GPM.<br />
b. Volts: 120 volt @ 60 Hz.<br />
c. Horsepower: 1.5.<br />
d. Amps: 14 Amps.<br />
e. Physical Size: L 21" W 11" H 18.5".<br />
2.03 FEED LINE<br />
A. High pressure nylon tubing, 3/8 inch,1000 psi rated.<br />
1. Provide length of tubing required to run from remote pump unit to start of stainless steel<br />
mist line.<br />
a. AeroMist: # 56400, 100 foot length.<br />
b. Rapid Cool: # RC-MistTube, 100 foot length.<br />
PATIO MISTING SYSTEM<br />
15495 -2
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
2.04 MIST LINES<br />
2. Tubing to be run above ground in 3/4 inch conduit.<br />
A. Stainless steel tubing, 3/8 inch OD for perimeter mist lines. Provide quantity of spray head<br />
tubing and blank tubing as required for specific patio design.<br />
1. Spray Head Tubing: 3/8 inch OD mist line tubing with spray head receptors at 24 inches on<br />
center. 20 foot lengths, stainless steel finish.<br />
a. AeroMist # 51024-10.<br />
b. Rapid Cool: # RC-MistLine 24.<br />
2. Blank Tubing: 3/8 inch OD blank tubing for connections of spray head tubing. 20 foot<br />
lengths as required for design, stainless steel finish.<br />
a. AeroMist # 51375-10.<br />
b. Rapid Cool: # RC-MistLine Blank.<br />
2.05 SPRAY NOZZLES<br />
A. Anti-Drip, spray nozzles that creates a fine, low flow atomizing spray.<br />
1. Size: .012 x 10/24.<br />
2. Material: Manufacturers standard stainless steel or brass with stainless steel orifice.<br />
2.06 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Provide accessory components as indicated and required for a complete installation.<br />
1. Unions: 3/8 inch, stainless steel compression union for connecting stainless steel tubing or<br />
nylon tubing.<br />
2. Elbows: 3/8 inch, stainless steel compression elbow, 90 degree, for connecting stainless<br />
steel tubing or nylon tubing.<br />
3. End Plug: 3/8 inch, stainless steel compression end plug used to cap end of spray lines.<br />
4. Clamps: Flexible galvanized or stainless steel clamps with rubber coating. Provide quantity<br />
required for maximum 24 inch on center clamp spacing on spray lines.<br />
5. Clamp Screws: Provide stainless steel clamp screws as required for installation of system.<br />
6. Nozzle Plugs: Provide standard nozzle plugs for each mist line opening. Nozzle plugs to be<br />
installed prior to field painting of installed system.<br />
7. Water Supply Hose: Provide 6’-0” long, rubber garden hose section with male and female<br />
3/4” brass connection fittings and rubber washers for water supply line from water hose bib<br />
to pump unit.<br />
2.07 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Power Requirements: Provide (1) 20 amp, GFI circuit and grounded wall outlet for pump unit.<br />
B. Pump Switch: Provide a single pole switch located at patio for remote switching of pump unit.<br />
2.08 PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Hose Bib: Provide a standard brass garden hose bib with 3/4” threaded hose connection for<br />
connection of domestic water system to misting system pump. Locate with-in 4 feet of pump<br />
unit installation.<br />
B. Conduit: Provide 3/4" metallic conduit to run from remote pump unit through building to location<br />
of start of mist line at patio. Nylon feed line tubing will be pulled through conduit to mist line.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed<br />
and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.<br />
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
PATIO MISTING SYSTEM<br />
15495 -3
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Locate a 2’-0” x 2’-0” area for location of pump unit in Mechanical Room with-in Trash<br />
Enclosure Area. A floor mounted or wall mounted on shelf installation will be acceptable as long<br />
as the installed location allows for easy maintenance of pump unit.<br />
B. Coordinate work with other trades.<br />
1. Verify that domestic water hose bib has been properly installed with-in 4’-0” of pump unit.<br />
2. Verify that grounded wall outlet has been located near pump unit.<br />
3. Verify that the 3/4” conduit has been installed in the proper location to pull feed line from<br />
pump unit above ground to start of misting line at patio.<br />
C. Lay out mist lines and connections to maintain 24” on center nozzle spacing around perimeter<br />
of patio area.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install materials and equipment in a neat and orderly manner and in accordance with<br />
manufacturer’s written installation instructions.<br />
B. Pump Installation:<br />
1. Install pump unit on level surface and fasten to substrate for secure installation. Allow for<br />
access to oil drain and filter for replacement.<br />
2. Connect water supply hose to hose bib and to water inlet on pump.<br />
3. Pull nylon feed line through 3/4” conduit from patio area to pump unit and connect to water<br />
outlet on pump unit.<br />
C. Mist Line Installation:<br />
1. Install misting lines to lower outside edge of patio fascia with nozzles facing outwards at an<br />
angle of 30 to 45 degrees to create a curtain of mist around open sides of patio. Ensure<br />
nozzle angles are consistent between all tube sections.<br />
2. Attach misting tube to structure with clamps at 24” on center and at ends.<br />
3. Connect tube sections with compression unions and elbows as design requires. Plug end<br />
of tube run.<br />
4. Attach feed line to misting tubes with compression fittings.<br />
5. After system is in place, flush tube system prior to fitting nozzle plugs. Nozzle plugs to be<br />
installed prior to field painting of patio structure and tubing. Refer to Section 09900 - Paints<br />
and Coatings for field painting of patio structure.<br />
6. Remove nozzle plugs and replace with spray nozzles after painting.<br />
7. Seal patio end of conduit with flexible sealant after feed line has been pulled and<br />
connection to mist line has been completed.<br />
3.04 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION<br />
A. Conform with local codes for wire types and installation procedures.<br />
B. Connect remote pump switch at patio and at pump.<br />
C. After system installation is complete, plug pump power cord into outlet.<br />
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Test system for proper operation including water flow and pressure, remote pump switch, and<br />
spray head angle. Make necessary repairs and adjustments to place system in good working<br />
order before final inspection and acceptance.<br />
3.06 CLEANING<br />
A. Keep construction areas clean, neat, and orderly during system installation.<br />
PATIO MISTING SYSTEM<br />
15495 -4
<strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
3.07 SYSTEM USE AND MAINTENANCE<br />
A. Instruct Owner’s personnel in the proper use of the system in accordance with manufacturer’s<br />
written operating instruction. System should be inspected periodically during warranty period to<br />
insure proper operation.<br />
B. Instruct Owner’s personnel in the proper maintenance procedures as recommended by<br />
manufacturer. The following are the annual maintenance instructions for the pump unit.<br />
1. Change pump oil after every 500 hours of runtime or once per year.<br />
2. Change water filter element once per year.<br />
C. Inspect spray nozzles for proper operation. Replace as necessary.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
PATIO MISTING SYSTEM<br />
15495 -5
SECTION 15700 - HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING<br />
PART 1. – GENERAL<br />
1.1 A. Contractor shall thoroughly review the manufacturer’s installation instructions prior to<br />
installing any piece of equipment or its associated service, (gas, hot or chilled water<br />
piping, flues, etc.). Any conflicts between the manufacturer’s installation instructions and<br />
the plans or specification shall be brought to the engineer at once for clarification.<br />
Contractor will not receive additional money for installations requiring modifications due<br />
to these conflicts.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 A. Approved Manufacturers:<br />
1. Roof Top Equipment: Trane (furnished by Owner’s Vendor).<br />
2. Make-up Air Equipment: Accurex (furnished by Owner’s Vendor).<br />
3. Exhaust Fans: Accurex (furnished by Owner’s Vendor).<br />
4. Patio Heaters: Calcana<br />
B. Roof Top Unit (RTU) Trane<br />
1. General.<br />
a. Install a single package combination, DX mechanical cooling system and<br />
gas fired heating system, complete with magnetic starters and automatic<br />
controls as scheduled.<br />
b. The equipment shall be shipped completely factory assembled, precharged,<br />
piped and wired internally ready for field connections.<br />
2. Roof Mounting Curb.<br />
a. Furnish and install a steel roof mounting curb. It shall mate to the bottom<br />
perimeter of the equipment.<br />
b. Assemble the mounting curb, provide rigid insulation and counter<br />
flashing as recommended by the manufacturer.<br />
c. Provide sheet metal supply and return duct drops at roof penetration.<br />
3. Cooling System:<br />
a. The unit shall have cooling capacities as scheduled at ARI conditions.<br />
b. The units shall have direct drive hermetic compressors. The compressor<br />
shall have overload protection, internal pressure relief, low ambient<br />
lockout control and crankcase heater. Each refrigerant circuit shall have<br />
independent thermostatic expansion devices, service pressure ports and<br />
refrigerant line filter dryers.<br />
10/28/2011 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING<br />
15700-1
4. Heating System:<br />
a. Two stage gas heating section shall have inputs and outputs as<br />
scheduled.<br />
b. Cylindrical tube and drum heat exchanger shall be constructed of<br />
aluminized steel. Power burner shall have electric direct spark ignition,<br />
100% safety shut off electronic flame sensing controls, flame inspection<br />
glass window, pre-purging and combustion air adjustment. All controls<br />
shall be listed for operation at low outdoor air temperatures. System shall<br />
be equipped with dual limit safety controls and rated and tested<br />
according to D.O.E., F.T.C and A.G.A.<br />
5. Cabinet:<br />
6. Fans:<br />
a. Shall be of zinc coated, galvanized steel with a baked-on outdoor enamel<br />
paint finish. Base section and cabinet panels where conditioned air is<br />
handled shall be fully insulated to prevent sweating and minimize sound.<br />
a. FC centrifugal conditioned air blower shall be belt driven and be capable<br />
of delivering capacities as scheduled on the drawings,. Blower shall be<br />
statically and dynamically balanced.<br />
b. Propeller type condenser fans shall discharge vertically and be direct<br />
driven. Fan motors shall be totally enclosed with ball bearings,<br />
permanently lubricated, inherently protected and equipped with rain<br />
shield. Fans shall have a safety guard.<br />
7. Air Filters<br />
a. Throwaway 2” pleated high efficiency filters.<br />
8. Temperature Controls:<br />
a. Provide a programmable thermostat with 7-day program clock. During<br />
unoccupied periods, the RTU fan and heating section shall be energized<br />
as necessary to maintain temperature, outside dampers will be closed.<br />
b. The mechanical contractor is responsible for all control wiring.<br />
9. Provide the following options:<br />
a. Economizer<br />
b. Single point power with non fused disconnect and factory wired GFI<br />
outlet.<br />
c. Condenser coil guards<br />
d. Through the bottom electrical connections<br />
e. Five year compressor warranty<br />
10/28/2011 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING<br />
15700-2
C. Direct Fired Make-Up Air Unit (MUA or SF-1) Accurex<br />
1. Install direct fired make-up air heaters as scheduled. Units shall be ETL or UL<br />
listed.<br />
2. Units shall be factory assembled and shipped as a complete packaged assembly<br />
and shall include the following:<br />
a. Gas Burner designed to operate with an air velocity of 2,850 FPM across<br />
non-clogging stainless steel air baffles. Burner to be designed to operate<br />
at 100% thermal efficiency throughout the life of the equipment.<br />
Turndown of the burner shall be a minimum of 25:1. Entire width of<br />
burner burns at all times. Burner section shall have adjustable profile<br />
plates for field adjustment of air velocity over the burner. Provide<br />
intermittent ignition assembly.<br />
b. Forward curved, double width, double inlet blower mounted on a solid<br />
steel shaft with self aligning 100,000 hour bearings.<br />
c. Equipment casing to be 16 gauge, G90 galvanized steel around an<br />
integral support frame of structural angle. All panels shall be removable<br />
for easy access. Provide an observation port for the main and pilot<br />
flames. All controls, gas valves and modulating controls shall be<br />
mounted in a vestibule with access doors outside of the air stream.<br />
d. Gas train shall be constructed to meet State Codes, ANSI and IRI<br />
requirements. Gas train shall be selected to operate at 14” W.C. psig<br />
pressure. Regulators to be approved for non-vented service.<br />
e. Temperature controller shall be a ductstat mounted integral to the unit.<br />
f. Provide the following controls:<br />
(1) Airflow switch<br />
(2) Electronic Flame Safety Relay<br />
(3) High Temperature Limit Switch<br />
(4) Starter Interlock<br />
(5) High Gas Pressure Switch<br />
(6) Low Gas Pressure Switch<br />
(7) Adjustable Low Limit<br />
(8) Auxiliary Circuit to shut the unit down on a flame failure<br />
(9) Adjustable burner on/off economizer intake air ductstat<br />
(10) Remote panel complete with operating lights to indicate blower<br />
on and burner on, and discharge air temperature adjustment,<br />
summer-off-winter selector switch.<br />
(11) Audible alarm to signal safety shut-down<br />
(12) Shunt trip circuit breaker in source electrical panel<br />
g. Provide motorized outside air damper that complies with the damper<br />
specification in Section 15800.<br />
h. Unit shall have single point power connection with a fused disconnect.<br />
Provide filter section with cleanable aluminum filter.<br />
10/28/2011 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING<br />
15700-3
C. Patio Heaters (PH-1) Calcana<br />
1. Burner control housing is preassembled and pre-wired, unit comes complete with<br />
industry standard gas, electrical, balanced air rotor, thermal overload protected<br />
motor, visual burner inspection sightglass, combustion and air proving safety<br />
switch, 3-try spark ignition control, 100% safety shut-off, low voltage control<br />
connection, 4" heat treated aluminized combustion tube, aluminum standard<br />
reflector, tube couplers, heat economizer baffle, stainless steel hangers,<br />
decorative grille, indicator light, stainless steel burner head construction.<br />
2. All modulating 24 volt units shall be factory assembled and shipped as a<br />
complete packaged assembly and shall include the following:<br />
a. DSI Ignition and blower 24 volt system.<br />
b. Modulating controls with a 24 volt “On/ Off- Hi/ Lo” Control Panel.<br />
c. (Provide only on enclosed patios) Thermostat equal to Honeywell line<br />
voltage Model T4098A or T410A. Installed such that the thermostat<br />
controls the voltage being supplied to the unit.<br />
END OF SECTION 15700<br />
10/28/2011 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING<br />
15700-4
SECTION 15800 - DUCTWORK MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. All above ground ductwork material and construction shall be galvanized steel, installed<br />
in accordance with the Standards described in the latest edition of the ASHRAE<br />
(American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers) Guide and<br />
Data Book, SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor’s National<br />
Association) and Local governing mechanical codes.<br />
B. Changes in direction, elevation or shape shall be made by gradual methods such as<br />
radiused elbows of diverging or converging reducing fittings. Changes in dimension shall<br />
not exceed 20° diverging angle. Elbow radii shall be at least equal to the width of the duct<br />
in the plane of the bend.<br />
PART 2. – PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 A. Approved Manufacturers:<br />
1. Registers, Grilles and Diffusers and Terminal Air Devices: Anemostat, Titus,<br />
Price, J & J, Krueger, Tuttle and Bailey, Cames, Lima, Nailor, Metalaire, Agitair,<br />
Reliable Metal, Connor, Air Devices, Inc.<br />
2. Louvers: Cesco, Air Balance, Arrow United, Louvers & Dampers, Inc., Safe-Air.<br />
3. Fire and Smoke Dampers: Prefco, Ruskin, Greenheck, Cesco, United Air,<br />
American Warming, Safe-Air, Nailor, Acme.<br />
B. Registers, Grilles and Diffusers: Unless indicated, otherwise wall and ceiling R, C, D’s<br />
shall be white; floor registers shall have plain aluminum finish. Color finishes shall be<br />
approved by the Architect.<br />
1. See drawings for grilles and diffusers schedule.<br />
C. Dampers.<br />
1. Where dampers separate outdoors from indoors, they shall meet the following<br />
standards: Use no damper blade that is wider than 6 inches. Construct damper<br />
frames from at least 16 gauge, hot dipped galvanized steel. Fit each blade with<br />
double sided, inflatable, field replaceable, extruded vinyl edge seals that lock into<br />
slots in the blade. Size each blade to fit tightly between flexible, compressible,<br />
metal jamb seals. Set nylon bearings in stainless steel sleeves. Use hexagonal<br />
shafts for positive blade control. Conceal damper linkage inside the frames and<br />
out of the air stream. The entire assembly shall not rattle or vibrate. A closed<br />
damper shall not leak more than 6 SCFM per square foot of face area when<br />
tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500 for a damper selected at 2000<br />
FPM and tested at 4 inches of water column pressure across the face.<br />
06/25/09 DUCTWORK MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15800-1
PART 3. – EXECUTION<br />
3.1 GENERAL<br />
A. Kitchen exhaust ductwork to be 16 gauge steel with liquid tight weld. Duct to slope 2%<br />
towards hood or an approved grease collector. Provide cleanouts as required, per Code.<br />
Installation of kitchen exhaust ductwork shall comply with NFPA, State and Local Codes.<br />
B. Ductwork behind registers arid grilles shall be painted out flat black.<br />
C. Provide a minimum of 2” wide flexible connectors to all ducted equipment less than 2000<br />
CFM and 4” wide on 2000 CFM and greater.<br />
D. Flexible Ductwork.<br />
1. The flexible duct shall be of semi-rigid construction capable of maintaining the<br />
shaping required by job conditions without subsequent sagging or droop. Duct<br />
connections to equipment outlet collars shall be made in accordance with the<br />
duct manufacturer’s recommendations. Maximum flexible air duct length not to<br />
exceed 5’-0”.<br />
2. Flexible air duct shall be externally insulated with 1/2” thick 3/4 lb. density<br />
fiberglass wrapped around twice to 1” thick complete with non-combustible vapor<br />
barrier and UL listed.<br />
3. Ductwork and insulation shall be UL listed as Flexible Air Ducts Connection<br />
Class I, and meet all NFPA 90A and 90B requirements.<br />
4. Insulated flexible duct shall be equal to Thermaflex M-KE.<br />
5. No flexible ductwork connections shall be allowed in exposed ceiling areas.<br />
E. Access Doors.<br />
1. Where motorized dampers, fire dampers, control equipment are installed in<br />
ductwork, provide suitable sized, gasketed doors in ducts. Doors shall be<br />
provided with Ventlok #220 door pull and #90 sash type latches. Use sponge<br />
rubber to felt gasketing material on door openings. Access doors in insulated<br />
ductwork shall be double wall construction with 1” insulation between wall.<br />
F. Air Control Devices.<br />
1. Provide splitter dampers on all main ducts and where shown on the drawings.<br />
Provide Ventlok #690 or approved equal, self-locking splitter assembly on each<br />
damper.<br />
2. Provide Clevepak (or approved equal) Type DESC damper extractor with spincollar<br />
at all branch take offs.<br />
3. Provide a balancing damper to each diffuser.<br />
4. In all inaccessible areas, provide balancing damper within reach at each diffuser<br />
or register.<br />
END OF SECTION 15800<br />
06/25/09 DUCTWORK MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
15800-2
SECTION 15976 – AUTOMATIC CONTROL SEQUENCES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions<br />
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.<br />
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK<br />
A. Control sequences are hereby defined as the manner and method by which automatic<br />
temperature controls function. Requirements for each type of operation are specified in this<br />
section.<br />
B. Operating equipment, devices, and system components required for automatic temperature<br />
control systems are specified in other Division-15 Temperature Control Systems sections of these<br />
specifications.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
Not applicable.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 AIR HANDLING SYSTEMS<br />
A. General. Provide automatic control for the air handling systems as described herein and shown<br />
on the drawings.<br />
1. Each supply air system which introduces outdoor air shall have a freeze protection<br />
thermostat installed in the unit discharge. The thermostat shall have a 20 foot long<br />
averaging element, auxiliary contacts and manual reset feature. If a system undergoes a<br />
freeze-stat trip (temperature falls to 34°F), its valves, dampers, and humidifiers shall<br />
revert to their unoccupied positions.<br />
2. Packaged Roof Top Units will be fitted with smoke detectors, provided by the vendor, in<br />
the return and supply ductwork to shut down the systems upon detection of smoke.<br />
B. Control Sequences.<br />
1. RTU-1 and RTU-2<br />
a. Occupied Hours: Packaged Roof Top Units shall cycle or stage compressors and<br />
gas heat to maintain the space temperature set point. The units shall be<br />
controlled by Vendor furnished programmable thermostat(s) and remote<br />
temperature sensors, (shown on plans). Outside air damper: Refer to ‘c’ below.<br />
b. Unoccupied Hours: Packaged Roof Top Units shall cycle or stage compressors<br />
and natural gas heating to maintain the off hours temperature set points. Outside<br />
air damper to be closed.<br />
c. Ventilation: The vendor furnished CO2 sensor will sample the air in the dining<br />
areas and thus determine the number of people present. Upon a signal from the<br />
15976-1<br />
AUTOMATIC CONTROL SEQUENCES
2. RTU-3<br />
CO2 sensor, the outside air damper will modulate between the scheduled<br />
minimum and maximum outside air position to satisfy the CO2 sensor as<br />
scheduled on the plans.<br />
d. Economizer Mode: The unit shall be equipped with a differential enthalpy<br />
controlled economizer. The sensor will measure both temperature and enthalpy.<br />
When the conditions are such that the outside air is suitable to provide “free<br />
cooling” the outside air damper shall modulate to maintain a supply air<br />
temperature between 55 and 59 degrees F.<br />
a. a. Occupied Hours: Packaged Roof Top Unit shall cycle or stage compressors<br />
and gas heat to maintain the space temperature set point. The units shall be<br />
controlled by Vendor furnished programmable thermostat(s) and remote<br />
temperature sensors, (shown on plans). Outside air damper shall be open to the<br />
minimum position as scheduled.<br />
b. Unoccupied Hours: Packaged Roof Top Units shall cycle or stage compressors<br />
and natural gas heating to maintain the off hours temperature set points. Outside<br />
air damper shall be closed.<br />
c. Economizer Mode: The unit shall be equipped with a differential enthalpy<br />
controlled economizer. The sensor will measure both temperature and enthalpy.<br />
When the conditions are such that the outside air is suitable to provide “free<br />
cooling” the outside air damper shall modulate to maintain a supply air<br />
temperature between 55 and 59 degrees F.<br />
3. EF-1 and MUA-1(SF-1)<br />
4. EF-2<br />
5. EF-3<br />
a. MUA-1 (SF-1) and EF-1 shall be energized by a manual switch on the Fan and Light<br />
Control Panel.<br />
b. MUA-1 (SF-1) shall be shunt trip controlled via circuit breaker in source<br />
electrical panel. Provide control wiring from auxiliary contact at hood fire<br />
suppression control block to shunt trip mechanism at circuit breaker in<br />
electrical panel.<br />
a. The exhaust fan will be controlled by a time switch. The exhaust fan shall run<br />
continuously when the morning staff arrives and will be de-activated at the end of<br />
the business day. Verify the exact hours of operation with the <strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong><br />
Project Manager.<br />
a. Refer to Electrical Plans for control.<br />
END OF SECTION 15976<br />
15976-2<br />
AUTOMATIC CONTROL SEQUENCES
SECTION 15990 - TESTING AND BALANCING<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Test all piping systems as required by code and governing agencies. Certificates of<br />
Approval shall be furnished to Owner that all tests have been completed.<br />
B. All domestic water piping systems shall be disinfected in accordance to State and Local<br />
Codes. A 50 ppm water-chlorine solution must be allowed to stand in the potable water<br />
distribution system for at least 24 hours before flushing and returning to service.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
Not Used<br />
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 GENERAL<br />
A. When the work has been completed, balance the air flow from each diffuser and register<br />
in accordance with the recommendations of the diffuser manufacturer, selling dampers,<br />
controls and/or other volume control devices in such a manner as to produce the air flow<br />
rate indicated on the drawings. Test to the satisfaction of the Engineer to insure for<br />
satisfactory operation of all equipment.<br />
B. Submit five (5) copies of certified Test and Balance Report to the Engineer for approval.<br />
Submittal shall include certified Test and Balance Reports and shop drawing(s)<br />
identifying all air terminal devices as listed in the Test and Balance Report and the<br />
equipment as it is identified on the Mechanical Plans.<br />
C. Test and start-up all equipment supplied under this contract. Provide all reports<br />
necessary to assure the Engineer and Owner that all functions of each piece of<br />
equipment have been thoroughly evaluated and deemed operable as designed.<br />
D. Plumbing:<br />
1. Defects: Contractor shall be responsible for defects which develop in the systems<br />
caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment and shall replace any such<br />
faulty workmanship, material or equipment during a period of 1 year from date of<br />
final acceptance. Acceptance of the work shall not waive the guarantee.<br />
2. Approval: Inspect and test plumbing work for approval by Architect/ Engineer or a<br />
designated representative.<br />
3. Tests: Tests shall be made in the presence of the Architect/Engineer or a<br />
designated representative. Tests shall be made, at Contractor’s expense, and a<br />
certification furnished to the Architect/Engineer stating that satisfactory tests<br />
have been made.<br />
4. Piping: Tests of piping systems, except final test of complete systems, shall be<br />
made before piping is covered or connected to fixtures and equipment. Tests<br />
06/25/09 TESTING AND BALANCING<br />
15990-1
E. Cooling:<br />
required shall not be less than as specified in the following paragraphs, unless<br />
designated otherwise in specific sections.<br />
a. Storm and sanitary, waste and vent piping, inside the building shall be<br />
tested with air at 5 psi gauge pressure and shall hold this pressure for 15<br />
minutes without addition of more air. Provide final test with fixtures in<br />
place with 1” W.G. air pressure.<br />
b. Test Domestic water piping, tanks, valves and fittings with hydraulic<br />
pressure of 100 psig for a period of 24 hours.<br />
c. Test natural gas piping per NFPA Chapter 54, National Fuel Gas Code.<br />
1) For meter outlet pressure 14” W.C. or less, the piping shall be<br />
tested at a pressure of 10 psig maximum.<br />
2) For meter outlet pressure above 14” W.C. the piping shall be<br />
tested at a pressure of 50 percent greater than the maximum,<br />
but not less than 25 psi.<br />
d. Heating/cooling water piping and shall hold 150 psi gauge for 1 hour<br />
without leaks or additional water.<br />
1. System Guarantee: Contractor shall guarantee that the installation shall operate<br />
with complete noiseless circulation of cooling media through piping system and<br />
equipment.<br />
2. Defects: Contractor shall be responsible for defects which develop in the systems<br />
caused by faulty workmanship, material or equipment and shall replace any such<br />
faulty workmanship, material or equipment during a period of one year from date<br />
of final acceptance. Acceptance of the work shall not waive the guarantee.<br />
3. Tests: In the presence of the Architect/Engineer, or his duly representative, the<br />
cooling system shall be tested at 80 psi hydrostatic pressure and proved drop<br />
tight. Tests shall be complete before piping is connected to equipment or<br />
covered.<br />
F. Ventilation: Contractor shall guarantee complete uniform circulation of air through<br />
ventilated spaces without objectionable noise. Contractor shall assume responsibility for<br />
and shall replace any faulty workmanship, material or equipment during a period of 1<br />
year from date of final acceptance.<br />
END OF SECTION 15990<br />
06/25/09 TESTING AND BALANCING<br />
15990-2
SECTION 16010 - GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. General and Supplementary conditions within Division 0 and 1 are hereby incorporated<br />
and become part of these Specifications, covering all work in Division 16000, Electrical.<br />
B. Before submitting a proposal on the project, the Contractor shall visit the site and<br />
familiarize themselves with the conditions and limitations affecting Division 16000 work.<br />
No additional costs to the Owner shall be allowed for items verifiable during site visits.<br />
C. Contractor shall provide sufficient workers and materials to keep pace with the<br />
construction schedule. Contractor shall place orders for equipment such that job progress<br />
is not slowed due to late delivery and shall confirm delivery dates with suppliers.<br />
D. The Contractor shall provide office space and storage for materials and equipment<br />
supplied as required. Location shall be as directed by the General Contractor or the<br />
Architect/Engineer.<br />
E. Upon completion of the work shown and specified under Division 16000 and prior to final<br />
close out of the Project, the Contractor shall verify in writing that all systems are 100%<br />
complete and operating properly. This notification shall include copies of all<br />
Subcontractor notifications. Any system not operating properly at final inspection shall be<br />
immediately repaired and demonstrated to the Engineer.<br />
F. Rebates or credits provided by utility companies or equipment manufacturers shall be<br />
directly credited to the Owner.<br />
1.2 ELECTRICAL PLANS<br />
A. The Electrical Drawings and Specifications shall form a set of Plans for the electrical<br />
work. Neither the Drawings nor the Specifications shall be complete without the other.<br />
Any item shown on the Drawings or specified in the Specifications shall be considered as<br />
shown and specified on both.<br />
B. Any questions regarding the intent of the Drawings or Specifications shall be brought to<br />
the Engineer’s attention as soon as possible. If direction from the Engineer cannot be<br />
obtained due to time or communication limitations, the greater quantity, higher quality or<br />
condition most favorable to the Owner shall be assumed. Contractor shall provide all<br />
labor, materials, equipment, and miscellaneous items necessary for a complete and<br />
operational electrical installation, as shown on the Drawings and called for in these<br />
Specifications.<br />
C. Drawings:<br />
1. Contractor shall familiarize themselves with Architectural, Structural and<br />
Mechanical Drawings and Specifications. Coordinate all shafts, chases, furred<br />
spaces, suspended ceilings, locations of equipment, etc.<br />
2. Electrical Contractor shall coordinate routing of all conduit and wire within soffits<br />
provided by the General Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all<br />
soffiting required to cover installations not coordinated or specifically approved by<br />
the Architect and Engineer.<br />
GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
16010-1
3. Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to show approximate<br />
location only. Placement of electrical equipment and devices shall not interfere<br />
with locations or clearances of other trades’ materials or equipment.<br />
4. Dimensions given on the Drawings shall take precedence over scaled<br />
dimensions. Dimensions, whether given in figures or scaled, shall be verified in<br />
the field.<br />
5. Contractor shall verify that the equipment to be furnished under Contract will fit<br />
within the available space.<br />
6. Notify the Architect and Engineer of any discrepancies between Electrical,<br />
Architectural and Mechanical Drawings.<br />
7. Verify items such as door swings, window locations, casework, etc., before<br />
installing any electrical equipment or devices. All devices conflicting with and<br />
other trades work due to lack of coordination shall be relocated at no additional<br />
cost to the Owner.<br />
D. The following terms used in the Drawings and Specifications shall be defined as follows:<br />
1. Contractor: Shall mean Electrical Contractor or any of their Subcontractors.<br />
2. Work: Shall mean labor and/or materials of the Electrical Contractor or any of<br />
their Subcontractors.<br />
3. Furnish: Shall mean purchase, submit for Engineer approval, coordinate with<br />
Contract Documents and deliver to site in new, undamaged condition.<br />
4. Install: Shall mean to schedule for delivery, deliver or have delivered to the site,<br />
store as directed, protect from damage, set in place, make all necessary final<br />
connections, test as required and turn over to the Owner in full operating<br />
condition.<br />
5. Provide: Shall mean furnish and install.<br />
6. Connect: Shall mean to bring electrical service and/or line voltage control wiring<br />
to equipment, make all final connections, provide all necessary miscellaneous<br />
materials required and do final check out to ensure proper equipment<br />
connections.<br />
E. CAD and Drawing Files:<br />
1. Electrical CAD drawings prepared by of Barr Engineering and <strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong><br />
<strong>Wings</strong>, Inc. for this Project are instruments of for use solely with respect to this<br />
Project. During the course of the implementation of the Project, and with<br />
approval by either party, copies may be obtained of CAD drawings for the<br />
preparation of Shop Drawings. These CAD drawings shall not be used on other<br />
projects, for additions to this Project, or for completion of this Project by others,<br />
unless both <strong>Buffalo</strong> <strong>Wild</strong> <strong>Wings</strong>, Inc and Barr Engineering Company provide<br />
written permission to do so. Any revisions, additions and/or deletions to these<br />
CAD drawings, either intentional or unintentional, shall be made at the full risk of<br />
the person(s) making such revisions, additions and/or deletions. Such person(s)<br />
shall hold harmless and indemnify Barr Engineering Company of any and all<br />
responsibilities and liabilities.<br />
2. CAD drawings files of Architectural floor plans, elevations, sections, etc, shall be<br />
requested directly from the Architect.<br />
1.3 COORDINATION OF DRAWINGS<br />
A. Coordinate scheduling and sequencing required for movement and positioning of large<br />
equipment into the building with all other Contractors to minimize impact on their work.<br />
B. This Contractor shall provide any and all input required to complete these drawings.<br />
GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
16010-2
1.4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT<br />
A. Materials:<br />
1. All materials shall be new and of the type and quality specified herein.<br />
2. Specific materials and equipment specified is intended to establish a minimum<br />
standard of required quality. Where specified materials and equipment fail to<br />
meet minimum standards of existing federal, state and local codes and<br />
ordinances, the governing codes and ordinances shall prevail.<br />
3. The Contractor shall provide all minor miscellaneous materials necessary for the<br />
complete mechanical installation.<br />
4. For materials and equipment specified by description only, the Contractor shall<br />
provide materials or equipment suitable for the purpose intended. These shall be<br />
in conformance with all governing codes, these Specifications and normal trade<br />
practice.<br />
5. For materials or equipment specified by manufacturer’s name and catalog<br />
number, the Contractor shall provide the item specified. The Contractor may<br />
submit materials and equipment for prior approval to the Engineer.<br />
6. Supply materials and equipment to the site in original packages, containers or<br />
crates insofar as is practical. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to schedule<br />
deliveries in accordance with the overall Project schedule. The Contractor shall<br />
closely coordinate all deliveries with other Contractors and the Engineer.<br />
7. Provide for proper receipt, handling, storage, and protection from the elements<br />
for all materials and equipment to be used on this Project so as to effectively<br />
prevent damage or deterioration. Materials or equipment sustaining damage or<br />
undue deterioration from any cause whatsoever shall be replaced or repaired by<br />
Contractor as required by the Engineer.<br />
8. The Contractor shall properly protect all equipment from damage during<br />
construction. Thoroughly clean all fixtures, equipment and other supplied<br />
materials. Make all necessary repairs and apply touch up paint as required prior<br />
to final inspection and contract close out.<br />
9. All materials and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.<br />
(UL). Materials and Equipment shall meet the UL requirements of each standard<br />
in every case where such a standard has been established for that particular type<br />
of material. Equipment shall be UL listed as an entire assembly or system.<br />
B. Prior Approvals<br />
1. All requests for prior approvals must be received by the Engineer at least seven<br />
working days prior to bid date. Applications for prior approval shall be considered<br />
only from Contractors submitting bids on the Project. Contractors shall determine<br />
whether materials receiving prior approval are actually in accordance with details<br />
of the Specifications.<br />
2. The Contractor shall be responsible for all deficiencies that may exist from the<br />
use of substituted products or equipment, including all additional labor and<br />
materials required to complete the work. All dimensions and characteristics of<br />
substituted products shall be verified and coordinated with all affected trades and<br />
Subcontractors. Any required changes or modifications to the work of any other<br />
trade or Subcontractor incurred due to using accepted substituted products shall<br />
be coordinated and performed by this Contractor at no additional cost to the<br />
Owner.<br />
GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
16010-3
1.5 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Within fifteen days after the award of the Contract, the Electrical Contractor shall submit<br />
shop drawings on all major electrical equipment to the Architect for approval. Shop<br />
Drawings shall be submitted by the Electrical Contractor, not their Subcontractors. These<br />
shop drawings shall cover such items as lighting fixtures, lamps, disconnects, fuses,<br />
starters, switchgear, devices, plates, panels, contactors, etc. The Contractor shall<br />
thoroughly review each item for compliance with these Specifications making any<br />
necessary corrections prior to submittal. Each shop drawing set shall be stamped, signed<br />
and dated indicating Contractor review. If the Contractor fails to properly review shop<br />
drawings, the Contractor shall reimburse the Engineer for all additional reviews on a time<br />
and material basis. No equipment shall be released for shipment or installed prior to final<br />
approval by the Engineer.<br />
B. The Engineer will review all Shop Drawings submitted and will retain one copy for record<br />
file.<br />
C. Approval Stamp: This review is to verify general conformance with the design concept of<br />
the Project and substantial compliance with the information provided in the Contract<br />
Documents. This review does not in any way relieve the Contractor or their suppliers of<br />
their responsibility to provide all materials and equipment as specified, in quantities,<br />
quality and dimensions required. Submittals will be reviewed with the following actions:<br />
1. “No Exception Taken” indicates that the Submittal appears to conform to the<br />
design concept of the Work and that the Contractor, at his discretion, may with<br />
fabrication and/or procurement and installation.<br />
2. “Reviewed as Noted” indicates that the Submittal, after noted corrections are<br />
made, appears to conform to the design concept of the Work and that the<br />
Contractor, at his discretion, may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement<br />
and installation, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without and<br />
increase in Contract Sum or Time.<br />
3. “Revised and Resubmit” indicates that the noted revisions are such that a<br />
corrected copy of the Submittal is required for review to confirm that the noted<br />
revisions have been understood and made. The Contractor, at his discretion,<br />
may proceed with fabrication and/or procurement and installation after submitting<br />
a corrected copy and verifying with the reviewer that the corrected copy is<br />
acceptable, if the corrections are accepted by the Contractor without an increase<br />
in the Contract Sum or Time.<br />
4. “Rejected” indicates that the Submittal does not appear to conform to the<br />
specifications, a resubmission is required and fabrication or procurement is not<br />
authorized.<br />
D. If the Engineer rejects (Revised and Resubmit or Rejected) the same section two times<br />
the engineer shall be compensated for additional reviews. Compensation will be<br />
incorporated by Change Order and will be deducted from the Contractor’s application for<br />
payment. Contractor is responsible for all delays caused by the resubmittal process.<br />
E. Provide samples of materials or equipment proposed to be furnished, if requested.<br />
Samples shall become the property of the Architect/Engineer and will be returned only<br />
when accompanied by a written request to do so.<br />
GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
16010-4
F. Record Drawings: The Contractor shall provide and maintain an “As Built” set of bluelines<br />
on site, neatly notating routing, location or other field changes to the Contract<br />
Documents. Upon Project completion and prior to final close out, turn the “As Built”<br />
drawings over to the Owner. Provide a detailed transmittal indicating each sheet and<br />
other information turned over to the Owner and acquire their representative’s signature.<br />
This information shall be included at the project close out.<br />
1.6 WORKMANSHIP AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES<br />
A. Installation of all materials specified herein shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike<br />
manner by workers experienced and skilled in the trade. Only the best quality<br />
workmanship will be accepted.<br />
B. The Electrical Contractor shall regularly clean their work area of debris. Removal of all<br />
Electrical Contractor generated debris and rubbish caused by their work shall be at the<br />
Contractor’s expense.<br />
C. Coordination:<br />
1. Electrical Contractor shall give careful consideration to work of other Contractors<br />
on the Project and shall organize work as detailed in the Contractor’s ¼”<br />
coordination drawings so as to not interfere with or delay the work of other<br />
trades.<br />
2. Electrical Contractor shall consult all Architectural, Structural and Mechanical<br />
Drawings and Specifications that apply for correlating information.<br />
3. Conflicts or interference with work of other trades shall be brought to the<br />
attention of the Engineer, in writing, before installation.<br />
4. Should the Electrical Contractor not follow above procedures and install work that<br />
interferes with work of other Contractors, the Electrical Contractor shall make all<br />
necessary changes as directed by Engineer to eliminate the interference or<br />
conflict at the Electrical Contractor’s expense.<br />
D. Protection of Equipment:<br />
1. Until final acceptance of the work by the Owner, the Contractor shall be<br />
responsible for the safety, good condition, and protection from damage of all<br />
materials and equipment installed.<br />
2. Switchboards, panelboards, motor starters and other electrical components<br />
stored or installed on-site shall be covered with plywood and polyethylene or an<br />
equivalent to protect them from any damage due to site conditions or from work<br />
by other trades.<br />
3. If, during shipment or installation, the finish of equipment becomes chipped or<br />
scratched, the Contractor shall touch up or refinish surfaces to match original<br />
finish.<br />
E. Live Work: All electrical equipment shall be de-energized prior to any work being<br />
performed. If it is necessary to work on any equipment live due to job conditions,<br />
precautions shall be taken to protect authorized personnel from accidentally coming in<br />
contact with live parts. Contractor shall have adequate personnel on site along with a<br />
back up plan to recover from an unscheduled outage.<br />
1.7 LICENSES, CODES AND FEES<br />
A. The Contractor shall be a licensed Contractor in the State of which project is being<br />
constructed. The Contractor shall employ all Licensed Professional Tradesmen required<br />
for each type of work covered under these Drawings and Specifications.<br />
GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
16010-5
B. The Contractor shall procure all necessary certificates and permits and pay all required<br />
fees. The Contractor shall pay all fees and installation charges by the utility company for<br />
the permanent services.<br />
C. Codes and Ordinances: All work and materials shall meet the requirements of national,<br />
state and local codes and ordinances, in every respect. This requirement shall not relieve<br />
the Contractor from meeting the requirements of Drawings and Specifications that may<br />
be in excess of all codes and ordinances and not contrary to them. Following is a partial<br />
list of governing codes and/or standards.<br />
1. Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA)<br />
2. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)<br />
3. State and Local Building Codes<br />
4. State Board of Health<br />
5. State Industrial Commission<br />
6. State and Local Fire Codes and Regulations<br />
7. National Electric Code<br />
8. State and Local Electrical Installation Codes<br />
9. Local Power Company Regulations and Requirements<br />
D. Inspections: Regular inspections shall be requested by the Electrical Contractor to meet<br />
all state and local requirements. Contractor shall furnish a certificate of final inspection<br />
and approval from all enforcement agencies to the Owner.<br />
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS<br />
A. The Electrical Contractor shall deliver two sets of Operation and Maintenance (O&M)<br />
manuals to the Engineer prior to final close out. O&M manuals shall consist of approved<br />
shop drawings, manufacturer’s bulletins, equipment manuals, a list of manufacturers with<br />
telephone numbers for all equipment that contains replaceable parts and all other data<br />
covering the care, maintenance and operation of each piece of furnished equipment.<br />
O&M manuals shall be neatly bound in 3-ring binders, contain an index and section tabs<br />
and be labeled with the Project name.<br />
B. Name, address, and telephone number of Electrical Contractor and each associated<br />
SubContractor installing equipment and systems, local representative for each item of<br />
equipment and each system. Table of contents shall correspond to the Specifications<br />
with the Section tab sheets placed before the respective Shop Drawings and operation<br />
and maintenance instructions. Warranties for more than 1 year shall be included in<br />
appropriate section.<br />
1.9 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND TESTING<br />
A. The Contractor shall fully instruct the Owner in the operation of electrical equipment prior<br />
to final close out. Contractor shall provide, without additional expense to Owner, services<br />
of competent instructors who will give full instruction in the care, adjustment, operation<br />
and maintenance of all electrical systems provided by this Contractor to Owner’s<br />
permanent employees. Instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the<br />
installation that they are to give instructions and shall be trained in operating theory, as<br />
well as in practical operation and maintenance work. Factory trained instructors shall be<br />
employed wherever they are available. Instruction shall be given during regular work<br />
week and at a time just prior to the time the equipment is accepted and turned over to<br />
Owner for regular operation.<br />
GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
16010-6
B. The Electrical Contractor or his representative shall provide a minimum of up to eight<br />
hours instruction period for Owner’s personnel, which shall be recorded on DVR with two<br />
disks being provided to the Owner..<br />
C. Electrical Contractor shall test all equipment installed under this Specification and shall<br />
demonstrate its proper operation to the Engineer. No equipment shall be tested or<br />
operated for any purpose until it has been fully prepared, connected and made ready for<br />
normal operation. Damage to equipment due to improper or ill-timed operation or testing<br />
shall be repaired, at Electrical Contractor’s expense, before final inspection and<br />
acceptance.<br />
1.10 WARRANTY<br />
A. The Electrical Contractor shall guarantee all materials and equipment to be free of<br />
defects that may develop in any part of their work, caused by faulty workmanship,<br />
material or equipment failures, for a minimum of one year from the date of final<br />
acceptance of the work or for as long as normal equipment manufacturer warranties are<br />
in effect from the date of final acceptance of the work.<br />
B. During the guarantee period, notification by letter, personal contact or telephone<br />
conversation of a problem with any electrical system, shall cause the Contractor to<br />
respond within one week, making repairs or corrections as necessary. After all repairs<br />
and corrections are complete, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer.<br />
C. The Electrical Contractor shall agree to provide 24 hour service on call for emergency.<br />
1.11 TEMPORARY POWER<br />
A. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all necessary temporary power and lighting to<br />
allow other Contractors and Subcontractors to perform their work. Prior to submitting a<br />
bid for this Project, contact the General Contractor to determine the type of equipment to<br />
be used in the performance of the work. The Electrical Bid shall include all labor and<br />
materials required to provide and maintain a complete temporary power and lighting<br />
system throughout the course of the project. A minimum of 20 footcandles shall be<br />
provided for work being performed within the strucuture. The Electrical Contractor shall<br />
coordinate all electrical requirements with other Contractors. Temporary power shall<br />
consist of a minimum of 200A with all required ground fault protection. PART 2. -<br />
PRODUCTS<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
Not Used<br />
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
Not Used<br />
END OF SECTION 16010<br />
GENERAL CONDITIONS<br />
16010-7
SECTION 16030 - CUTTING AND PATCHING<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all cutting, drilling, removal, patching and<br />
refinishing of walls, ceilings and floors as required to provide a complete electrical system<br />
as shown on the Drawings and as called for in these Specifications.<br />
B. All cutting and patching shall be done with the prior approval of the Architect/Engineer.<br />
Patching to match existing finishes shall be performed by the proper trades such as<br />
concrete finishers, sheetrockers, tapers, painters, etc.<br />
C. No welding or use of a cutting torch shall be permitted without the specific prior approval<br />
of the Engineer.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
Not Used<br />
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 CUTTING, DRILLING AND PATCHING<br />
A. All holes in masonry or concrete shall be drilled by use of a core drill.<br />
B. Cutting: Chases and trenches required for the installation of electrical raceways and/or<br />
other electrical apparatus shall be saw cut prior to removal of existing materials. All<br />
cutting shall be straight and level.<br />
C. Drilling: Impact rotary hammers shall not be used. Approval shall be obtained from the<br />
Architect and Structural Engineer prior to performing any core drilling. Upon completion of<br />
installation, seal excess openings with non-shrinking grout or compound.<br />
D. Sleeves: Wall sleeves required for electrical work shall be provided by this Contractor.<br />
Adequate fastening arrangements shall be employed in setting sleeves<br />
E. Patching: All surfaces disturbed during installation of the electrical system shall be fully<br />
restored to their original condition. Patching shall be performed by workers experienced,<br />
skilled, and licensed for that particular type of work involved. Inferior work will not be<br />
accepted.<br />
F. Grouting/Caulking: Contractor shall be responsible for grouting airtight, openings<br />
adjacent to raceways and other electrical openings to seal against passage of air, smoke,<br />
or vapors. Maintain ratings of fire rated partitions with 3M or equal fire rated caulking.<br />
END OF SECTION 16030<br />
CUTTING AND PATCHING<br />
16030-1
SECTION 16050 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Unless noted otherwise in this Specification or on the Drawings, all materials shall be<br />
new and in their original packages. All materials shall comply with this Specification and<br />
at a minimum all applicable codes and standards as listed in Section 16010.<br />
B. Nameplates shall identify equipment by name and source of power. They shall be a<br />
minimum of 1 1/4” x 3”, or larger if necessary for wording. Lettering shall be a minimum of<br />
3/16” in height. Black lettering on white nameplate shall be used.<br />
C. All distribution equipment, such as disconnects, starters and panels, shall be obtained<br />
from one manufacturer.<br />
D. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for verifying locations of such things as<br />
piping, ductwork, equipment, door swings, heights of cabinets and counters, etc., prior to<br />
the installation of all electrical equipment. Installed electrical work that interferes with the<br />
work of other trades shall be relocated by the Electrical Contractor at no additional cost to<br />
the Owner.<br />
E. Electrical Contractor shall paint all exposed electrical equipment, such as<br />
conduit/raceway, meter sockets and panels, to match adjacent finishes. Refer to<br />
Architectural Specifications for method to be used.<br />
F. Switched receptacles, where shown, shall be modified by removing split wiring tab and<br />
connected so that only the lower portion is switched.<br />
G. All receptacles and outlets located in block walls shall be mounted so that only one block<br />
is cut.<br />
H. Receptacles and outlets located on opposite sides of a common wall shall not be<br />
mounted in the same stud space. At least one stud shall separate devices. Where this<br />
requirement is not practical, such as in back to back floor plans where devices must be<br />
back to back, the use of 3M MPP-45 moldable Puddy Pad shall be used in sufficient<br />
thickness to match the hour rating of the wall. Back to back boxes are not acceptable.<br />
I. All switches, receptacles and outlets installed within rated assemblies shall be<br />
firestopped to maintain rating of assemblies.<br />
J. Circuit numbers shown are for reference only within noted panel. Contractor shall neatly<br />
identify correct circuit numbers on the as-built drawings.<br />
K. Where required, the Contractor shall provide GFI devices or GFI breakers per the NEC.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
Not Used<br />
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
16050-1
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Provide nameplates on all equipment such as disconnects, starters and panels.<br />
B. Identify all pull and junction boxes with circuit or feeder numbers and source of power<br />
using black permanent marker.<br />
C. Each panelboard shall be provided with a typed circuit directory. Clearly describe loads<br />
and areas served. Handwritten directories will not be accepted. Provide Owner with<br />
Microsoft Word compatible electronic file containing all circuit directories.<br />
D. The Electrical Contractor shall perform saw cutting, trenching, backfilling, compaction and<br />
patching required for underground raceway systems shown or specified.<br />
E. Electrical Contractor shall verify the location of all fixtures and devices with the Architect<br />
prior to installation.<br />
F. Provide access panels where junction boxes or pull boxes are installed in inaccessible<br />
locations. All access panels shall be approved by the Engineer and Architect prior to<br />
installation.<br />
G. All receptacles and outlets located in block walls shall be mounted so that only one block<br />
is cut.<br />
H. Electrical Contractor shall submit all fire stopping methods to the local authorities for<br />
approval. Provide copies of all approved fire stopping methods to the Engineer. All fire<br />
stopping shall be reviewed and approved by Local Authorities prior to installation.<br />
END OF SECTION 16050<br />
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS<br />
16050-2
SECTION 16111 - CONDUITS AND FITTINGS<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes: Provide raceways wherever required by the Drawings and<br />
Specifications.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Steel Conduit and Fittings: Galvanized steel by recognized manufacturers of raceway<br />
systems of type and sizes required.<br />
B. Non-Metallic Conduit: High impact PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Schedule 40 rated for 90-<br />
degree C wire, Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) listed in accordance with Article 347 of<br />
the National Electric Code (NEC) for underground and exposed use. PVC conduit shall<br />
be Schedule 80 for under roadway or vehicle crossing area.<br />
C. The following manufacturers are approved for conduit:<br />
1. Alfex<br />
2. Allied<br />
3. Canon<br />
4. Republic<br />
5. Sealtight<br />
6. Triangle<br />
7. VAW of America<br />
8. Youngstown<br />
D. The following manufactures are approved for conduit fittings:<br />
2.2 CONDUITS<br />
1. Appleton<br />
2. CH<br />
3. Kellems<br />
4. OZ Red Dot<br />
5. T&B<br />
A. Minimum Size: Conduit shall be sized according to the Drawings, with no conduit smaller<br />
than ½-inch trade size. If not sized on the Drawings, the NEC shall be used to determine<br />
the size based on the number and size of conductors required with THHN/THWN<br />
insulation. The Engineer shall approve all calculated conduit sizes and method of<br />
installation prior to installation.<br />
CONDUITS AND FITTINGS<br />
16111-1
B. Type: Conduit shall be rigid galvanized steel. In lieu of rigid galvanized steel the following<br />
conduits may be used only as specified herein:<br />
2.3 CONDUIT FITTINGS<br />
1. Intermediate Steel Conduit may be used in all locations.<br />
2. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): May be used in dry locations for wiring below 600<br />
volts in all interior spaces not in direct contact with earth or where exposed to<br />
weather using steel watertight compression fittings and backstraps. EMT shall<br />
not be installed in concrete slabs or in soil.<br />
3. Flexible Metal Conduit: Flexible metal conduit (FMC) or liquid tight flexible metal<br />
conduit (LFMC) shall be permitted only in the following locations:<br />
a. Flexible metal conduit may be used in masonry wall construction for<br />
‘fishing’ of circuitry. Liquid tight flexible metal conduit (LFMC) shall be<br />
used for final connections to equipment such as motors, fixed equipment,<br />
electric heating equipment, food service equipment, etc. LFMC shall be<br />
used in lengths no longer than thirty-six.. FMC ‘fished’ in masonry<br />
construction shall not be run horizontally and shall transition to EMT as<br />
soon as practical when leaving the wall construction from its vertical run.<br />
b. Fittings shall be steel set screw type for smaller sizes and steel, clamp<br />
type for larger sizes.<br />
c. LFMC shall have fully sized and insulated grounding conductor within the<br />
conduit.<br />
d. Concealed within equipment cabinets if approved by Architect/Engineer.<br />
4. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: May be used only where run in soil or in concrete<br />
slabs on grade unless otherwise noted on Drawings or specified herein.<br />
a. Conduit entries into pole bases or concrete pads shall be rigid<br />
galvanized steel. Conduits emerging out of floor slab-on-grade shall be<br />
rigid galvanized steel.<br />
b. All non-metallic conduits shall have a grounding conductor sized in<br />
accordance with Table 250-95 of the NEC, but not less than #12AWG.<br />
Contractor shall increase conduit size to accommodate the grounding<br />
conductor.<br />
5. Metalclad Cable (MC): MC cable may be used for light fixture connections in<br />
accessible ceiling and within casework where permitted by code. All MC cable<br />
shall have fully rated and insulated grounding conductor. MC cable shall not be<br />
used in walls or non accessible ceilings.<br />
A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit:<br />
1. Couplings, locknuts and bushings shall be threaded type. Threadless couplings<br />
shall not be used without prior approval of Engineer.<br />
2. Locknuts shall be of the conduit type.<br />
3. Bushings shall consist of an insulating insert molded or locked into metallic body<br />
fitting. Bushings made entirely of metal or non-metallic material are not permitted.<br />
4. Where conduit is installed in concrete, Erickson-type and set-screw couplings<br />
may be used to complete a conduit run. Set-screw fittings shall be approved for<br />
concrete installation and shall be case-hardened steel with hex head and cup<br />
point to firmly set in conduit wall for positive ground.<br />
5. Threaded cast iron type sealing fittings shall be used. Fittings used to prevent<br />
passage of water vapor shall be continuous drain type. Fittings in concealed work<br />
shall be installed in a flush steel box with blank coverplate having the same finish<br />
as that of other electrical plates in room.<br />
CONDUITS AND FITTINGS<br />
16111-2
B. EMT:<br />
1. For conduit 2-inch and smaller, fillings shall be concrete tight compression gland<br />
type only, with threaded outer nut or set-screw type. Fittings shall be malleable<br />
steel type, cast fittings of any kind are not acceptable.<br />
2. For conduit over 2-inch, connectors shall be set-screw type with two screws each<br />
and couplings shall be set-screw type with four screws each. Set-screws shall be<br />
case-hardened steel with hex head and cup point to firmly set in wall of conduit<br />
for positive ground.<br />
3. Indent type connectors shall not be permitted.<br />
4. Fittings made of pot metal Die cast or pressure-cast zinc alloy shall not be<br />
permitted.<br />
C. Flexible Metal: Multiple point type threading into internal wall of conduit convolutions or<br />
set screw type. Material shall be only steel or malleable iron.<br />
D. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal: Type incorporating a threaded grounding cone, a steel or<br />
plastic compression ring, and a gland for tightening. Connectors shall have insulated<br />
throats. Material shall be only steel or malleable iron.<br />
E. Direct Burial Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: Fittings as recommended by conduit<br />
manufacturer for bonding with solvent cement.<br />
2.4 FIRE STOPS<br />
A. General Requirements: Conduits and conduit sleeves that penetrate fire rated walls or<br />
partitions shall be sealed with Hevi-Duty/Nelson, Type CLK, non-sagging adhesive<br />
sealant or equal manufactured by 3M. All firestopping products shall be installed by<br />
experienced workers, familiar with the proper application and installation of appropriate<br />
U.L fire stopping design rating systems. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall submit<br />
fire stopping manufacturer’s appropriate conduit and conduit sleeve penetration system<br />
design criteria and UL approved number for each type of UL fire stopping design rating<br />
system used on the project.<br />
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 CONDUIT ARRANGEMENT AND SUPPORT<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Conduits shall be concealed within floor, ceiling or wall building construction,<br />
unless specifically noted or otherwise specified. Conduits shall only be installed<br />
exposed only in mechanical rooms and electric rooms and for connections at<br />
motors, utilization equipment, and exposed ceilings.. Conduits in exposed<br />
ceilings shall be laid out parallel or pendicular to basic building lines and shall be<br />
painted to match exposed ceiling.<br />
2. Conduit systems shall be complete with fittings and accessories to make system<br />
complete and electrically continuous from outlet to outlet and to cabinets and<br />
junction boxes. Conduits shall form a neat appearing, mechanically firm<br />
assembly, adhering to NECA standards of installation and good electrical<br />
practice. Conduit ends shall be reamed before installation and shall be capped<br />
during construction period. Route exposed conduits and conduit above<br />
accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls and adjacent piping with<br />
elbows, offsets, and bends uniform and symmetrical.<br />
CONDUITS AND FITTINGS<br />
16111-3
3. Conduits shall not obstruct head room, walkways or doorways.<br />
4. Conduits shall be secured to cabinets, junction boxes, pull boxes and outlet<br />
boxes by bonding type locknuts. Rigid and IMC conduit installations shall have a<br />
locknut on outside of enclosure and locknut and bushing on inside of enclosure.<br />
EMT installations may have a single locknut on inside of enclosure, wrench tight.<br />
Conduit connections shall not be made to junction box covers.<br />
5. Provide a pull wire in empty conduits, consisting of one No. 12 steel or copper<br />
wire or heavy duty nylon cord for small conduits and nylon rope for large<br />
conduits.<br />
6. Arrange conduit supports to prevent distortion of alignment by wire pulling<br />
operations. Conduit shall be fastened using straps or clamps, lay-in adjustable<br />
hangers, clevis hangers or bolted split galvanized hangers secured to structure<br />
with machine screws, expansion sleeves or lead anchors. Spring steel type<br />
supports or fasteners shall be permitted for concealed 1/2-inch EMT only. Chain,<br />
wire or perforated straps shall not be used to support or fasten conduit.<br />
7. Conduit support spacing shall be provided as required by the NEC, but in no<br />
case shall the maximum spacing of supports exceed six feet for conduits smaller<br />
than 1-inch trade size and 10 feet for conduits 1-inch trade size and larger.<br />
8. Group conduits in parallel runs where practical using conduit racks constructed of<br />
steel channel with conduit straps/damps or trapeze hangers with U-bolts or other<br />
approved fasteners.<br />
9. Fasteners shall be sized and designed for intended use. Fasteners, in solid<br />
masonry or concrete, shall be steel or malleable iron concrete inserts, 1/4-inch<br />
minimum diameter steel expansion anchors embedded not less than 1 1/8-inches<br />
or 1/4-inch minimum diameter power set fasteners with depth of penetration at<br />
least three inches. Hollow masonry anchors shall be toggle bolts, hollow wall<br />
fasteners, or concrete block anchors. Sheetmetal screws shall be used on metal<br />
studs and wood screws used on wood construction. Attachment by wood plugs<br />
or wood blocking is not permitted.<br />
3.2 CONDUIT INSTALLATION<br />
A. General Requirements: All raceways shall be installed in accordance with the NECA<br />
Standard of Installation:<br />
1. Cut conduit square using a saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.<br />
2. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings and couplings and fasten securely.<br />
3. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts for fastening conduit to cast boxes and for<br />
fastening conduit to sheetmetal boxes in damp or wet locations.<br />
4. Install no more than equivalent of four 90-degree bends between boxes for<br />
power circuits and two 90-degree bends for low voltage and communications<br />
circuits.<br />
5. Avoid moisture traps where possible. Where unavoidable, provide junction box<br />
with drain fitting at conduit low point. Outdoor conduits shall be graded a<br />
minimum of six inches per one-hundred feet with no traps.<br />
6. Coordinate all conduits with other trades. Consult with Mechanical Contractor<br />
before installing conduits for electrical feeders so that conflicts between locations<br />
of conduit runs, piping, and ductwork will be adjusted prior to installation. In<br />
general, large pipe mains and air ducts shall be given priority in available space.<br />
Conduit runs shall be installed so as to maintain, wherever practical, a minimum<br />
separation of three inches from water and waste piping and six inches from<br />
steam piping.<br />
7. Provide sealing fittings, to prevent passage of water vapor, where conduits pass<br />
from warm to cold locations.<br />
8. Drilling, cutting, and patching required for conduit installation shall be as<br />
described in Section 16012.<br />
CONDUITS AND FITTINGS<br />
16111-4
B. Conduits in New Masonry Walls: Conduits shall be installed during wall construction or<br />
“fished in”. No conduit shall be channeled in without special permission of Architect<br />
C. Horizontal Runs in Walls: No conduit shall run horizontally in concrete block or brick walls<br />
without approval of Architect/Engineer. Horizontal runs shall be made in floor or ceiling<br />
construction.<br />
D. Conduits on Equipment: Conduits shall not be mounted on ductwork, ventilation units or<br />
other such mechanical equipment, except where necessary to make connections to<br />
electrical devices that are part of or mounted on such equipment. Where raceways must<br />
be run on equipment, care shall be taken not to cover access doors, controls, removable<br />
panels, etc., or otherwise hinder the normal maintenance and repair of the equipment.<br />
E. Conduit Through Roofs: Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork<br />
where possible; otherwise, route through roof jack with pitch pocket.<br />
F. Conduits Through Exterior Walls: Where conduit systems pass through exterior walls or<br />
footings below grade, entrance shall be made watertight by providing pipe sleeves in wall<br />
with 1/2-inch minimum clearance around conduit and caulking with oakum or an<br />
approved non-hardening type caulking compound. Alternate acceptable method is by<br />
means of a conduit entrance seal, O.Z./Gedney Company, Type “FSK’ or as approved by<br />
Engineer. Seal conduit stubs as above and, in addition, inside of conduit shall be sealed<br />
watertight with an approved non-hardening type caulking compound packed around<br />
wires.<br />
G. Conduits Above Furred or Suspended Ceilings: Branch circuit conduits and conduits<br />
feeding ceiling lighting shall not be supported by suspended ceiling lighting fixtures,<br />
mechanical piping or air conditioning ducts. Branch circuit conduits may be fastened to<br />
ceiling support members with fasteners designed for that purpose.<br />
H. Conduit Sleeves: Same material as conduits required in the area. Both ends of sleeves<br />
shall have bushings.<br />
3.3 GROUTING AND FIRE STOPS<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
3.4 CONDUIT STUB-UPS<br />
1. Contractor shall be responsible for grouting airtight any openings adjacent to<br />
raceways and other openings to seal against passage of air, smoke or vapors.<br />
2. Contractor shall seal around each conduit or conduit sleeve penetrating fire rated<br />
walls or partitions with sealant specified. Interior conduit sleeves in walls or<br />
partitions shall be sealed to provide a complete fire rated installation in<br />
accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions.<br />
3. All firestopping products shall be installed by experienced workers, familiar with<br />
the proper application and installation of appropriate UL fire stopping design<br />
rating systems. Contractor shall submit fire stopping manufacturer’s appropriate<br />
conduit and conduit sleeve penetration system design criteria and UL approved<br />
number for each type of UL fire stopping design rating system used on the<br />
project prior to installation.<br />
A. Stubbed Up Through Floor Slabs: Where conduit is called to be stubbed up at an<br />
exposed location, a rigid conduit threaded coupling shall be installed flush with finish<br />
floor. Provide a recessed pipe plug, flush with floor, in each stub-up.<br />
CONDUITS AND FITTINGS<br />
16111-5
3.5 EMPTY CONDUITS<br />
A. Identification: Empty conduits installed for future use or for use by others shall have<br />
markers and identification at terminations. Empty raceway boxes shall be marked with<br />
the system named in a visible place on the exposed coverplate.<br />
END OF SECTION 16111<br />
CONDUITS AND FITTINGS<br />
16111-6
SECTION 16112 - OUTLET BOXES<br />
PART 1. -GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes: Provide outlet boxes of heavy gauge galvanized steel, of knockout<br />
type, wherever required by the Drawings and Specifications.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Recognized Manufacturers of electric outlet boxes,<br />
manufactured in accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code (NEC)<br />
and industry standards.<br />
2.2 MATERIALS<br />
A. Ceiling Boxes: 4-inch octagonal ceiling boxes shall be used, except as otherwise<br />
specified. For additional wire space 4 1 1/16 square boxes may be used. Outlet boxes for<br />
fixtures shall be complete with fixture studs.<br />
B. Wall Boxes: 4-inch square wall boxes shall be used with one or two device raised cover.<br />
Raised covers or tile rings shall be flush with finished walls. Locations with a single<br />
device may use 2-inch by 4-inch by 2 ½” (deep) device box.<br />
1. Boxes in plastered walls shall be standard 4 inch square boxes with appropriate<br />
plaster rings.<br />
2. Boxes in brick, exposed concrete block, glazed tile and wood paneled walls shall<br />
be 4-inch square having a raised cover with straight sides not less than 1-inch. 4<br />
11/16- inch square box may be used for additional wire space. Where thickness<br />
of masonry or more than two gangs are required 3 ¾-inch high masonry boxes<br />
may be used.<br />
3. Straight through and sectional switch boxes shall be used.<br />
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Boxes shall not be recessed back-to-back on opposite sides of wall, offset a<br />
minimum of six inches. Through wall boxes shall not be used.<br />
2. Boxes shall be roughed-in to provide a neat appearance. Centerlines of boxes<br />
shall be aligned vertically and horizontally. Boxes shall be symmetrically located<br />
with the major architectural features when they occur between doors and<br />
windows and in wood panels.<br />
3. Adjust horizontal position of boxes such that bottom of box is located on top of<br />
masonry coarse and vertical centerline is either on a masonry course or centered<br />
on a masonry unit. Contractor shall coordinate with other trades so boxes are<br />
installed with no unsightly joints around them.<br />
4. Boxes shall be installed such that the front of box is flush with finished wall,<br />
boxes more than 1/4 inch back from finished wall shall not be acceptable.<br />
OUTLET BOXES<br />
16112-1
5. Boxes in finished ceiling construction shall be supported by structural building<br />
members or when necessary to bar hangers or steel channels supported by<br />
either structural building members or ceiling framing channels. Exposed boxes<br />
shall be secured to structure by toggle bolts, wood screws or lead anchors.<br />
6. Contractor shall coordinate height and location of boxes with other trades so as<br />
not to conflict with other work or equipment It shall be the Electrical Contractor’s<br />
responsibility to move boxes that conflict with others at no additional cost to<br />
Owner.<br />
END OF SECTION 16112<br />
OUTLET BOXES<br />
16112-2
SECTION 16113 - PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes: Provide pull boxes as required to facilitate the pulling of wires or when<br />
more than four quarter bends occur in any conduit run. No attempt has been made to<br />
show all necessary boxes on Drawings.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Type:<br />
1. Pull and junction boxes shall be sized and installed to meet requirements of<br />
Article 370 of the latest edition National Electric Code (NEC).<br />
2. Provide galvanized code-gauge sheet steel junction and pull boxes.<br />
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General Requirements: Locate pull and junction boxes shall be located so as to be<br />
accessible after building is finished. Pull and junction boxes shall not be placed in any<br />
finished spaces without prior approval of Architect/Engineer. No boxes shall be installed<br />
above plaster ceilings without prior approval of Architect/Engineer.<br />
1. Pull boxes installed above lay-in ceiling tiles shall be within twenty-four inches of<br />
ceiling for accessibility and shall not conflict with removal of ceiling tiles.<br />
2. Pull boxes shall be within twenty-four inches where installed above access<br />
panels.<br />
3.2 CONDUCTORS IN PULL BOXES<br />
A. General Requirements: Conductors shall be of sufficient length within pull boxes to neatly<br />
install and organize conductors without excess.<br />
3.3 IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. Pull Boxes: Pull boxes shall be identified as to type of system in box as follows:<br />
1. Stencil coverplate with 1/2-inch black letters in non-finished areas.<br />
2. Identify with a tag inside of box in finished areas.<br />
3. Paint boxes red and stencil “FIRE ALARM” for all boxes used for fire alarm and<br />
detection systems.<br />
B. Conductors: Identify in a permanent neat and legible manner all conductors or cables<br />
within box by means of tags, pressure sensitive tape or cable ties.<br />
END OF SECTION 16113<br />
PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES<br />
16113-1
SECTION 16117- SAFETY SWITCHES<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes: Provide safety switches wherever required by the Drawings and<br />
Specifications.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
1. Every effort has been expended to provide an accurate list of mechanical<br />
equipment motors as shown on the drawings and the Equipment Schedule.<br />
However, the Contractor shall verify motor horsepower sizes on site before<br />
installing switches or selecting fuses.<br />
A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 16010.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All safety switches shall be of one manufacturer as follows or<br />
approved equal.<br />
2.2 MATERIALS<br />
A. Type:<br />
1. Cutler-Hammer<br />
2. General Electric<br />
3. Siemens<br />
4. Square D<br />
1. Safety switches shall be fused. Non-fusible switches may be used in lieu of<br />
fusible where allowed by the National Electrical Code (NEC).<br />
2. Safety switches shall be NEMA HD (heavy duty) type, horsepower rated, and of<br />
ampere sizes shown on Drawings or as required by the NEC. Safety switches<br />
shall have NEMA I enclosures, except in wet locations or where indicated as<br />
weatherproof, in which case a NEMA 3R enclosure shall be used. Locations on<br />
roof or outside shall be considered wet locations.<br />
3. Fusible safety switches shall contain Class R fuse provisions to reject fuses,<br />
except Class R type.<br />
4. Safety switches shall contain padlocking provisions and defeater screw<br />
mechanisms. Provide interlock contacts where so specified.<br />
5. Safety switches shall be rated 250 volts where used on 120/208 volt or 120/240<br />
volt systems.<br />
6. Switches rated 30 amperes through 100 amperes shall have lugs listed for 60-<br />
degree C or 75-degree C conductors. Switches rated over 100 amperes shall<br />
have Iugs listed for 75 degrees C.<br />
END OF SECTION 16117<br />
SAFETY SWITCHES<br />
16117-1
SECTION 16118 - FUSES<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Provide all labor, materials, and accessories as required to protect feeders and branch<br />
circuits for panels, motors, and electrical appliances wherever required by the Drawings<br />
and Specifications or by applicable provisions of the National Electric Code (NEC).<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All fuses shall be of one manufacturer as follows:<br />
2.2 FUSE TYPES<br />
1. Bussman<br />
2. Littlefuse<br />
3. Shawmut<br />
A. 600 Ampere and Below (Bussman model numbers used to set the minimum standard for<br />
material and equipment):<br />
1. All fuses shall have 300,000 amperes RMS interrupting rating.<br />
2. Fuses shall be Underwriters’ Laboratories Class R current limiting, dual element<br />
time delay, rejection type.<br />
3. Fuses shall be Bussman LPN-RK_SP.<br />
B. 601 Ampere and Above (Bussman model numbers used to set the minimum standard for<br />
material and equipment):<br />
1. All fuses shall have 200,000 amperes RMS interrupting rating.<br />
2. Fuses shall be Underwriter’ Laboratories Class L current limiting, time delay,<br />
pure silver link type.<br />
3. Fuses shall be Bussman KRP-C_SP.<br />
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 FUSE INSTALLATION<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Provide fuses in all fusible switches<br />
2. Provide all fuses of ampere ratings required by the NEC to protect feeders and<br />
equipment.<br />
END OF SECTION 16118<br />
FUSES<br />
16118-1
SECTION 16120 - WIRE AND CABLE (600 VOLTS AND BELOW)<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes: Provide and connect 600 volt and below wire and cable.<br />
B. Wiring Sizing: Wire sizes indicated on Drawings are for copper conductors. Conductor<br />
sizes are specified by American Wire Gage (AWG) numbers, except where conductor<br />
cross sections in MCM is indicated. Unless noted otherwise conductors smaller than 12<br />
AWG shall not be used for branch circuits.<br />
C. In Conduit: Unless otherwise noted on Drawings, electric system conductors shall be<br />
installed in conduit. Conduit fill requirements of the National Electric Code (NEC) shall not<br />
be exceeded.<br />
D. Metalclad Cable: MC Cable may be used in accessible ceilings and in casework, where<br />
permitted by Code. Ensure that any use of MC cable is properly used and supported in<br />
accordance with NEC 330. All MC cable shall have a fully rated, insulated, internal<br />
grounding conductor.<br />
1.2 CONDUCTORS FOR COMMUNICATION AND OTHER SYSTEMS<br />
A. General Requirements: Refer to specific communication system Sections for conductor<br />
requirements.<br />
B. Conductors not installed in raceway shall be plenum rated.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide and connect wire and cable to NEMA, ICBA and<br />
Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) standards.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All wire and cable and accessories shall be as follows:<br />
2.2 CONDUCTORS<br />
1. Building Wire/Cable: Recognized manufactures of electrical building wire.<br />
2. Plastic Tape: AMP, Eagle or 3M.<br />
3. Spring Wire Connectors: Heyco, Ideal, 3M or T&B.<br />
4. Split-Bolt Connectors: Bumdy, O-Z/Gedney, Square D, or T&B.<br />
5. Solderless Crimp Pressure Connectors: Bumdy, Ideal T&B or 3M.<br />
6. Twist-on Wire Connectors: Buchanan, Ideal or 3M<br />
7. Vingl Electric Insulation Tape: Permacel, Tomic or 3M.<br />
A. Copper Conductors: Conductors shall be soft, annealed 98% copper, electrically<br />
continuous and free from short circuits or grounds.<br />
B. Aluminum Conductors: Aluminum conductors shall not be used on this Project.<br />
WIRE AND CABLE<br />
16120-1
2.3 SOLID AND STRANDED<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
2.4 INSULATION<br />
1. Wires shall be solid or stranded for sizes 10 AWG and smaller.<br />
2. Wires shall be stranded for sizes 8 AWG and larger.<br />
A. Voltage Class: Insulation, unless otherwise noted, shall be 600 volt.<br />
B. Insulation Type: Conductor insulation shall be as follows:<br />
1. Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuit Conductors: Type THHN/THWN with a<br />
temperature rating of 75 degrees C.<br />
C. Color Code: Wire and cable color shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the<br />
NEC. On larger cables, where factory color coding is not available, marking tape shall be<br />
used to identify each phase and neutral conductors. A minimum length of six inches shall<br />
be color coded at each end and in all pull boxes. For modifications and additions to<br />
existing wiring systems, color coding shall match existing wiring systems.<br />
2.5 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS<br />
A. Conductors 8 AWG and Smaller: Use solderless crimp or indent type pressure<br />
connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and taps for 8 AWG. For 10<br />
AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps. Strictly comply<br />
with the number, size and combination of conductors as listed on manufacturer’s<br />
packaging.<br />
B. Conductors 6 AWG and Larger: Use split bolt connectors for copper wire splices and<br />
taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical<br />
tape.<br />
2.6 CONTROL WIRING<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Control conductors shall be 14 AWG or larger, if provided under this division<br />
Wiring provided under Division 15, shall be #18 AWG or larger.<br />
2. Conductors shall be sized large enough so that voltage drop under in-rush<br />
conditions will not adversely affect operation of the controls.<br />
WIRE AND CABLE<br />
16120-2
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Provide 12 AWG or larger conductors for power and lighting circuits.<br />
2. Provide 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuit home runs<br />
longer than 100 feet and for 20 ampere. All 120v circuits shall have dedicated<br />
neutral conductors.<br />
3. Place an equal number of conductors for each phase of a circuit in same<br />
raceway or cable.<br />
4. Conductors shall be tested to be continuous and free from shorts and grounds.<br />
5. Neatly install, organize, and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and<br />
panelboards.<br />
6. Conductor lengths for parallel circuits shall be equal.<br />
7. Provide a minimum of twelve inches of slack conductor at each outlet.<br />
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use Underwriters’<br />
Laboratories (UL) listed wire pulling lubricant for pulling No. 4 AWG and larger<br />
wires.<br />
2. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.<br />
3. Control and communication conductors shall be installed in separate, dedicated<br />
raceway systems.<br />
3.3 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Splices shall only occur in accessible junction boxes. Splices in conductors<br />
installed below grade are not permitted<br />
2. Wires shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to installing Iugs and connectors.<br />
3. Splices, taps and terminations shall be made to carry full ampacity of conductors<br />
without perceptible temperature rise.<br />
4. Spare conductors shall be terminated with electrical tape and tagged “spare”<br />
END OF SECTION 16120<br />
WIRE AND CABLE<br />
16120-3
SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes: Provide all labor, materials and accessories as required to install and<br />
connect wiring devices wherever required by Drawings and Specifications.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 16010.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:<br />
2.2 DEVICE COLOR<br />
1. All wiring devices shall be of one manufacturer as follows (Leviton and Hubbell<br />
catalog numbers are used to specify required type and quality):<br />
a. Arrow-Hart<br />
b. Eagle<br />
c. General Electric<br />
d. Hubbell<br />
e. Leviton<br />
f. Pass & Seymour<br />
g. Slater<br />
h. Sierra<br />
2. All wall plates shall be of one manufacturer as follows:<br />
a. Arrow Hart<br />
b. Leviton<br />
c. Sierr2<br />
d. Slater<br />
A. General Requirements: Unless noted otherwise, all wiring devices and wall plates shall<br />
be coordinated with the Architect.<br />
2.3 SWITCHES<br />
A. General Requirements: Switches for lighting loads shall be 20 amp, 120 volt, quiet toggle<br />
type and side wired.<br />
B. Switches shall be equal to the following:<br />
1. 20 amp, 120/277 volt, single pole Leviton #1221-2X<br />
2. 20 amp, 120/277 volt, 3-way Leviton #1223-2X<br />
3. 20 amp, 120/277 volt, 4-way Leviton #1224-2X<br />
C. Switches controlling over nine amps shall be 20 amp rated.<br />
WIRING DEVICES<br />
16140-1
2.4 CONVENIENCE OUTLETS<br />
A. General Requirements: Duplex receptacles shall be 20 amp, 125 volt, 3-wire, grounding<br />
type, quickwire push-in and side or back and side wired. All receptacles shall be installed<br />
with the ground slot down. Provide GFI receptacles where shown or required by the<br />
National Electrical Code (NEC) and install with ground slot down.<br />
B. Receptacles shall be equal to the following:<br />
1. 20 amp, 125 volt, GFI Leviton #M1636-X (NEMA 5-20R)<br />
2. 20 amp, 125 volt Leviton #BR20-X (NEMA 5-20R)<br />
C. Special receptacles shall be equal to the following:<br />
2.5 DEVICE PLATES<br />
1. 20 amp, 250 volt Leviton #5821-X (NEMA 6-20R)<br />
2. 30 amp, 125/250 volt, 3-pole, 4-wire, grounding Leviton #278 (NEMA 14-30R)<br />
3. 50 amp, 125/250 volt, 3-pole, 4-wire, grounding Leviton #279 (NEMA 14-50R)<br />
A. General Requirements: Device plates shall be provided for all devices shown on the<br />
Drawings or called for in the specifications. Device plates in finished and unfinished areas<br />
shall be nylon, unless noted otherwise. Multiple device plates shall be constructed of a<br />
single plate. No sectional plates will be accepted.<br />
B. Special Screws: Where so indicated, device plates shall be complete with special<br />
tamperproof spanner oval head screw. Furnish Owner with three special screw drivers for<br />
the spanner head screws.<br />
C. Engraved Plates: Engraved plates shall have letters as required, 1/8-inch minimum letter<br />
height and black filling. Printed tape or glued on plates are not acceptable. The following<br />
plates shall be engraved:<br />
1. Wall plates so indicated on Drawings.<br />
2. Switch wall plates controlling any lights which are out of sight of switches.<br />
3. Switch wall plates controlling motors and other utilization equipment.<br />
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION OF DEVICES<br />
A. General Requirements: Device height shall be as follows, except where noted otherwise<br />
on the Drawings:<br />
B. Switches, receptacles and outlets shall be mounted at the following heights, measured<br />
from device center to floor, unless noted otherwise.<br />
1. Receptacle 18”<br />
2. Telephone outlet 18”<br />
3. Telephone outlet, wall 54”<br />
4. Switch 48”<br />
C. The Contractor shall coordinate the mounting height of all special receptacles with the<br />
Architect, Owner, Mechanical Contractor and equipment suppliers.<br />
WIRING DEVICES<br />
16140-2
D. Where locations shown or mounting heights specified for devices conflict with other<br />
trades or building finishes, the Contractor shall coordinate exact requirements prior to<br />
installation and install only after the approval of all involved.<br />
E. Provide spacers as required between outlet boxes and devices so that each device is<br />
flush with the finished wall. Plate screws shall not be used to stabilize device.<br />
F. Location:<br />
3.2 MOVING DEVICES<br />
1. Switches near doors shall be located on side opposite the hinges (verify door<br />
swings with Architectural Drawings before installation) and close to door trim.<br />
Edge of switch plate shall be within six inches of door frame.<br />
A. The Owner, through the Architect/Engineer, reserves the right to move any device a<br />
distance of ten feet in any direction from the location shown on the Drawings without an<br />
increase in Contract amount. This requirement shall only apply to devices before<br />
installation.<br />
B. In the event that an outlet shown on the Drawings will not be able to serve the specified<br />
piece of equipment, the outlet shall be relocated as required, with no increase in contract<br />
amount.<br />
END OF SECTION 16140<br />
WIRING DEVICES<br />
16140-3
SECTION 16150 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes: Provide circuits, including final connections unless noted otherwise, to<br />
each item of electrically powered equipment wherever required by the Drawings and<br />
Specifications.<br />
1.2 CONNECTIONS<br />
A. Motors: Connect as indicated on drawings.<br />
B. Kitchen Equipment: Connect as called for in the Electrical Equipment Schedule.<br />
Equipment locations, conduit rough-ins and dimensions shall be obtained from the<br />
kitchen equipment suppliers’ Shop Drawings prior to conduit installation.<br />
C. Do not scale Electrical Drawings for rough-in dimensions.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
Not Used<br />
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 CONDUIT STUB-UPS<br />
A. General Requirements: Provide a rigid conduit coupling installed flush with finished floor<br />
for conduit stub-ups through floor to equipment or machinery. Rigid conduit shall be run<br />
up to equipment as required. Provide a recessed pipe plug in flush coupling for future<br />
connections where noted to be capped flush with finished floor.<br />
END OF SECTION 16150<br />
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS<br />
16150-1
SECTION 16450 - GROUNDING SYSTEM<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes: Provide labor, materials, equipment and accessories for the following<br />
Work:<br />
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
1. Electric Service Ground: Provide grounding of secondary service neutrals at the<br />
supply side of the service disconnecting means in accordance with the National<br />
Electric Code (NEC).<br />
a. Provide grounding of the metallic conduit system, cabinets, non-current<br />
carrying parts of equipment and neutral service conductor at the service<br />
entrance.<br />
2. Equipment Ground: Provide solid interconnections to form a continuous<br />
permanent and effective equipment grounding medium between the entire<br />
conduit system, switch boxes, cabinets, motor frames and other permanently<br />
installed electrical equipment:<br />
a. Feeder and Branch Circuits: Provide an insulated grounding conductor,<br />
sized per the NEC, but not less than #12 AWG.<br />
1) All EMT conduits<br />
2) All PVC conduits<br />
3) All flexible metal conduits and liquid-tight flexible metal conduits<br />
3. Metal Piping: Bond interior metal piping systems to the services equipment<br />
enclosure, the grounded conductor at the service or to the grounding electrode<br />
conductor.<br />
4. Communication System Grounding: Provide grounding for each communication<br />
system.<br />
A. Regulatory Requirements: Provide grounding systems to comply with the requirements of<br />
the NEC. Coordinate with the local electrical inspector.<br />
B. Tests: Measure ground grid resistance with earth test megger. Provide additional ground<br />
rods and conductors as required until resistance to ground meets NEC and local code<br />
requirements.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Grounding System: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems<br />
with assembly of materials including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors,<br />
terminals, grounding rods/electrodes, bonding jumpers, and additional accessories<br />
needed for complete installation. Where materials or components are not indicated,<br />
provide products meeting the requirements of NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry<br />
standards for applications indicated.<br />
GROUNDING SYSTEM<br />
16450-1
1. Conductors: Copper cable, stranded of size per the NEC unless otherwise noted<br />
on Drawings.<br />
2. Bonding Jumper Braid: Copper braided tape, constructed of 30 gauge bare<br />
copper wires and properly sized for indicated applications.<br />
3. Connectors, Terminals, and Clamps: Burdy, Keamey, T & B, Penn-Union, or<br />
approved equal.<br />
4. Ground Rods: Copper clad steel, ½” diameter, a minimum of three 10 feet in<br />
length and 10’ apart.<br />
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General Requirements: Grounding and bonding shall comply with the requirements of the<br />
NEC and shall be coordinated with the local electrical inspector. This, however, shall not<br />
be construed as relieving the Contractor from meeting any requirements of the Drawings<br />
and Specifications that may exceed code requirements.<br />
3.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODE<br />
A. General Requirements: Grounding electrode shall be the metal water piping system of<br />
the building. Water piping system electrode shall be supplemented by the following<br />
additional electrodes:<br />
1. Metal Frame of Building: Metal frame of building in those buildings with a metal<br />
frame system.<br />
3.3 MAIN BONDING JUMPER<br />
A. General Requirements: Connect secondary service neutral and grounding electrode<br />
conductor to equipment grounding bus in service equipment.<br />
3.4 FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUITS<br />
A. General Requirements: Provide an insulated grounding conductor, sized in accordance<br />
with the NEC, within all PVC conduits, within all flexible metallic conduits and within all<br />
EMT conduits .<br />
3.5 CONDUITS, BOXES, CABINETS AND PANELBOARDS<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Ground all metallic conduit systems. Establish ground continuity by providing<br />
standard couplings, connectors, fittings and jumpers at all grounding type wiring<br />
devices, motor and ground terminals.<br />
2. Ground wires shall be grounded to each pull box, junction box, outlet box,<br />
cabinets and other enclosures through which the ground wires pass, except for<br />
special isolated grounding systems.<br />
GROUNDING SYSTEM<br />
16450-2
3. Provide lugs in each box and enclosure for ground wire termination where<br />
required.<br />
3.6 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT<br />
A. Motors and Starters: Provide lugs in motor terminal boxes and starter housings for<br />
ground wire termination and provide interconnecting ground wire.<br />
B. Receptacles: Provide a ground wire from receptacle and light switch green ground<br />
terminals to outlet box ground screws.<br />
C. Lighting Fixtures: Provide a green ground wire with power wires from fixture through<br />
flexible conduit to first outlet box for all fixtures connected with flexible conduit.<br />
D. Electrical Equipment: Provide a ground lug for termination of green ground conductor for<br />
all Fixed electrical equipment.<br />
3.7 COMMUNICATION GROUNDING<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Provide grounding at telephone and CATV backboards.<br />
END OF SECTION 16450<br />
GROUNDING SYSTEM<br />
16450-3
SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes: Provide panelboards wherever required by the Drawings and<br />
Specifications.<br />
1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION<br />
A. Circuit Numbers: Circuit numbers shown on Drawings shall be used for reference only.<br />
Actual connections shall be in accordance with phasing of cabinet, load balance and<br />
common neutral requirements.<br />
B. Contractor shall contact local power utility anc coordinate all service requirements and<br />
pay all associated fees and charges.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Shop Drawings: Provide Shop Drawings in accordance with Section 16010.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Regulatory Requirements: Construct panelboards to NEMA and Underwriters’<br />
Laboratories (UL) standards.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: All panelboards shall be as follows:<br />
2.2 COMPONENTS<br />
1. AMP (Cutler-Hammer Components)<br />
2. Cutler-Hammer<br />
3. EMI (Cutler-Hammer Components)<br />
4. General Electric<br />
5. Siemens-ITE<br />
6. Square D<br />
7. States Electric<br />
A. General Requirements: Panelboards shall be dead front safety type and shall be UL<br />
listed.<br />
B. Enclosures: Enclosures shall be constructed of code grade steel with concealed trim<br />
clamps and hinges. Panel front shall be lockable with all panels throughout the Project<br />
keyed alike. Provide two keys for each panel.<br />
C. Lugs: Solderless lugs only shall be provided in mains, unless otherwise noted on the<br />
Drawings and/or the Panelboard Schedule. Main lugs shall be suitable for both 60-<br />
degree- C and 75-degree-conductors. Main and neutral lugs shall be compression type.<br />
Provide sufficient number of lugs to individually terminate each conductor.<br />
PANELBOARDS<br />
16470-1
D. Bussing: Provide bussing made from 98% electrolytic copper or 55% conductivity<br />
aluminum and independently supported without dependence upon circuit breakers.<br />
E. Gutters: Provide oversized gutters for feed through, where indicated or required. Where<br />
double tugs are not permitted by local code authorities, provide suitable pull box or gutter<br />
adjacent to panels for connections. Feeder wiring shall be capable of accepting a dampon<br />
ammeter.<br />
F. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Provide circuit breakers as follows:<br />
1. Bolt-in type.<br />
2. Multi-pole breakers shall be common trip and reset, with one handle.<br />
3. Rated for 10,000 amperes for 120/208 volt systems minimum, in lighting and<br />
appliance panelboards. Rated for 22,000 amperes, minimum, for all distribution<br />
panelboards. Refer to drawings if higher ratings are required.<br />
4. Contain HACR label when feeding heating, air conditioning or refrigeration loads.<br />
G. Fusible Switches: Provide quick-made, quick break fusible switches (QMB or equal).<br />
H. Special Panelboard Requirements:<br />
1. The following shall be provided as specified:<br />
a. Panelboards with wireways above or below the panelboard shall have<br />
conduit enclosures of the same size and finish as the panelboards with<br />
removable, screw attached, front covers.<br />
b. Panelboards with double tubs shall have separate individualized fronts<br />
for each tub.<br />
c. Provide lock-offs over required breaker handles as noted.<br />
d. Provide GFI breakers as noted.<br />
e. Breakers serving equipment under the kitchen exhaust hood shall be<br />
shunt-trip for emergency shut-down.<br />
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
3.2 SPARE CONDUITS<br />
1. Feeder and branch circuit conduits shall meet the cabinet squarely and shall be<br />
arranged to facilitate training of conductors to their respective terminals.<br />
2. Top of panelboard tubs shall be 6’-6” above finished floor.<br />
A. General Requirements: Provide three 3/4-inch empty conduits from each flush mounted<br />
panelboard to ceiling space or area above panelboard for future panel connections.<br />
Empty conduits shall be capped or turned horizontally (Parrallel to floor)..<br />
3.3 IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. Panel Identification: Panelboards shall be labeled per Section 16000.Provide<br />
identification plates on front exterior of panleboards.<br />
PANELBOARDS<br />
16470-2
B. Circuit Identification:<br />
1. Circuit Breaker Panelboards: Provide typed directories identifying all circuits with<br />
clear plastic cover mounted in a card holder. Room numbers or names used for<br />
circuit identification shall correspond to nameplates installed on room doors by<br />
General Contractor or as selected by Owner and shall be verified as these may<br />
not be the same as room titles on Drawings. Provide Owner with electronic file of<br />
circuit directories in Microsoft Word compatible format.<br />
END OF SECTION 16470<br />
PANELBOARDS<br />
16470-3
SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING<br />
PART 1. - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes: Install fixtures shown on Drawings.<br />
PART 2. - PRODUCTS<br />
Not Used<br />
PART 3. - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
3.2 FIXTURE MOUNTING<br />
1. Remove manufacturer labels from exterior of fixtures, do not remove any UL or<br />
maximum wattage labels .<br />
2. Install Fixtures when the work of other trades in the area is substantially<br />
complete, to avoid damage or defacement after installation. Fixtures shall not be<br />
installed on ceilings until ceiling finishes are complete, except fixtures may be<br />
installed on exposed T-bar ceilings after T-bars are installed and before tile<br />
installation.<br />
3. Coordinate fixture locations with the ceiling installation and install fixtures in a<br />
uniform pattern to tiles or exposed grids. Fixtures shall be symmetrically spaced<br />
with rows in alignment and parallel with the building features. Measurements<br />
shall be taken from the Architectural Drawings.<br />
4. Directional fixtures shall be properly aimed and aligned as directed by the Owner<br />
representative.<br />
A. General Requirements:<br />
1. Surface fixtures, other than fluorescent type, shall be securely fastened to outlet<br />
box.<br />
2. Recessed fixtures, except those installed within an exposed grid type ceiling,<br />
shall be supported from building structural members or from concealed steel<br />
framing channels 1-1/2 inches or larger. No recessed fixtures shall be supported<br />
from ceiling tiles.<br />
3. Individually mounted fluorescent fixtures shall be supported within 12 inches of<br />
each end of fixture.<br />
3.3 SUPPORTS AND FASTENING<br />
A. For Fixtures Not In Exposed T-Bar Grid Ceilings: Fixture supports, or outlet boxes used<br />
to support fixtures, shall be securely fastened to building structural members or to<br />
concealed steel ceiling framing channels 1-1/2 inches or larger. Fixture hanging rods<br />
shall be of adequate dimensions to support fixture and shall be not less than 3/8 inch<br />
diameter. Fixture supports shall be fastened to structure as shown on drawing details.<br />
B. For Fixtures in Exposed T-Bar Grid Ceilings: Fixtures shall be supported as follows:<br />
LIGHTING<br />
16500-1
1. Recessed fixtures designed expressly for lay-in mounting shall be installed in that<br />
manner. Grid system shall be supported from structure as required by ceiling<br />
system installer.<br />
2. Provide flexible metal conduit or MC cable connections for all recessed type<br />
fixtures in lay-in ceilings with sufficient length to permit fixture to be lifted out.<br />
Maximum flexible conduit shall not exceed six feet. One to four fixtures may be<br />
served by a single common outlet box, securely fastened to structure or ceiling<br />
support members and within 30 inches of ceiling tile.<br />
3. Provide fixture retainers or clips for each fixture installed in exposed grid<br />
suspended ceilings in accordance with IBC and state building codes.<br />
3.4 SPECIAL FIXTURE COORDINATION<br />
A. Storage and Mechanical/Electrical Rooms: Contractor shall verify actual fixture locations<br />
with Architect. Fixture locations shall be revised as required to clear all equipment, ducts,<br />
and piping.<br />
END OF SECTION 16500<br />
LIGHTING<br />
16500-2